WO2013061081A1 - Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases - Google Patents

Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013061081A1
WO2013061081A1 PCT/GB2012/052673 GB2012052673W WO2013061081A1 WO 2013061081 A1 WO2013061081 A1 WO 2013061081A1 GB 2012052673 W GB2012052673 W GB 2012052673W WO 2013061081 A1 WO2013061081 A1 WO 2013061081A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
substituted
formula
alkoxy
optionally
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/GB2012/052673
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Steven John Woodhead
Christopher William Murray
Valerio Berdini
Gordon Saxty
Gilbert Ebai Besong
Lieven Meerpoel
Olivier Alexis Georges Querolle
Virginie Sophie Poncelet
Original Assignee
Astex Therapeutics Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2014537731A priority Critical patent/JP6054406B2/en
Priority to CN201280065562.3A priority patent/CN104024233B/en
Priority to US14/354,636 priority patent/US9303029B2/en
Priority to MX2014004861A priority patent/MX356205B/en
Priority to IN986MUN2014 priority patent/IN2014MN00986A/en
Priority to DK12794746T priority patent/DK2776408T3/en
Priority to BR112014010183A priority patent/BR112014010183B8/en
Priority to ES12794746T priority patent/ES2765031T3/en
Application filed by Astex Therapeutics Limited filed Critical Astex Therapeutics Limited
Priority to KR1020147010838A priority patent/KR102086871B1/en
Priority to SI201231698T priority patent/SI2776408T1/en
Priority to RU2014121389A priority patent/RU2639863C2/en
Priority to CA2853401A priority patent/CA2853401C/en
Priority to EP12794746.3A priority patent/EP2776408B1/en
Priority to AU2012328171A priority patent/AU2012328171B2/en
Publication of WO2013061081A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013061081A1/en
Priority to US15/014,156 priority patent/US10052320B2/en
Priority to HRP20192102TT priority patent/HRP20192102T1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/498—Pyrazines or piperazines ortho- and peri-condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. quinoxaline, phenazine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/4985—Pyrazines or piperazines ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic ring systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/506—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/5375—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5377—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. timolol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D241/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D241/40—Benzopyrazines
    • C07D241/42—Benzopyrazines with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D241/38—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D241/40—Benzopyrazines
    • C07D241/44—Benzopyrazines with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D407/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00
    • C07D407/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D407/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D407/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00
    • C07D407/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • the invention relates to new quinoxaline derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.
  • W is -N(R 3 )- or -C(R 3a R 3b )-; each R 2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C -4 alkyl, C 2 - 4 alkenyl, C 2 - 4 alkynyl, C ⁇ alkoxy, hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl, hydroxyC -4 alkoxy, haloCi_ alkyl, haloC-i- 4 alkoxy, halod.
  • -X-CH N-; wherein R 17 represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and X represents O or S;
  • E represents a bond, -(CR 22 R 23 ) n -, C ⁇ alkenediyl optionally substituted with R 22 , C 2- 4 alkynediyl optionally substituted with R 22 , -CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 2 R 23 ) s -CO-, -NR 22 - (CR 22 R 23 ) S -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -NR 22 -, -0-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 2 R 23 ) s -0-, -S(0) m -(CR 2 R 23 ) s -, (CR 22 R 23 ) s -S(0) m -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -CO-NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 )s- or -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -
  • D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • each R 1a is independently selected from hydrogen, d -4 alkyl, hydroxyCi- 4 alkyl, d. 4 alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(d. 4 alkyl)amino or -NH(d- 8 cycloalkyl), cyanod. 4 alkyl, d- 4 alkoxyd- 4 alkyl, and C 1-4 alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms;
  • R 3c or to form ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, C 1-4 alkyl, hydroxyC 1-4 alkyl, H 2 N-C 1 .
  • R 6 represents C 3 . 8 cycloalkyl, C 3 . 8 cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S; said C 3 .
  • R 7 and R 8 each independently represent hydrogen, d_ 6 alkyl, hydroxyd. 6 alkyI, halod- 6 alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl or d. 6 alkoxyd. 6 alkyl;
  • R 9 represents d-scycloalkyl, d-scycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said C 3 .
  • R 9 when two of the substituents of R 9 are attached to the same atom, they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S;
  • R 12 represents hydrogen or C -4 alkyl optionally substituted with C 1-4 alkoxy
  • R 14 and R 15 each independently represent hydrogen, or haloCi. 4 alkyl, or C -4 alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected from hydroxyl, C 1-4 alkoxy, amino or mono-or di(Ci- 4 alkyl)amino;
  • R 18 represents hydrogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 3 . 8 cycloalkyl, C 1-4 alkyl substituted with C 3 - 8 cycloalkyl;
  • R 19 represents hydrogen; C 1-6 alkyl; C 3-8 cycloalkyl; substituted with -O-R 20 ; - (CH 2 ) r -CN; -(CH 2 ) r CONR 20 R 21 ; -(CH 2 )n-NR 20 R 21 ; -(CH 2 ) r1 -NR 20 COR 21 ; -(CH 2 ) r1 -NR 20 - (CH 2 ) s -S0 2 -R 21 ; -(CH 2 ) r1 -NH-SO 2 -NR 20 R 21 ; -(CH 2 ) r1 -NR 20 CO 2 R 21 ; -(CH 2 ) r -SO 2 NR 20 R 21 ; phenyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2 , 3, 4 or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C 1-4 alkyl, C ⁇ alkyloxy, cyano or amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic mono
  • R 20 and R 21 independently represent hydrogen, Ci_ 6 alkyl, hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl, -(CH 2 ) n -0-C 1 _ 6 alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R 20 and R 21 can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6- membered ring which optionally contains a further heteroatom selected from O, S or N; R 22 and R 23 independently represent hydrogen, Ci_ 6 alkyl, or hydroxyC -6 alkyl; m independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2;
  • n independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
  • s independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4; r independently represent an integer equal to 1 , 2, 3, or 4;
  • r1 independently represent an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4;
  • references to formula (I) in all sections of this document include references to all other sub-formula, sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples as defined herein.
  • C x - y (where x and y are integers) as used herein refers to the number of carbon atoms in a given group.
  • a C 1-6 alkyl group contains from 1 to 6 carbon atoms
  • a C 3 . 6 cycloalkyl group contains from 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • a Ci_ 4 alkoxy group contains from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and so on.
  • 'halo' or 'halogen' refers to a fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atom.
  • 'C -4 alkyr, or 'C h alky!' refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • examples of such groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl and the like.
  • 'C 2 . 4 alkeny or 'C 2 - 6 alkenyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group containing from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.
  • 'C 2 - 4 alkenediyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched bivalent hydrocarbon group containing from 2 to 4 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.
  • 'C 2 - 4 alkynyl' or 'C 2 - 6 alkynyr as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon triple bond.
  • 'C ⁇ alkoxy' or 'C 1-6 alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an -O-C ⁇ alkyl group or an -0-C 1-6 alkyl group wherein C 1-4 alkyl and Ci_ 6 alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, and the like.
  • the term as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C 1 _ 4 alkyl-0-C 1 . 4 alkyl group or a Ci- 6 alkyl-0-C 1-6 alkyl group wherein d ⁇ alkyland C -6 alkyl are as defined herein.
  • groups include methoxyethyl, ethoxyethyl, propoxymethyl, butoxypropyl, and the like.
  • the term 'C 3 . 8 cycloalkyr as used herein refers to a saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl and the like.
  • 'C 3 . 8 cycloalkeny refers to a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a carbon carbon double bond.
  • 'hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl' or 'hydroxyC ⁇ alkyr as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C 1-4 alkyl or C -6 alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group.
  • the terms 'hydroxyC 1-4 alky or 'hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl' therefore include monohydroxyC ⁇ alkyl, monohydroxyCi-ealkyl and also polyhydroxyC ⁇ alkyl and polyhydroxyC ⁇ alkyl.
  • Examples of such groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and the like.
  • the term 'haloC ⁇ alkyl' or 'haloCi. 6 alkyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C 1-4 alkyl or C -6 alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen.
  • the term 'halod- 4 alkyl' or 'halod- 6 alkyl' therefore include monohaloCi -4 alkyl, monohaloCi. 6 alkyl and also polyhaloC 1-4 alkyl and polyhaloC ⁇ alkyl.
  • haloCi_ 4 alkyl or halod ealkyl may have one, two, three or more halogens.
  • haloCi_ 4 alkyl or halod ealkyl may have one, two, three or more halogens.
  • examples of such groups include fluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl or trifluoroethyl and the like.
  • 'hydroxyhaIod- 4 aIkyl' or 'hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a d- 4 alkyl or C -6 alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen.
  • 'hydroxyh.alod- 4 alkyl' or 'hydroxyhalod- 6 alkyl' therefore refers to a C _ 4 alkyl or C 1-6 aikyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.
  • 'hydroxyC ⁇ alkoxy' or 'hydroxyd ealkoxy' refers to an -0-d- 4 alkyl group or an -O-d ealkyl group wherein the d ⁇ alkyl and Ci_ 6 alkyl group is as defined above and one or more than one hydrogen atom of the Ci_ 4 alkyl or C ⁇ alkyl group is replaced with a hydroxyl group.
  • the term 'hydroxyd- 4 alkoxy' or 'hydroxyCi. 6 alkoxy' therefore include monohydroxyd- 4 alkoxy
  • the term 'haloC 1-4 alkoxy' or 'halod. 6 alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a -0-d.
  • halod. 4 alkoxy' or 'halod. 6 alkoxy' therefore include monohaIod_ 4 alkoxy, monohaloC 1-6 alkoxy and also polyhaloC 1-4 alkoxy and polyhaloC -6 alkoxy.
  • 'hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an -0-C 1-4 alkyl group wherein the Ci_ 4 alkyl group is as defined herein and wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen.
  • the term 'hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkoxy' therefore refers to a -0-C-
  • the term as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C- M alkyl-O-C ⁇ alkyl group wherein C 1-4 alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C 1-4 alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen.
  • the term 'haloCi. 4 alkoxyC ⁇ alkyl' therefore refers to a C ⁇ alkyl-O-C ⁇ alkyl group wherein in one or both of the Ci_ 4 alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein d -4 alkyl is as defined herein.
  • haloC ⁇ alkoxyC ⁇ alkyl means C -4 alkyl substituted with haloC 1-4 alkoxy.
  • C 1-4 alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C -4 alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen.
  • the terms 'hydroxyhaloC 4 alkoxyC 1-4 alkyr therefore refers to a C 1 _ 4 alkyl-0-C 1 . 4 alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C _ 4 alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C-i_ 4 alkyl is as defined herein.
  • 'hydroxyC 2 - 6 alkenyl' refers to a C 2 - 6 alkenyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C 2 . 6 alkenyl is as defined herein.
  • 'hydroxyC 2 - 6 alkynyr refers to a C 2 - 6 alkynyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C 2- 6 alkynyl is as defined herein.
  • phenylC ⁇ alkyl refers to a C 1-6 a(kyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one phenyl group.
  • cyanoC ⁇ alkyl or cyanoC 1-6 alkyl refers to a C -4 alkyl or C 1-6 alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one cyano group.
  • heterocyclyl as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems.
  • heterocyclyl group includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems.
  • such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
  • Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring.
  • Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members.
  • Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 1 1 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members.
  • the heterocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
  • the heterocyclyl groups can be heteroaryl groups having from 5 to 12 ring members, more usually from 5 to 10 ring members.
  • heteroaryl is used herein to denote a heterocyclyl group having aromatic character.
  • heteroaryl embraces polycyclic (e.g. bicyclic) ring systems wherein one or more rings are non-aromatic, provided that at least one ring is aromatic. In such polycyclic systems, the group may be attached by the aromatic ring, or by a non-aromatic ring.
  • Examples of heteroaryl groups are monocyclic and bicyclic groups containing from five to twelve ring members, and more usually from five to ten ring members.
  • the heteroaryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings, or two fused five membered rings.
  • Each ring may contain up to about five heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen.
  • the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example a single heteroatom.
  • the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom.
  • the nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen.
  • the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring will be less than five.
  • five membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups.
  • Examples of six membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine.
  • a bicyclic heteroaryl group may be, for example, a group selected from:
  • n a cyclopentyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1 , 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.
  • bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole (e.g.
  • imidazo[2,1-b]thiazole and imidazoimidazole (e.g. imidazo[1 ,2-a]imidazole).
  • bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limited to benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole,
  • benzisothiazole isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, indolizine, indoiine, isoindoline, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine (e.g. pyrazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidine), triazolopyrimidine (e.g. [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidine), benzodioxole, imidazopyridine and pyrazolopyridine (e.g. pyrazolo[1 ,5-a]pyridine) groups.
  • purine e.g., adenine, guanine
  • indazole pyrazolopyrimidine
  • triazolopyrimidine e.g. [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidine
  • benzodioxole imidazo
  • bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups.
  • polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non- aromatic ring include, tetrahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, dihydrobenzthiene, dihydrobenzfuran, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1 ,4]dioxine, benzo[1 ,3]dioxole, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzofuran, tetrahydrotriazolopyrazine (e.g. 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro- [1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine), indoline and indane groups.
  • tetrahydroisoquinoline tetrahydroquinoline
  • dihydrobenzthiene dihydrobenzfuran
  • 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1 ,4]dioxine benzo[1 ,3]dioxole
  • a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. Each ring may, in addition, contain up to about four other heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 3 heteroatoms, for example 1 , 2 or 3, more usually up to 2 nitrogens, for example a single nitrogen.
  • the nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.
  • nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxatriazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furazanyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1 ,2,3-triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazolyl), tetrazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, benzthiazolyl and benzisothiazole, indolyl, 3H-indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, isoindolin
  • pyridopyridinyl quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl and pteridinyl.
  • nitrogen-containing polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring examples include tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, and indolinyl.
  • non-aromatic group embraces, unless the context indicates otherwise, unsaturated ring systems without aromatic character, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems.
  • fully saturated refers to rings where there are no multiple bonds between ring atoms.
  • Saturated heterocyclyl groups include piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine.
  • Partially saturated heterocyclyl groups include pyrazolines, for example 2-pyrazoline and 3-pyrazoline.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups are groups having from 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Such groups can be monocyclic or bicyclic, for example, and typically have from 1 to 5 heteroatom ring members (more usually 1 , 2, 3 or 4 heteroatom ring members), usually selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur.
  • the heterocyclyl groups can contain, for example, cyclic ether moieties (e.g. as in tetrahydrofuran and dioxane), cyclic thioether moieties (e.g. as in
  • cyclic amine moieties e.g. as in pyrrolidine
  • cyclic amide moieties e.g. as in pyrrolidone
  • cyclic thioamides e.g. as in pyrrolidone
  • cyclic thioesters e.g. as in imidazolidin-2-one
  • cyclic ester moieties e.g. as in butyrolactone
  • cyclic sulphones e.g. as in sulpholane and sulpholene
  • cyclic sulphoxides cyclic
  • sulphonamides and combinations thereof e.g. thiomorpholine.
  • Particular examples include morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1 -piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), piperidone, pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, azetidine, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran),
  • piperidine e.g. 1 -piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl
  • pyrrolidine e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl
  • pyrrolidone e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl
  • pyrrolidone e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidin
  • dihydrothiophene dihydropyran, dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoiine, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazone, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine.
  • preferred non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include saturated groups such as piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, morpholine, piperazine and N-alkyl piperazines.
  • heterocylic groups can contain, for example cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amides (such as a pyrrolidinone, piperidone or caprolactam), cyclic sulphonamides (such as an isothiazolidine 1 ,1 -dioxide,
  • nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include aziridine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g.
  • heterocyclyl groups can be polycyclic fused ring systems or bridged ring systems such as the oxa- and aza analogues of bicycloalkanes, tricycloalkanes (e.g.
  • heterocyclyl groups can each be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituent groups.
  • heterocyclyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted by 1 , 2, 3 or 4 substituents.
  • the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic or bicyclic, typically it is unsubstituted or has 1 , 2 or 3 substituents.
  • Carbocyclyl as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems.
  • the term “carbocyclyl group” includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated carbocyclyl ring systems.
  • such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
  • Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring.
  • Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members.
  • Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 1 1 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members.
  • carbocyclyl groups can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
  • carbocyclyl comprises aryl, C 3 - 8 cycloalkyl, C 3 - 8 cycloalkenyl.
  • aryl refers to carbocyclyl aromatic groups including phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl groups.
  • substituents can be selected each independently out of a list of numerous definitions, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.
  • substituents can be selected each independently out of a list of numerous definitions, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.
  • a particular substituent is further substituted with two or more groups, such as for example hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkyl, hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkoxy, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.
  • R 18 and R 19 represent C ⁇ alkyi; in particular R 18 is -CH 3 and R 19 is -CH 3 or -C(CH 3 ) 3 .
  • Y represents -E-D wherein E represents a bond.
  • Y represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12 (e.g. 5 to 10) ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R groups.
  • Y represents phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents an aromatic 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents an aromatic 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups.
  • E represents a bond, C 2 - 4 alkenediyl optionally substituted with R 22 , CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -CO-, -NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -NR 22 -, -0-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, - (CR 22 R 23 )s-CO-NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 ) s - or -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -NR 22 -CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -.
  • E represents a bond, C 2 - 4 alkenediyl, -CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) S - CO-, -NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -, -(CR 2 R 3 ) S -NR 22 -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -CO-NR 2 -(CR 22 R 23 ) s - or - (CR 22 R 23 ) s -NR 22 -CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -.
  • E represents C 2 . 4 alkenediyl, -CO-(CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -CO-, - NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -, -(CR 22 R 23 )s-NR 22 -, -(CR 22 R 23 ) s -CO-NR 2 -(CR 2 R 23 ) s - or -(CR 2 R 3 ) S - NR 2 -CO-(CR 22 R 23 )s
  • E represents a bond, C 2 . 4 alkenediyl, -CO-(CR 2 R 23 ) s -, -NR 22 - (CR 22 R 23 ) s -, -(CR 22 R 23 )s-NR 22 -, -(CR 2 R 23 ) s -CO-NR 22 -(CR 22 R 23 ) s - or -(CR 22 R 23 ) S -NR 22 - CO-(CR 22 R 23 )s-.
  • E represents a bond.
  • Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond.
  • Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond and D represents any one of the following : - a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • phenyl or naphthyl wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups;
  • heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups; C 2 -4alkenyl, hydroxyC 1-6 alkyl, halod-6aikyl.
  • each R 1a is independently selected from hydrogen, C 1-4 aikyl, hydroxyd- 4 alkyl, d.
  • D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heterocyclyl being other than pyrazol-4-yl, wherein said heterocyclyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R groups.
  • D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
  • D is other than pyrazolyl and phenyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
  • E is other than a bond and D is other than pyrazolyl
  • D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
  • D represents piperidinyl, pyridinyl (e.g. pyridin-3-yl or pyridine-4-yl), phenyl, pyrrolyl (e.g. pyrrol-2-yl or pyrrol-3-yl), imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-1-yl, imidazol-2- yl or imidazol-4-yl), triazolyl (e.g. 1 ,2 3 triazol-4-yl or 1 ,2,4 triazol-1-yl), pyrrolopyridinyl (e.g.
  • pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl benzodioxolyl (e.g 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl), indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrrolyl, pyrimidinyl (e.g. pyrimidin-5-yl), pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl (e.g.
  • halo e.g. fluoro or chloro
  • cyano e.g. fluoro or chloro
  • C 1-6 alkyl e.g. methyl
  • C 1-6 alkoxy e.g. methoxy
  • -C( 0)-0-C 1 . 6 alkyl
  • E is other than a bond and D is other than pyrazolyl or phenyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
  • E is a bond and D is 1 -pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl or 3-pyrazolyl, all may optionally be substituted.
  • E is a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted. In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.
  • E is other than a bond and D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl.
  • E is other than a bond and D is optionally substituted pyrazol-4-yl.
  • W is -N(R 3 )-.
  • W is -C(R 3a R 3b )-.
  • R 1 represents hydrogen, C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 - 4 alkenyl, hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl, haloCi_ 6 alkyl, hydroxyhaloC 1-6 alkyl, cyanoC 1 _ 4 alkyl, d- 6 alkoxyd- 6 alkyl wherein each d- 6 alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C-
  • R 1 represents hydrogen
  • R 1 represents C 1-6 alky!. In one embodiment R 1 represents methyl.
  • one or more R 2 represents d_ 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-.
  • one or more R 2 represents d_ alkoxy or halogen, for example CH 3 O- or fluoro or chloro.
  • n is equal to 0. In one embodiment n is equal to 1. In one
  • n is equal to 2. In one embodiment n is equal to 3. In one embodiment n is equal to 4.
  • n is equal to 2, 3 or 4. In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R 2 is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position.
  • n is equal to 2 and one R 2 is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position and each R 2 represents d- 4 alkoxy, for example each R 2 represents CH 3 0-.
  • n is equal to 3 and one R 2 is present at the 2-position, one R 2 is present at the 3-position and one R 2 is present at the 5-position. In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R 2 is present at the 3-position and represents Ci. 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-; one R is present at the 5-position and represents d- 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-; one R 2 is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.
  • n is equal to 4 and one R 2 is present at the 2-position, one R 2 is present at the 3-position, one R 2 is present at the 5-position and one R 2 is present at the 6-position.
  • n is equal to 4 and one R 2 is present at the 3-position and represents d- 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-; one R 2 is present at the 5-position and represents d- 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-; one R 2 is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro, and one R 2 is present at the 6-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.
  • R 3 represents C 2 . 6 alkenyl.
  • R 3 represents C 2 . 6 alkynyl.
  • R 3 may represent -CH 2 -C ⁇ C— H .
  • R 3 represents C 2 . 6 alkynyl (e.g. -CH 2 c ⁇ c ) substituted with R 9 .
  • R 9 may represent an optionally substituted aromatic 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl.
  • the heterocyclyl may be unsubstituted or substituted, for example substituted with one C 1-4 alkoxyl substituent, for example -OCH 3 .
  • R 3 may represent-CH 2 C ⁇ C (2-pyrimidinyl) or -CH 2 — c ⁇ c (3-methoxy-pyridin-2-yl).
  • R 3 represents hydroxyC ⁇ alkyl, hydroxyhaloC ealkyl, Ci -6 alkyl substituted with R 9 , d.
  • R 3 represents hydroxyC L galkyl, haloCi. 6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl substituted with R 9 , C 1-6 alkyl substituted with -NR 10 R 11 , C ⁇ alkoxyC L ealkyl, or C 2 . 6 alkynyl.
  • R 3 represents C -6 alkyl (e.g. Ci -4 alkyl) substituted with R 9 .
  • R 9 represents an optionally substituted saturated or an aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl.
  • R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl (e.g. C ⁇ alkyl) substituted with R 9 , wherein R 9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two nitrogen heteroatom, for example pyridinyl.
  • the heterocyclyl may be unsubstituted or substituted, for example substituted with C 1-4 alkyl substituted with -NR 14 R 15 (e.g. -NH 2 ), for example -CH 2 NH 2
  • R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl (e.g. C 1-4 alkyl) substituted with R 9 , wherein R 9 represents optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two heteroatoms selected from N, or O, for example pyrrolidinyl, morpholinyl, piperidinyl and piperazinyl.
  • R 3 represents - CH 2 CH 2 -morpholinyl, -CH 2 CH 2 -piperazinyl, -CH 2 CH 2 -(4-piperazin-1 -yl-ethanone) or - CH 2 CH 2 -pyrrolidin-2-one.
  • R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl (e.g.
  • R 9 represents C 3 . 8 cycloalkyl, for example cyclopropyl.
  • R 3 represents -CH 2 -cyclopropyl.
  • R 3 represents C ⁇ alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo and/or - NR 10 R 11 .
  • R 3 represents Ci_ 6 alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo or - NR 10 R 11 , wherein the C 1-6 alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl.
  • R 3 represents Ci -6 alkyl substituted with hydroxyl or - NR 10 R 11 .
  • R 3 represents hydroxyC ⁇ ealkyl.
  • R 3 may represent - CH 2 CHOHCH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 OH or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R 3 represents Ci-ealkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each Ci_ 6 alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups.
  • R 3 may represent
  • R 3 represents R 3 may represent -CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 .
  • R 3 represents hydroxyhaloC ⁇ alkyl, for example R 3 may represent - CH 2 CHOHCF 3 .
  • R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl substituted with -NR 10 R 11 .
  • R 3 represents C 1-4 alkyl substituted with -NR 10 R 11 .
  • R 3 represents C -4 alkyl substituted -NR 10 R 11 , wherein the Ci_ 4 alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl.
  • R 3 represents d, 4 alkyl substituted with -NR 10 R 11 , wherein the d- 4 alkyl group is an ethylene group (- CH 2 CH 2 -).
  • R 3 represents C -6 alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl) substituted with -NR 10 R 11 , wherein R 10 and R 11 are independently selected from hydrogen, C ⁇ alkyl and haloCi. 6 alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso-propyl or -CH 2 CF 3 ).
  • R 10 and R 11 have the following meanings:
  • R 10 and R 1 represents hydrogen and the other represents C -6 alkyl, for example CH 3 or -CH(CH 3 ) 2 .
  • R 3 may represent -CH 2 CH 2 NHCH 3 or - CH 2 CH 2 NHCH(CH 3 ) 2 ;
  • R 10 and R 11 represents hydrogen and the other represents haloC ⁇ alkyl, for example -CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 3 may represent -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NHCH 2 CF 3 ;
  • R 10 and R 11 represents hydrogen and the other represents hydroxyCi. 6 alkyl, for example -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R 3 may represent -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NHCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH ;
  • R 3 represents -CH 2 CH 2 NHCH(CH 3 ) 2 .
  • R 3a may represent -NR 10 R 11 , hydroxyl, C 1-6 alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, hydroxyhaloC 1-6 alkyl, haloCi. 6 alkyl.
  • R represents hydroxyl.
  • R represents hydrogen. In one embodiment R 3b represents hydroxyl.
  • R 3a represents hydroxyl and R 3b represents hydrogen.
  • R and R are taken together to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached.
  • R represents hydrogen.
  • R 5 represents hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl. In one embodiment, R 14 and R 15 represent hydrogen.
  • R 3 represents a saturated 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O, such as for example morpholinyl.
  • R 9 is selected from:
  • an optionally substituted 4 membered heterocyclyl containing one oxygen heteroatom an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocycie containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, a partially saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom which may optionally be substituted,
  • R 9 represents C 3 . 6 cycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example oxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example 1 H-isoindol-1 ,3-dione.
  • a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl such as for example oxiranyl
  • an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle such as for example pyrolidinonyl
  • an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or
  • R 9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl.
  • R 9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl.
  • R 9 represents an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl.
  • Optional substituents may represent C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • R 9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl.
  • R 10 represents hydrogen or C 1-6 aikyl
  • R 10 is hydrogen
  • R 10 or R 11 represents hydrogen, d ealkyl, haloCi_ 6 alkyl, hydroxyd- 6 alkyl, Chalky! substituted with -NR 14 R 15 , d- 6 alkyl substituted with carboxyl.
  • R 10 and R 11 represent hydrogen or C h alky!.
  • R 6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted.
  • R 6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted.
  • R 6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted.
  • R 12 represents hydrogen or C -4 alkyl optionally substituted with d- 4 alkyloxy.
  • R 13 represents a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O.
  • R and R each independently represent hydrogen or C -4 alkyl.
  • R 22 and R 23 each independently represent hydrogen.
  • R 10 and R 1 represents hydrogen, d- 6 alkyl, halod. 6 alkyl, hydroxyd. 6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl substituted with -NR 14 R 15 , C 1-6 alkyl substituted with carboxyl;
  • R 6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated or aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted;
  • R 14 and R 15 each independently represent hydrogen or C -4 alkyl;
  • R 22 and R 23 each independently represent hydrogen.
  • W is -N(R 3 )-;
  • each R 2 represents d_ 4 alkoxy, for example CH 3 0-;
  • D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g.
  • R 1 groups for example D represents piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl (e.g. 1-pyrazolyl, 2-pyrazolyl, or 3-pyrazolyl);
  • R 1 represents
  • - halo for example fluoro or chloro
  • Ci- 6 alkyl for example -CH 3 ;
  • - hydroxyC 1-6 alkyl for example -CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 OH;
  • R 3 represents
  • R 18 represents Ci_ 6 alkyl, for example -CH 3 ;
  • R 19 represents C 1-6 alkyl, for example -CH 3 , C(CH 3 ) 3 ;
  • n an integer equal to 2; the /V-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
  • the compound of formula (I) is any one of the following compounds
  • W is -N(R 3 )- and Y is D (E is a bond).
  • W is -N(R 3 )- and Y is -E-D wherein E is other than a bond.
  • W is -N(R 3 )-
  • W is -N(R 3 )-
  • Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups, and wherein one or more of the following applies :
  • n 2;
  • R 2 is C ⁇ alkyloxy
  • R 2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
  • W is -N(R 3 )-
  • Y is -E-D
  • E is a bond and D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, tri
  • W is -C(R 3a R 3b )- and Y is D (E is a bond).
  • W is -C(R 3a R 3b )- and Y is -E-D wherein E is other than a bond.
  • W is -C(R a R 3b )-
  • W is -C(R 3a R 3b )-
  • Y is -E-D
  • E is a bond
  • D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl
  • said heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R 1 groups, and wherein one or more of the following applies :
  • n 2;
  • R 2 is C ⁇ alkyloxy
  • R 2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
  • W is -C(R 3a R 3b )-
  • Y is -E-D
  • E is a bond and D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl
  • an intermediate of formula (IV) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (II) wherein and W 2 , each independently represent a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro or bromo and the like, with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or palladium (II) acetate , a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, a suitable ligand, such as for example
  • triphenylphosphine and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (II) acetate
  • a suitable base such as sodium tert-butoxide or Cs 2 C0 3
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]- 2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine]
  • a suitable solvent or solvent mixture such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water
  • W 3 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and wherein R x and R y represent C 1-4 alkyl, and R z represent C 1-4 alkyl or phenyl, for instance R x and R y represent CH 3 and R z represents C(CH 3 ) 3 or phenyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or N,N- dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIII).
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or N,N- dimethylacetamide
  • This reaction may optionally be performed in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, K 2 C0 3 , Na 2 C0 3 or sodium hydride and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitriie, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide, 1 -methyl-pyrrolidinone, a suitable alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol and the like.
  • a suitable salt of the intermediate of formula (X) e.g. HCI salt of intermediate of formula (X)
  • potassium iodide e.g. HCI salt of intermediate of formula (X
  • Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R 9 , said ring being represented by formula (XXI) or a suitable salt of an intermediate of formula (XXI), in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitriie, 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, or an alcohol, e.g. 1 -butanol, optionally in the presence of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 , K 2 C0 3 or triethylamine, resulting in a compound of formula (la-d).
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetonitriie, 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, or an alcohol, e.g. 1 -butanol
  • potassium iodide or a suitable base such as for example Na 2 C0 3 , K 2 C0 3 or triethylamine
  • a suitable acid such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride
  • a suitable solvent e.g. ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylacetamide.
  • compounds of formula (la-d) or (la-b-1 ) can also be prepared by reacting respectively an intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula W 6 -C -6 alkyl-Ncycle or W 6 - C ⁇ alkyl-NHR 10 wherein W 6 is as defined above.
  • R 3d represents optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, such as for example -CH2-C3H5
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium
  • a suitable base such as for example NaH
  • a suitable solvent such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide
  • tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0) a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'- diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine] or 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2'-(N,N- dimethylamino)biphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (la-c).
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'- diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine] or 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2'-(N,N- dimethyla
  • a suitable base such as for example NaH
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide.
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane.
  • an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XXXVIII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIH'), which is converted into a compound of formula (la-k-1 ) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • a suitable acid such as for example trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyi ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for example tetrqahydrofuran.
  • halo-C 2 - 6 alkynyl-0- Si( x )(R y )(R z ) can also be used.
  • a compound of formula (la-k-2) is prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXXXII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like.
  • Said intermediate of formula (XXXXII) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with W 13 -C2-6alkynyl-Si(CH3) 3 wherein W 13 is a suitable leaving group, such as for example halogen, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • an intermediate of formula (XII) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XI) wherein represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0)
  • a suitable base such as for example Na 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent or solvent mixture such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water.
  • the intermediate of formula (XII) is hydrogenated in a next step to an intermediate of formula (XIII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Nickel, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran, or mixtures thereof.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example Nickel
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran, or mixtures thereof.
  • Intermediates of formula (XIII) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (IV) with NH 4 OH in the presence of Cu 2 0. In a next step, the intermediate of formula (XIII) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XIV) wherein W 5 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (II) acetate
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 , 1 '-binaphthalenej-2,2'-diylbis[1 , 1 -diphenylphosphine]
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ethylene glycol dimethyl ether or dioxane
  • This reaction may also be performed in the presence of Pd 2 (dba) 3 as catalyst, Xphos as ligand, a suitable base, such as for example Cs 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. butanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example Cs 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. butanol.
  • an intermediate of formula (XV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 , 1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XVI).
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (II) acetate
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 , 1 -diphenylphosphine
  • a suitable solvent such as
  • tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0) a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 or K 3 P0 4 , optionally in the presence of a suitable ligand, such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether.
  • a suitable base such as for example Na 2 C0 3 or K 3 P0 4
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether.
  • the resulting protected intermediate of formula (VI) can be converted into the deprotected intermediate by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • Said -C 1-6 alkyl-OH can be converted into -C 1 .
  • the intermediate of formula (XVIII) can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Pd 2 (dba) 3 , a suitable base, such as for example K 3 P0 4 , a suitable ligand, such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxy-biphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water or mixtures thereof.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example Pd 2 (dba) 3
  • a suitable base such as for example K 3 P0 4
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxy-biphenyl
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane or water or mixtures thereof.
  • the D'N moiety represents a -D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom.
  • Intermediates of formula (VIII') wherein D represents D'NH, said intermediates being represented by formula (Vlll'-a) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (VIN'-b) by reaction with W 12 -Ci- 6 alkyl-halo wherein W 12 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide.
  • Said intermediates of formula (Vlll'-b) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (VIH'-c) by reaction with R 6 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • a suitable base such as for example K 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetonitrile.
  • the R 6 carries a hydroxyl group as in an intermediate of formula (VII !'-c-1 )
  • Said intermediate of formula (XXXIX) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXX) wherein R u represents -S0 2 CH 3 , by reaction with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, which can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXXI) by reaction with an intermediate of formula (X) in a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane
  • Said intermediate of formula (XXXXI) can then be deprotected into a compound of formula (la-b-4) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize for which other D ring moieties the described reactions also apply.
  • a suitable base such as for example K 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like.
  • the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) or (lll-a) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), optionally a suitable ligand, such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'- dimethoxybiphenyl, a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 or K 3 P0 4 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether or dioxane or water.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)
  • a suitable ligand such as 2-dicyclohexy
  • halo e.g. bromo, iodod and the like
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example
  • An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with a suitable ring moiety represented by D, e.g.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)
  • a suitable ligand such as for example Rac- bis (diphenylphosphino)-1 ,1 '-binaphthyl
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable solvent such as for example toluene to obtain the corresponding final compound.
  • an intermediate of formula (XIX) can react with e.g.
  • An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with 1-(triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3-boronic acid, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
  • tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, tetrabutylammonium fluoride to cleave the C-silicon bond, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether, to obtain a compound of formula (la-c-2).
  • An intermediate of formula (XIX) can react with zinc cyanide in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • the resulting intermediate of formula (IXL) can react with sodium azide and ammonium chloride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide, to obtain a compound of formula (la-c-3).
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide
  • an intermediate of formula (IV) is reacted with R 3d -NH 2 in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, and a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '- binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], resulting in an intermediate of formula (XX) which is reacted in a next step with an intermediate of formula (XIV) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or 1 , 1 '-[1
  • an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D-NH 2 in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene, a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (lb-1 ).
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene
  • a suitable base such as for example cesium carbonate
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane
  • an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D CH , in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide to obtain a compound of formula (lb-2).
  • a compound of formula (Ib- 2) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLI) with D-W as defined above, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
  • dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide and acetonitrile.
  • the intermediate of formula (XLI) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of (XIX) with (trimethylsilyl)acetylene in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide, followed by reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XL) with potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g.
  • the intermediate of formula (XLI) can also react with 2-(4- morpholino)ethylazide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example copper iodide, a suitable base, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -diisopropylethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, to obtain a compound wherein E is a bond and D is 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl-1 -triazolyl.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example copper iodide
  • a suitable base such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -diisopropylethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran
  • An intermediate of formula (XLI) can also react with sodium azide and formaldehyde in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example copper sulfate and sodium L ascorbate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane and acetic acid, to obtain a compound of formula (IA-c-4).
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example copper sulfate and sodium L ascorbate
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane and acetic acid
  • the intermediate of formula (XLII) can also react with D-H in the presence of of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride to obtain a compound of formula (Ib-4).
  • suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example methylene chloride
  • An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with NH 3 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether to obtain intermediate (XLIII), which can react with D-COOH, in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride to obtain a compound of formula (lb-5).
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether
  • suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole
  • suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example methylene chloride
  • a suitable base such as for example NaH
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide
  • said intermediate is reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, and a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXIV) which is converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXV) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • the intermediate of formula (XXXV) is converted into a compound of formula (lc-4) by reaction with a suitable base, such as for example ⁇ /,/V-diisopropylethyIamine and triethylamine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example ⁇ /,/V-diisopropylethyIamine and triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a suitable acid such as for example hydrochloric acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetone.
  • the obtained intermediate of formula (XLVI) is then reacted with R 19 -0-NH 2 in the presence of a suitable base such as for example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, resulting in a compound of formula (ld-1 ).
  • a preferred intermediate of formula (XLIV) is the intermediate of formula (XIX).
  • An intermediate of formula (XLVI) can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein E is a direct bond and D is 3-methyl-oxazole or oxazole, by reaction with 1 - methyl-1 -tosylmethyl isocyanide or tosylmethyl isocyanide, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example dipotassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example dipotassium carbonate
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • compounds of formula (I) wherein W is -C(R R )- said compounds being represented by formula (le) can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1.
  • a compound of formula (le-1 ) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) wherein W 15 represents a suitable group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, with bis(pinacolato)diboron in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example PdCI2dppf, in the presence of a base, such as for example potassium acetate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, followed by reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XLX) with an intermediate of formula (XLIX) wherein W 16 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a catalyst, such as for example
  • a compound of formula (le-1 ) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (XLVIII) in the presence of CO as a reactant, a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tricyclohexylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium(ll)acetate
  • a suitable ligand such as for example tricyclohexylphosphine
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example toluene.
  • the intermediate of formula (LXXII) is further reacted with a leaving group introducing agent, such as for example phosphorus oxychloride, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXXIII), which is further reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water, to give a compound of formula (le-1 - 1 ) ⁇
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0)
  • a suitable base such as for example Na 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent or solvent mixture such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water
  • Compounds of formula (le-3) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (LIV) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, resulting in an intermediate of formula (Llll), which can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (XIV) wherein W 5 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium(ll)acetate
  • a suitable ligand such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetonitrile
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium(ll)acetate
  • a suitable base such as for example potassium acetate
  • tetrabutylammonium bromide as solid base
  • a suitable solvent such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane
  • the intermediate of formula (LVI II) can then be converted into a compound of formula (le-4) by deprotection in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a compound of formula (le-5) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LX) with p- toluenesulfonhydrazide in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example diethylether and water, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LIX), the E and Z isomers of which can be separated by appropriate separation techniques such as column chromatography.
  • the intermediate of formula (LIX) can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (XLVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
  • a compound of formula (le-6) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXI) with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example diisobutylaluminium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2',4',6'-tri-isopropyl-1 ,1 '-biphenyl
  • a suitable base such as for example lithium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane
  • the intermediate of formula (LXI) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (LXII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium(ll)acetate
  • a suitable ligand such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetonitrile
  • a compound of formula (le-6) is reacted with a leaving group introducing agent, such as for example methanesulfonyl chloride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, resulting in an an intermediate of formula (LXIII) wherein W 17 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, which is then further reacted with NHR 11 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, to give a compound of formula (le-4).
  • a leaving group introducing agent such as for example methanesulfonyl chloride
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane
  • a compound of formula (le-7) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXI) with magnesium in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran and an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like.
  • a compound of formula (le- 8) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXIV) with potassium cyanide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide.
  • the intermediate of formula (LXIV) is prepared by reacting a compound of formula (le-9) with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for eample triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • (le-9) can be prepared by reduction of (le-6) for example using LiAIH 4 , in an aprotic solvent such as THF.
  • the intermediate of formula (LXIV) is converted into a compound of formula (le- 10) by reaction with HR 9 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • a compound of formula (le-1 ) is reacted with trimethylsulphoxonium iodide in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium tert butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethoxymethane and dimethylsulfoxide resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXV), which can be converted into a compound of formula (Ie-1 1 ) by reaction with NHR 10 R 11 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol and the like.
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol and the like.
  • the intermediate of formula (LXX) can then be converted into a compound of formula (le-12) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • a suitable acid such as for example hydrochloric acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
  • the Y'N moiety represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom.
  • Compounds of formula (I) wherein R 1 represents hydroxy ⁇ . 6 alkyl can be prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXVI) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran (step 2).
  • a suitable acid such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable de-silylating agent such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride
  • a suitable solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran
  • Intermediates of formula (XXVI) can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula (I) wherein R 1 is hydrogen with an intermediate of formula (XXIV) wherein Wg represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example -Si(CH 3 )2(C(CH 3 )3) or , in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile (step 1 ).
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride or K 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile
  • XXIX an intermediate of formula (XXI) in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as, 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI
  • Intermediates of formula (XXIX) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXVIII) with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or water (step 4).
  • Step 6 depicts the preparation of compounds of formula (I) starting from an intermediate of formula (XXIX) by reaction with NHR 4 R 5 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
  • suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI
  • a suitable base such as triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane.
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride
  • a suitable solvent such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (ll)acetate
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine]
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (ll)acetate
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert-butoxide
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine]
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether.
  • protective group on the R 1 substituent or on the D moiety or protective group on the R 3 substituent or on the R 2 substituent or combinations thereof.
  • the present invention also comprises deuterated compounds. These deuterated compounds may be prepared by using the appropriate deuterated intermediates during the synthesis process. For instance an intermediate of formula (IV-a) nverted into an intermediate of formula (IV-b)
  • compounds of formula (I) wherein R 1 represents tetrahydropyranyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R 1 represents hydrogen, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.
  • a suitable acid such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.
  • R 6 alkyl substituted with R 6 or R 9 wherein said R 6 or R 9 is substituted with OH can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R or R 3 represent C ⁇ alkyl substituted with R 6 or R 9 wherein said R 6 or R 9 is substituted with F, by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane.
  • R 1 represents hydrogen
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide, wherein represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R .
  • a suitable acid such as for example HCI
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane, acetonitrile or an alcohol, e.g.
  • R 6 alkyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl substituted with COOH, by reaction with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCI and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane or ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide.
  • ⁇ > can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R 3 represents C -6 alkyl substituted with 2 OH's, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water.
  • a suitable acid such as for example trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane or water.
  • R 3 represents Ci_ 6 alkyl substituted with OH and NR 10 R 11 , by reaction with NH 2 R 10 R 11 optionally in salt form, such as for example
  • NHR 10 R 11+ CI " optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or Na 2 C0 3 or triethylamine, a suitable additive such as for example Kl, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium hydride or Na 2 C0 3 or triethylamine
  • a suitable additive such as for example Kl
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.
  • a suitable base such as for example pyridine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
  • suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1 - hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylamino)propyl)carbodiimide
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine.
  • Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R 3 represents C 1-6 alkyl substituted with NH 2 can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R 3 represents C -6 alkyl substituted with -NH-R 6 or -N(R 6 ) 2 wherein R 6 represents for example oxetane, by reaction with the appropriate R 6 in the presence of a suitable reducing agent, such as for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1 ,2-dichloroethane.
  • a suitable reducing agent such as for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride
  • a suitable acid such as for example acetic acid
  • solvent such as for example 1 ,2-dichloroethane.
  • Compounds of formula (I) wherein R 3 represents -CH2-C ⁇ CH _ can De converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R 3 by reaction with sodium azide and formaldehyde, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example CuS0 4 and sodium L ascorbate, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example CuS0 4 and sodium L ascorbate
  • a suitable acid such as for example acetic acid
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane.
  • W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
  • R 1 represents hydrogen
  • R represents optionally substituted C -6 alkyl
  • W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like
  • a suitable base such as for example potassium carbonate
  • a suitable solvent such as for example acetonitrile
  • R 2 substituent being cyano can be converted into -CH 2 -NH 2 by hydrogenation in the presence of NH 3 and Nickel.
  • a further aspect of the invention is a process for the preparation of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein, which process comprises:
  • R u is CI or a protected form thereof, with an appropriately substituted amine or a reactive derivative thereof, such as for example NHR 10 R 11 (X), NHR 10 P (X-a) or ⁇ _ ⁇ ⁇ (XXI), for example in a sealed vessel, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride and/or in the presence or absence of a solvent such as acetonitrile, N,N- dimethylformamide or ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylacetamide; or the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI):
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;
  • a suitable base such as for example NaH
  • a suitable solvent such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide
  • a suitable base such as for example K 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl, a suitable base, such as for example Na 2 C0 3 or K 3 P0 4 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether or dioxane or water;
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)
  • a suitable ligand such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl
  • a suitable base such as for example Na 2 C0 3
  • XXXVII in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or toluene.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylformamide or toluene.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, ethylmagnesium chloride, zinc chloride to generated in situ a reactive organometallic species, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example palladium (II) acetate or Pd 2 (dba) 3 (tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0))
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or 1 , 1 '-[1 , 1 '-binaphthalene]- 2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine]
  • a suitable base such as for example sodium tert- butoxide
  • a suitable solvent such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether
  • a suitable base such as for example A/Jv-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol
  • a suitable acid such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid
  • a suitable de-silylating agent such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride
  • a suitable solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran;
  • NHR 4 R 5 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1-hydroxy- benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example
  • NHR 7 R 8 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K 2 C0 3 , and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;
  • a suitable base such as for example K 2 C0 3
  • a suitable solvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran
  • hydrazine monohydrate in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;
  • dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide a suitable base, such for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide and acetonitrile;
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5- bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene, a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane;
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)
  • a suitable ligand such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5- bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene
  • a suitable base such as for example cesium carbonate
  • a suitable solvent such as for example dioxane
  • peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example methylene chloride
  • peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example methylene chloride
  • a suitable catalyst such as for example
  • a suitable ligand such as for example tricyclohexylphosphine
  • a suitable base such as for example triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as for example toluene
  • a further embodiment is a process for synthesis of a compound of formula (VI) wherein:
  • tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or palladium (II) acetate a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, a suitable ligand, such as for example
  • triphenylphosphine and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water; wherein and W 2 , each independently represent a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro or bromo; and then 2) a compound of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or Cs 2 C0 3 , a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water; wherein optionally the intermediate of formula (II) wherein is chloro and W 2 is bromo is prepared by reacting
  • the present invention also relates to a compound having the following formula :
  • E' represents -(CR 22 R 23 ) n -, C 2 - 4 alkenediyl optionally substituted with R 22 , C 2 - 4 alkynediyl optionally substituted with R 2 z 2, -CO
  • references to formula (I) include references to all other sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples thereof as defined herein.
  • a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof, for example, as discussed below; preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or isomers or N-oxides or solvates thereof; and more preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or solvates or protected forms thereof, even more preferably the salts or tautomers or solvates thereof.
  • references to compounds of the formula (I) include the salt forms of the compounds. It will be appreciated that references to "derivatives” include references to ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof.
  • a compound as defined herein or a salt, tautomer, N-oxide or solvate thereof According to a further aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt or solvate thereof.
  • References to compounds of the formula (I) and sub-groups thereof as defined herein include within their scope the salts or solvates or tautomers or N-oxides of the compounds.
  • the salt forms of the compounds of the invention are typically pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1 - 19. However, salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable may also be prepared as intermediate forms which may then be converted into pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Such non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts forms, which may be useful, for example, in the purification or separation of the compounds of the invention, also form part of the invention.
  • the salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods such as methods described in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, P.
  • salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used.
  • the compounds of the invention may exist as mono- or di-salts depending upon the pKa of the acid from which the salt is formed.
  • Acid addition salts may be formed with a wide variety of acids, both inorganic and organic.
  • acid addition salts include salts formed with an acid selected from the group consisting of acetic, 2,2-dichloroacetic, adipic, alginic, ascorbic (e.g.
  • L-glutamic L-glutamic
  • a-oxoglutaric glycolic, hippuric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, isethionic
  • lactic e.g. (+)-L-lactic, ( ⁇ )-DL- lactic
  • lactobionic maleic, malic, (-)-L-malic, malonic, ( ⁇ )-DL-mandelic,
  • naphthalenesulphonic e.g.naphthalene-2-sulphonic
  • naphthalene- 1 ,5-disulphonic 1-hydroxy-2-naphthoic, nicotinic, nitric, oleic, orotic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, phosphoric, propionic, L-pyroglutamic, pyruvic, salicylic, 4-amino-salicylic, sebacic, stearic, succinic, sulphuric, tannic, (+)-L-tartaric, thiocyanic, toluenesulphonic (e.g. p-toluenesulphonic), undecylenic and valeric acids, as well as acylated amino acids and cation exchange resins.
  • naphthalenesulphonic e.g.naphthalene-2-sulphonic
  • salts consist of salts formed from acetic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, phosphoric, nitric, sulphuric, citric, lactic, succinic, maleic, malic, isethionic, fumaric, benzenesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic (mesylate), ethanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic, valeric, acetic, propanoic, butanoic, malonic, glucuronic and lactobionic acids.
  • Another group of acid addition salts includes salts formed from acetic, adipic, ascorbic, aspartic, citric, DL-Lactic, fumaric, gluconic, glucuronic, hippuric, hydrochloric, glutamic, DL-malic, methanesulphonic, sebacic, stearic, succinic and tartaric acids.
  • a salt may be formed with a suitable cation.
  • suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na + and K + , alkaline earth metal cations such as Ca 2+ and Mg 2+ , and other cations such as Al 3+ .
  • suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH 4 + ) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH 3 R + , NH 2 R 2 + , NHR 3 + , NR 4 + ).
  • phenylbenzylamine choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine.
  • amino acids such as lysine and arginine.
  • An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH 3 ) 4 + .
  • the compounds of the formula (I) may contain an amine function, these may form quaternary ammonium salts, for example by reaction with an alkylating agent according to methods well known to the skilled person. Such quaternary ammonium compounds are within the scope of formula (I).
  • Compounds of the formula (I) containing an amine function may also form N-oxides.
  • a reference herein to a compound of the formula (I) that contains an amine function also includes the N-oxide.
  • one or more than one nitrogen atom may be oxidised to form an N-oxide.
  • Particular examples of N-oxides are the N-oxides of a tertiary amine or a nitrogen atom of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle.
  • N-Oxides can be formed by treatment of the corresponding amine with an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or a per-acid (e.g. a peroxycarboxylic acid), see for example Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4 th Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages. More particularly, N-oxides can be made by the procedure of L. W. Deady (Syn. Comm.
  • MCPBA m- chloroperoxybenzoic acid
  • solvates for example with water (i.e., hydrates) or common organic solvents.
  • solvate means a physical association of the compounds of the present invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid.
  • solvate is intended to encompass both solution-phase and isolatable solvates.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid or ethanolamine and the like.
  • the compounds of the invention may exert their biological effects whilst they are in solution.
  • Solvates are well known in pharmaceutical chemistry. They can be important to the processes for the preparation of a substance (e.g. in relation to their purification, the storage of the substance (e.g. its stability) and the ease of handling of the substance and are often formed as part of the isolation or purification stages of a chemical synthesis.
  • a person skilled in the art can determine by means of standard and long used techniques whether a hydrate or other solvate has formed by the isolation conditions or purification conditions used to prepare a given compound. Examples of such techniques include thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), X-ray crystallography (e.g.
  • the compounds of the present invention may have one or more polymorph (crystalline) or amorphous forms and as such are intended to be included in the scope of the invention.
  • Compounds of the formula (I) may exist in a number of different geometric isomeric, and tautomeric forms and references to compounds of the formula (I) include all such forms. For the avoidance of doubt, where a compound can exist in one of several geometric isomeric or tautomeric forms and only one is specifically described or shown, all others are nevertheless embraced by formula (I).
  • tautomeric forms include, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol,
  • amidine/enediamines nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, and nitro/aci-nitro.
  • references to compounds of the formula (I) include all optical isomeric forms thereof (e.g. enantiomers, epimers and
  • optical isomers may be characterised and identified by their optical activity (i.e. as + and - isomers, or d and / isomers) or they may be characterised in terms of their absolute stereochemistry using the "R and S" nomenclature developed by Cahn, Ingold and Prelog, see Advanced Organic Chemistry by Jerry March, 4 th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992, pages 109-1 14, and see also Cahn, Ingold & Prelog (1966) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 5, 385-415.
  • Optical isomers can be separated by a number of techniques including chiral chromatography (chromatography on a chiral support) and such techniques are well known to the person skilled in the art.
  • optical isomers can be separated by forming diastereoisomeric salts with chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid, (-)-pyroglutamic acid, (- )-di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelic acid, (-)-malic acid, and (-)-camphorsulphonic, separating the diastereoisomers by preferential crystallisation, and then dissociating the salts to give the individual enantiomer of the free base.
  • chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid, (-)-pyroglutamic acid, (- )-di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelic acid, (-)-malic acid, and (-)-camphor
  • the invention includes all isomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, either pure isomeric forms or as a mixture of two or more isomeric forms.
  • compositions containing a compound of the formula (I) having one or more chiral centres wherein at least 55% (e.g. at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95%) of the compound of the formula (I) is present as a single optical isomer (e.g.
  • 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the formula (I) may be present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer).
  • a specific isomeric form e.g. S configuration, or E isomer
  • the compounds of the invention include compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions, and a reference to a particular element includes within its scope all isotopes of the element.
  • a reference to hydrogen includes within its scope 1 H, 2 H (D), and 3 H (T).
  • references to carbon and oxygen include within their scope respectively 12 C, 13 C and 14 C and 16 0 and 8 0.
  • the isotopes may be radioactive or non-radioactive.
  • the compounds contain no radioactive isotopes. Such compounds are preferred for therapeutic use.
  • the compound may contain one or more radioisotopes.
  • esters such as carboxylic acid esters and acyloxy esters of the compounds of formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group are also embraced by formula (I).
  • formula (I) includes within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group.
  • formula (I) does not include within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group.
  • R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a C 1-7 alkyl group, a C 3 . 2 o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a C 1-7 alkyl group.
  • prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester).
  • R is: C -6 alkyl (e.g., -Me, -Et, -nPr, -iPr, -nBu, -sBu, -iBu, -tBu); C ⁇ aminoalkyl [e.g., amino
  • the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.
  • the compounds of the invention described herein inhibit or modulate the activity of certain tyrosine kinases, and thus the compounds will be useful in the treatment or prophylaxis, in particular the treatment, of disease states or conditions mediated by those tyrosine kinases, in particular FGFR.
  • FGF fibroblast growth factor
  • PTK protein tyrosine kinase receptors regulates a diverse array of physiologic functions including mitogenesis, wound healing, cell differentiation and angiogenesis, and development. Both normal and malignant cell growth as well as proliferation are affected by changes in local concentration of FGFs, extracellular signalling molecules which act as autocrine as well as paracrine factors. Autocrine FGF signalling may be particularly important in the progression of steroid hormone-dependent cancers to a hormone independent state. FGFs and their receptors are expressed at increased levels in several tissues and cell lines and overexpression is believed to contribute to the malignant phenotype.
  • FGFs and their receptors are expressed at increased levels in several tissues and cell lines and overexpression is believed to contribute to the malignant phenotype.
  • oncogenes are homologues of genes encoding growth factor receptors, and there is a potential for aberrant activation of FGF-dependent signalling in human pancreatic cancer (Knights et al., Pharmacology and Therapeutics 2010 125:1 (105-1 17); Korc M. et al Current Cancer Drug Targets 2009 9:5 (639-651 )).
  • the two prototypic members are acidic fibroblast growth factor (aFGF or FGF1 ) and basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF or FGF2), and to date, at least twenty distinct FGF family members have been identified.
  • the cellular response to FGFs is transmitted via four types of high affinity transmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase fibroblast growth factor receptors (FGFR) numbered 1 to 4 (FGFR1 to FGFR4).
  • FGFR high affinity transmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase fibroblast growth factor receptors
  • FGFR1 pathway Disruption of the FGFR1 pathway should affect tumor cell proliferation since this kinase is activated in many tumor types in addition to proliferating endothelial cells.
  • the over- expression and activation of FGFR1 in tumor- associated vasculature has suggested a role for these molecules in tumor angiogenesis.
  • a recent study has shown a link between FGFR1 expression and tumorigenicity in
  • CLC Classic Lobular Carcinomas
  • CLCs account for 10-15% of all breast cancers and, in general, lack p53 and Her2 expression whilst retaining expression of the oestrogen receptor.
  • a gene amplification of 8p12-p1 1.2 was demonstrated in -50% of CLC cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1.
  • Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1 , or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway.
  • Rhabdomyosarcoma is the most common pediatric soft tissue sarcoma likely results from abnormal proliferation and differentiation during skeletal myogenesis.
  • FGFR1 is over-expressed in primary rhabdomyosarcoma tumors and is associated with hypomethylation of a 5' CpG island and abnormal expression of the AKT1 , NOG, and BMP4 genes.
  • FGFR1 has also been linked to squamous lung cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer.
  • Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 has high affinity for the acidic and/or basic fibroblast growth factors, as well as the keratinocyte growth factor ligands. Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 also propagates the potent osteogenic effects of FGFs during osteoblast growth and differentiation. Mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2, leading to complex functional alterations, were shown to induce abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), implying a major role of FGFR signalling in intramembranous bone formation. For example, in Apert (AP) syndrome, characterized by premature cranial suture ossification, most cases are associated with point mutations engendering gain-of-function in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2.
  • AP Apert
  • mutation screening in patients with syndromic craniosynostoses indicates that a number of recurrent FGFR2 mutations accounts for severe forms of Pfeiffer syndrome.
  • Particular mutations of FGFR2 include W290C, D321A, Y340C, C342R, C342S, C342W, N549H, K641 R in FGFR2.
  • FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations result in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors.
  • Such abnormalities are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas and in bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas.
  • FGFR3 inhibitors would be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, bladder and cervical carcinomas.
  • FGFR3 is also over-expressed in bladder cancer, in particular invasive bladder cancer.
  • FGFR3 is frequently activated by mutation in urothelial carcinoma (UC). Increased expression was associated with mutation (85% of mutant tumors showed high-level expression) but also 42% of tumors with no detectable mutation showed over-expression, including many muscle-invasive tumors.
  • FGFR3 is also linked to endometrial and thyroid cancer.
  • FGFR4 Over expression of FGFR4 has been linked to poor prognosis in both prostate and thyroid carcinomas.
  • a germline polymorphism (Gly388Arg) is associated with increased incidence of lung, breast, colon, liver (HCC) and prostate cancers.
  • a truncated form of FGFR4 (including the kinase domain) has also been found to be present in 40% of pituitary tumours but not present in normal tissue.
  • FGFR4 has been implicated in colorectal and liver cancer where expression of its ligand FGF19 is frequently elevated. FGFR4 is also linked to astrocytomas, rhabdomyosarcoma. Fibrotic conditions are a major medical problem resulting from abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue. This occurs in many diseases, including liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing.
  • TGF tumor necrosis factor
  • FGF's fibroblast growth factors
  • PDGF platelet derived growth factor
  • TGFp transforming growth factor beta
  • TGFpi and PDGF have been reported to be involved in the fibrogenic process and further published work suggests the elevation of FGF's and consequent increase in fibroblast proliferation, may be in response to elevated TGFpi .
  • the potential therapeutic benefit of targeting the fibrotic mechanism in conditions such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) is suggested by the reported clinical effect of the anti-fibrotic agent pirfenidone .
  • Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis also referred to as Cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis
  • Cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis is a progressive condition involving scarring of the lung.
  • the air sacs of the lungs become replaced by fibrotic tissue, which becomes thicker, causing an irreversible loss of the tissue's ability to transfer oxygen into the bloodstream.
  • the symptoms of the condition include shortness of breath, chronic dry coughing, fatigue, chest pain and loss of appetite resulting in rapid weight loss.
  • the condition is extremely serious with approximately 50% mortality after 5 years.
  • the compounds which inhibit FGFR will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis in tumours, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers.
  • tumours with activating mutants of receptor tyrosine kinases or upregulation of receptor tyrosine kinases may be particularly sensitive to the inhibitors.
  • Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with RTK inhibitors particularly beneficial.
  • VAGFR Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor
  • Chronic proliferative diseases are often accompanied by profound angiogenesis, which can contribute to or maintain an inflammatory and/or proliferative state, or which leads to tissue destruction through the invasive proliferation of blood vessels. .
  • Angiogenesis is generally used to describe the development of new or replacement blood vessels, or neovascularisation. It is a necessary and physiological normal process by which vasculature is established in the embryo. Angiogenesis does not occur, in general, in most normal adult tissues, exceptions being sites of ovulation, menses and wound healing. Many diseases, however, are characterized by persistent and unregulated angiogenesis. For instance, in arthritis, new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and destroy cartilage. In diabetes (and in many different eye diseases), new vessels invade the macula or retina or other ocular structures, and may cause blindness. The process of atherosclerosis has been linked to angiogenesis. Tumor growth and metastasis have been found to be angiogenesis-dependent.
  • angiogenesis occurs in many stages and attempts are underway to discover and develop compounds that work to block angiogenesis at these various stages.
  • VEGF Vascular endothelial growth factor
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • VEGFR(s) are protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs). PTKs catalyze the phosphorylation of specific tyrosine residues in proteins involved in cell function thus regulating cell growth, survival and differentiation.
  • VEGFR-1 Flt-1
  • VEGFR-2 Flk-1 or KDR
  • VEGFR-3 Flt-4
  • VEGF a transmembrane receptor PTK expressed primarily in endothelial cells.
  • Activation of VEGFR-2 by VEGF is a critical step in the signal transduction pathway that initiates tumour angiogenesis.
  • VEGF expression may be constitutive to tumour cells and can also be upregulated in response to certain stimuli.
  • One such stimuli is hypoxia, where VEGF expression is upregulated in both tumour and associated host tissues.
  • the VEGF ligand activates VEGFR-2 by binding with its extracellular VEGF binding site. This leads to receptor dimerization of VEGFRs and autophosphorylation of tyrosine residues at the intracellular kinase domain of VEGFR- 2.
  • the kinase domain operates to transfer a phosphate from ATP to the tyrosine residues, thus providing binding sites for signalling proteins downstream of VEGFR-2 leading ultimately to initiation of angiogenesis. Inhibition at the kinase domain binding site of VEGFR-2 would block phosphorylation of tyrosine residues and serve to disrupt initiation of angiogenesis.
  • Angiogenesis is a physiologic process of new blood vessel formation mediated by various cytokines called angiogenic factors.
  • CLL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • An increased level of angiogenesis has been documented by various experimental methods both in bone marrow and lymph nodes of patients with CLL.
  • angiogenesis in the pathophysiology of this disease remains to be fully elucidated, experimental data suggest that several angiogenic factors play a role in the disease progression.
  • Biologic markers of angiogenesis were also shown to be of prognostic relevance in CLL. This indicates that VEGFR inhibitors may also be of benefit for patients with leukemia's such as CLL.
  • a tumour mass In order for a tumour mass to get beyond a critical size, it must develop an associated vasculature. It has been proposed that targeting a tumor vasculature would limit tumor expansion and could be a useful cancer therapy. Observations of tumor growth have indicated that small tumour masses can persist in a tissue without any tumour-specific vasculature. The growth arrest of nonvascularized tumors has been attributed to the effects of hypoxia at the center of the tumor. More recently, a variety of proangiogenic and antiangiogenic factors have been identified and have led to the concept of the "angiogenic switch," a process in which disruption of the normal ratio of angiogenic stimuli and inhibitors in a tumor mass allows for autonomous vascularization.
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • bFGF basic fibroblast growth factor
  • angiogenin Proteins such as thrombospondin (Tsp-1 ), angiostatin, and endostatin function as negative regulators of angiogenesis.
  • VEGFR2 Inhibition of VEGFR2 but not VEGFR1 markedly disrupts angiogenic switching, persistent angiogenesis, and initial tumor growth in a mouse model.
  • phenotypic resistance to VEGFR2 blockade emerged, as tumors regrew during treatment after an initial period of growth suppression.
  • This resistance to VEGF blockade involves reactivation of tumour angiogenesis, independent of VEGF and associated with hypoxia-mediated induction of other proangiogenic factors, including members of the FGF family.
  • proangiogenic signals are functionally implicated in the revascularization and regrowth of tumours in the evasion phase, as FGF blockade impairs progression in the face of VEGF inhibition.
  • a malignant tumour is the product of uncontrolled cell proliferation.
  • Cell growth is controlled by a delicate balance between growth-promoting and growth-inhibiting factors. In normal tissue the production and activity of these factors results in
  • PDGF platelet- derived growth factor
  • PDGFR cell surface tyrosine kinase receptors
  • FGFR kinase inhibitors with a differentiated selectivity profile provides a new opportunity to use these targeted agents in patient sub-groups whose disease is driven by FGFR deregulation.
  • Inhibitors of VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta are associated with toxicities such as hypertension or oedema respectively. In the case of VEGFR2 inhibitors this hypertensive effect is often dose limiting, may be contraindicated in certain patient populations and requires clinical management.
  • the compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof have fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity and/or vascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and/or platelet derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and which will be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions described herein.
  • FGFR fibroblast growth factor receptor
  • VEGFR vascular endothelial growth factor receptor
  • PDGFR platelet derived growth factor receptor
  • References to the preventing or prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition such as cancer include within their scope alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.
  • modulation As used herein, the term "modulation", as applied to the activity of a kinase, is intended to define a change in the level of biological activity of the protein kinase. Thus, modulation encompasses physiological changes which effect an increase or decrease in the relevant protein kinase activity. In the latter case, the modulation may be described as "inhibition”.
  • the modulation may arise directly or indirectly, and may be mediated by any mechanism and at any physiological level, including for example at the level of gene expression (including for example transcription, translation and/or post-translational modification), at the level of expression of genes encoding regulatory elements which act directly or indirectly on the levels of kinase activity.
  • modulation may imply elevated/suppressed expression or over- or under-expression of a kinase, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and/or increased or decreased expression by a transcriptional effect, as well as hyper- (or hypo-)activity and (de)activation of the protein kinase(s) (including (de)activation) by mutation(s).
  • gene amplification i.e. multiple gene copies
  • hyper- (or hypo-)activity i.e. multiple gene copies
  • de deactivation of the protein kinase(s) (including (de)activation) by mutation(s).
  • modulated modulating
  • modulate are to be interpreted accordingly.
  • the term "mediated”, as used e.g. in conjunction with a kinase as described herein (and applied for example to various physiological processes, diseases, states, conditions, therapies, treatments or interventions) is intended to operate limitatively so that the various processes, diseases, states, conditions, treatments and interventions to which the term is applied are those in which the kinase plays a biological role.
  • the biological role played by a kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the manifestation of the symptoms of the disease, state or condition (or its aetiology or progression).
  • kinase activity and in particular aberrant levels of kinase activity, e.g.
  • kinase over-expression need not necessarily be the proximal cause of the disease, state or condition: rather, it is contemplated that the kinase mediated diseases, states or conditions include those having multifactorial aetiologies and complex progressions in which the kinase in question is only partially involved.
  • the role played by the kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the operation of the treatment, prophylaxis or outcome of the intervention.
  • a disease state or condition mediated by a kinase includes the development of resistance to any particular cancer drug or treatment.
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.
  • the compounds of the formulae (I) and sub-groups thereof are inhibitors of FGFRs.
  • compounds of the invention have activity against FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, and/or FGFR4, and in particular FGFRs selected from
  • Preferred compounds are compounds that inhibit one or more FGFR selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, and FGFR4.
  • Preferred compounds of the invention are those having IC 50 values of less than 0.1 ⁇ .
  • Compounds of the invention also have activity against VEGFR.
  • many of the compounds of the invention exhibit selectivity for the FGFR 1 , 2, and/or 3, and/or 4 compared to VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR and such compounds represent one preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • the compounds exhibit selectivity over VEGFR2.
  • many compounds of the invention have IC 50 values against FGFR1 , 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 that are between a tenth and a hundredth of the IC 50 against VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR B.
  • preferred compounds of the invention have at least 10 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. More preferably the compounds of the invention have at least 100 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. This can be determined using the methods described herein.
  • the compounds will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis of neoplasias, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers.
  • the compounds of the invention could be useful in the treatment of diseases in which there is a disorder of proliferation, apoptosis or differentiation.
  • tumours with activating mutants of VEGFR or upregulation of VEGFR and patients with elevated levels of serum lactate dehydrogenase may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention.
  • Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial.
  • VEGFR VEGFR
  • any of the isoforms of FGFR such as FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention and thus patients as discussed herein with such particular tumours may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial. It may be preferred that the treatment is related to or directed at a mutated form of one of the receptor tyrosine kinases, such as discussed herein. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.
  • cancers which may be treated (or inhibited) include, but are not limited to, a carcinoma, for example a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinoma and colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung (for example adenocarcinoma, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung carcinomas, squamous lung cancer), oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas (e.g. exocrine pancreatic carcinoma), stomach, gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer (e.g.
  • a carcinoma for example a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinoma and colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung (for example adenocarcinoma, small cell
  • gastrointestinal stromal tumours cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin (for example squamous cell carcinoma or dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans); pituitary cancer, a hematopoietic tumour of lymphoid lineage, for example leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma (e.g.
  • T-cell lymphoma diffuse large B-cell lymphoma
  • Hodgkin's lymphoma Hodgkin's lymphoma
  • non-Hodgkin's lymphoma hairy cell lymphoma
  • Burkett's lymphoma a hematopoietic tumour of myeloid lineage, for example leukemias, acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), myeloproliferative disorder, myeloproliferative syndrome, myelodysplasia syndrome, or promyelocytic leukemia; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; hepatocellular cancer, a tumour of mesenchymal origin (e.g.
  • Ewing's sarcoma for example fibrosarcoma or rhabdomyosarcoma; a tumour of the central or peripheral nervous system, for example astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma (such as glioblastoma multiforme) or schwannoma; melanoma; seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma; thyroid follicular cancer; or Kaposi's sarcoma.
  • astrocytoma neuroblastoma
  • glioma such as glioblastoma multiforme
  • schwannoma schwannoma
  • melanoma seminoma
  • osteosarcoma xeroderma pigmentosum
  • keratoctanthoma thyroid follicular cancer
  • Kaposi's sarcoma Kaposi'sarcoma.
  • squamous lung cancer breast cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer, gastric cancer, hepatocellular cancer, cervix cancer, multiple myeloma, bladder cancer, endometrial cancer, urothelial cancer, colon cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, pituitary gland cancer.
  • Certain cancers are resistant to treatment with particular drugs. This can be due to the type of the tumour or can arise due to treatment with the compound.
  • references to multiple myeloma includes bortezomib sensitive multiple myeloma or refractory multiple myeloma.
  • references to chronic myelogenous leukemia includes imitanib sensitive chronic myelogenous leukemia and refractory chronic myelogenous leukemia.
  • Chronic myelogenous leukemia is also known as chronic myeloid leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia or CML.
  • acute myelogenous leukemia is also called acute myelobiastic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocytic leukaemia or AML.
  • the compounds of the invention can also be used in the treatment of hematopoetic diseases of abnormal cell proliferation whether pre-malignant or stable such as myeloproliferative diseases.
  • Myeloproliferative diseases (“MPD”s) are a group of diseases of the bone marrow in which excess cells are produced. They are related to, and may evolve into, myelodysplasia syndrome. Myeloproliferative diseases include polycythemia vera, essential thrombocythemia and primary myelofibrosis. A further haematological disorder is hypereosinophilic syndrome. T-cell lymphoproliferative diseases include those derived from natural Killer cells.
  • the compounds of the invention can be used to gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours.
  • Gastrointestinal cancer refers to malignant conditions of the gastrointestinal tract, including the esophagus, stomach, liver, biliary system, pancreas, bowels, and anus.
  • uses or methods of this invention for treating a disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth is a cancer.
  • cancers include multiple myeloma, bladder, cervical, prostate and thyroid carcinomas, lung, breast, and colon cancers.
  • a further subset of cancers includes multiple myeloma, bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas.
  • the compound of the invention having FGFR such as FGFR1 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of breast cancer in particular Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC).
  • CLC Classic Lobular Carcinomas
  • the compounds of the invention have FGFR4 activity they will also be useful in the treatment of prostate or pituitary cancers, or they will be useful in the treatment of breast cancer, lung cancer, prostate cancer, liver cancer (HCC) or lung cancer.
  • HCC liver cancer
  • the compounds of the invention as FGFR inhibitors are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, myeloproliferatoive disorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.
  • cancers are multiple myeloma, endometrial cancer, bladder cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer and thyroid carcinomas.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma (in particular multiple myeloma with t(4;14) translocation or overexpressing FGFR3), prostate cancer (hormone refractory prostrate carcinomas), endometrial cancer (in particular endometrial tumours with activating mutations in FGFR2) and breast cancer (in particular lobular breast cancer).
  • multiple myeloma in particular multiple myeloma with t(4;14) translocation or overexpressing FGFR3
  • prostate cancer hormone refractory prostrate carcinomas
  • endometrial cancer in particular endometrial tumours with activating mutations in FGFR2
  • breast cancer in particular lobular breast cancer
  • the compounds are useful in the treatment of lobular carcinomas such as CLC (Classic lobular carcinoma).
  • the compounds As the compounds have activity against FGFR3 they will be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma and bladder cancer. In particular the compounds are useful for the treatment of t(4;14) translocation positive multiple myeloma.
  • the compounds may be useful for the treatment of sarcoma. In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, e.g.
  • the compounds As the compounds have activity against FGFR2 they will be useful in the treatment of endometrial, ovarian, gastric, hepatocellular, uterine, cervix and colorectal cancers.
  • FGFR2 is also overexpressed in epithelial ovarian cancer, therefore the compounds of the invention may be specifically useful in treating ovarian cancer such as epithelial ovarian cancer.
  • the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, in particular NSCLC, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer.
  • the compounds may be useful for the treatment of prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer such as NSCLC, breast cancer, gastric cancer,and liver cancer (HCC (hepatocellular cancer)).
  • Compounds of the invention may also be useful in the treatment of tumours pre-treated with VEGFR2 inhibitor or VEGFR2 antibody (e.g. Avastin).
  • VEGFR2 inhibitor or VEGFR2 antibody e.g. Avastin
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2- resistant tumours.
  • VEGFR2 inhibitors and antibodies are used in the treatment of thyroid and renal cell carcinomas, therefore the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2-resistant thyroid and renal cell carcinomas.
  • the cancers may be cancers which are sensitive to inhibition of any one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, FGFR4, for example, one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3.
  • Whether or not a particular cancer is one which is sensitive to inhibition of FGFR or VEGFR signalling may be determined by means of a cell growth assay as set out below or by a method as set out in the section headed "Methods of Diagnosis".
  • the compounds of the invention, and in particular those compounds having FGFR, or VEGFR inhibitory activity may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of cancers of a type associated with or characterised by the presence of elevated levels of FGFR, or VEGFR, for example the cancers referred to in this context in the introductory section of this application.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the adult population.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the pediatric population. It has been discovered that some FGFR inhibitors can be used in combination with other anticancer agents. For example, it may be beneficial to combine an inhibitor that induces apoptosis with another agent which acts via a different mechanism to regulate cell growth thus treating two of the characteristic features of cancer development.
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in treating other conditions which result from disorders in proliferation such as type II or non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, autoimmune diseases, head trauma, stroke, epilepsy, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, motor neurone disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration and Pick's disease for example autoimmune diseases and
  • One sub-group of disease states and conditions that the compounds of the invention may be useful consists of inflammatory diseases, cardiovascular diseases and wound healing.
  • FGFR, and VEGFR are also known to play a role in apoptosis, angiogenesis, proliferation, differentiation and transcription and therefore the compounds of the invention could also be useful in the treatment of the following diseases other than cancer; chronic inflammatory diseases, for example systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, autoimmune diabetes mellitus, Eczema hypersensitivity reactions, asthma, COPD, rhinitis, and upper respiratory tract disease; cardiovascular diseases for example cardiac hypertrophy, restenosis, atherosclerosis; neurodegenerative disorders, for example Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotropic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atropy and cerebellar degeneration; glomerulonephritis; myelodysplastic syndromes, ischemic injury associated myocardial infarctions, stroke and rep
  • Atherosclerosis toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, haematological diseases, for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia; degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system, for example, osteoporosis and arthritis, aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.
  • haematological diseases for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia
  • degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system for example, osteoporosis and arthritis, aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.
  • mutations of FGFR2 are associated with several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development and thus the compounds of invention could be useful in the treatment of abnormalities in human skeletal development, including abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.
  • abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.
  • the compound of the invention having FGFR such as FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of the skeletal diseases.
  • Particular skeletal diseases are achondroplasia or thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).
  • the compound of the invention having FGFR such as FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention in
  • Fibrotic conditions in which the compounds of the inventions may be useful in the treatment of include diseases exhibiting abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue for example in liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing.
  • the compounds of the inventions may also be useful in the treatment of lung fibrosis in particular in idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis.
  • the over-expression and activation of FGFR and VEGFR in tumor- associated vasculature has also suggested a role for compounds of the invention in preventing and disrupting initiation of tumor angiogenesis.
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of cancer, metastasis, leukemia's such as CLL, ocular diseases such as age-related macular degeneration in particular wet form of age-related macular degeneration, ischemic proliferative retinopathies such as retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) and diabetic retinopathy, rheumatoid arthritis and hemangioma.
  • ROP retinopathy of prematurity
  • diabetic retinopathy rheumatoid arthritis
  • hemangioma retinopathy of prematurity
  • the activity of the compounds of the invention as inhibitors of FGFR1 -4, VEGFR and/or PDGFR A/B can be measured using the assays set forth in the examples below and the level of activity exhibited by a given compound can be defined in terms of the IC 50 value.
  • Preferred compounds of the present invention are compounds having an IC 50 value of less than 1 ⁇ , more preferably less than 0.1 ⁇ .
  • the invention provides compounds that have FGFR inhibiting or modulating activity, and which may be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions mediated by FGFR kinases.
  • a compound as defined herein for use in therapy for use as a medicine.
  • a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment in particular in the treatment, of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase.
  • the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer. Therefore, in a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of FGFR-dependent cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer mediated by FGFR kinases.
  • the invention provides inter alia:
  • FGFR kinase mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • a method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • a method of inhibiting a FGFR kinase which method comprises contacting the kinase with a kinase-inhibiting compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • a method of modulating a cellular process for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase using a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • treatment of cancer in particular the treatment of cancer.
  • a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a modulator e.g.
  • medicament for modulating a cellular process for example cell division
  • a cellular process for example cell division
  • FGFR kinase e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4.
  • a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a cancer, the cancer being one which is characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).
  • FGFR kinase e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4
  • a method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4
  • the method comprising administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • FGFR kinase e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4
  • the method comprising administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
  • cancer in a patient suffering from or suspected of suffering from cancer which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to determine whether the patient possesses a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 gene; and (ii) where the patient does possess the said variant, thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR3 kinase inhibiting activity.
  • a disease state or condition characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4); which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4) and (ii) where the diagnostic test is indicative of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase, thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR kinase inhibiting activity.
  • an FGFR kinase e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4
  • a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1
  • the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a oncology related disease (e.g. cancer). In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a non-oncology related disease (e.g. any disease disclosed herein excluding cancer). In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a condition described herein. In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a skeletal condition described herein.
  • abnormalities in human skeletal development include abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, Pfeiffer syndrome, achondroplasia and thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).
  • Drug resistant kinase mutations can arise in patient populations treated with kinase inhibitors. These occur, in part, in the regions of the protein that bind to or interact with the particular inhibitor used in therapy. Such mutations reduce or increase the capacity of the inhibitor to bind to and inhibit the kinase in question. This can occur at any of the amino acid residues which interact with the inhibitor or are important for supporting the binding of said inhibitor to the target. An inhibitor that binds to a target kinase without requiring the interaction with the mutated amino acid residue will likely be unaffected by the mutation and will remain an effective inhibitor of the enzyme.
  • a study in gastric cancer patient samples showed the presence of two mutations in FGFR2, Ser167Pro in exon Ilia and a splice site mutation 940-2A-G in exon lllc. These mutations are identical to the germline activating mutations that cause craniosynotosis syndromes and were observed in 13% of primary gastric cancer tissues studied. In addition activating mutations in FGFR3 were observed in 5% of the patient samples tested and overexpression of FGFRs has been correlated with a poor prognosis in this patient group.
  • chromosomal translocations or point mutations that have been observed in FGFR which give rise to gain-of-function, over-expressed, or constitutively active biological states.
  • the compounds of the invention would therefore find particular application in relation to cancers which express a mutated molecular target such as FGFR. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH. It has been suggested that mutations of a conserved threonine residue at the ATP binding site of FGFR would result in inhibitor resistance.
  • the amino acid valine 561 has been mutated to a methionine in FGFR1 which corresponds to previously reported mutations found in Abl (T315) and EGFR (T766) that have been shown to confer resistance to selective inhibitors.
  • Assay data for FGFR1 V561 M showed that this mutation conferred resistance to a tyrosine kinase inhibitor compared to that of the wild type.
  • a patient Prior to administration of a compound of the formula (I), a patient may be screened to determine whether a disease or condition from which the patient is or may be suffering is one which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR, and/or VEGFR.
  • a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed to determine whether a condition or disease, such as cancer, that the patient is or may be suffering from is one which is characterised by a genetic abnormality or abnormal protein expression which leads to up-regulation of the levels or activity of FGFR, and/or VEGFR or to sensitisation of a pathway to normal FGFR, and/or VEGFR activity, or to upregulation of these growth factor signalling pathways such as growth factor ligand levels or growth factor ligand activity or to upregulation of a biochemical pathway downstream of FGFR, and/or VEGFR activation.
  • a condition or disease such as cancer
  • Examples of such abnormalities that result in activation or sensitisation of the FGFR, and/or VEGFR signal include loss of, or inhibition of apoptotic pathways, up-regulation of the receptors or ligands, or presence of mutant variants of the receptors or ligands e.g PTK variants.
  • Tumours with mutants of FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 or upregulation, in particular over-expression of FGFR1 , or gain-of-function mutants of FGFR2 or FGFR3 may be particularly sensitive to FGFR inhibitors. For example, point mutations engendering gain-of-function in FGFR2 have been identified in a number of conditions.
  • FGFR2 activating mutations in FGFR2 have been identified in 10% of endometrial tumours.
  • genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations resulting in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors have been identified and are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas, bladder and cervical carcinomas.
  • a particular mutation T674I of the PDGF receptor has been identified in imatinib-treated patients.
  • a gene amplification of 8p12-p11 .2 was demonstrated in -50% of lobular breast cancer (CLC) cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1.
  • CLC lobular breast cancer
  • a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed for loss of a negative regulator or suppressor of FGFR or VEGFR.
  • loss embraces the deletion of a gene encoding the regulator or suppressor, the truncation of the gene (for example by mutation), the truncation of the transcribed product of the gene, or the inactivation of the transcribed product (e.g. by point mutation) or sequestration by another gene product.
  • up-regulation includes elevated expression or over-expression, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and increased expression by a transcriptional effect, and hyperactivity and activation, including activation by mutations.
  • the patient may be subjected to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up- regulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR.
  • diagnosis includes screening.
  • marker we include genetic markers including, for example, the measurement of DNA
  • the term marker also includes markers which are characteristic of up regulation of FGFR and/or VEGFR, including enzyme activity, enzyme levels, enzyme state (e.g. phosphorylated or not) and mRNA levels of the aforementioned proteins.
  • the diagnostic tests and screens are typically conducted on a biological sample selected from tumour biopsy samples, blood samples (isolation and enrichment of shed tumour cells), stool biopsies, sputum, chromosome analysis, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, buccal spears, biopsy or urine. Methods of identification and analysis of mutations and up-regulation of proteins are known to a person skilled in the art. Screening methods could include, but are not limited to, standard methods such as reverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) or in-situ hybridization such as fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH).
  • RT-PCR reverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction
  • FISH fluorescence in situ hybridization
  • Identification of an individual carrying a mutation in FGFR, and /or VEGFR may mean that the patient would be particularly suitable for treatment with a FGFR, and /or VEGFR inhibitor.
  • Tumours may preferentially be screened for presence of a FGFR, and /or VEGFR variant prior to treatment.
  • the screening process will typically involve direct sequencing, oligonucleotide microarray analysis, or a mutant specific antibody.
  • diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RT-PCR and FISH.
  • mutant forms of, for example FGFR or VEGFR2 can be identified by direct sequencing of, for example, tumour biopsies using PCR and methods to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbefore described.
  • PCR and methods to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbefore described The skilled artisan will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of the over expression, activation or mutations of the aforementioned proteins could be applicable in the present case.
  • the level of mRNA in the tumour is assessed by creating a cDNA copy of the mRNA followed by amplification of the cDNA by PCR. Methods of PCR amplification, the selection of primers, and conditions for amplification, are known to a person skilled in the art.
  • Nucleic acid manipulations and PCR are carried out by standard methods, as described for example in Ausubel, F.M. et a/., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., or Innis, M.A. et a/., eds. (1990) PCR Protocols: a guide to methods and applications, Academic Press, San Diego. Reactions and manipulations involving nucleic acid techniques are also described in Sambrook et a/., (2001 ), 3 rd Ed, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press.
  • kits for RT- PCR for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals
  • kit for RT- PCR for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals
  • methodology as set forth in United States patents 4,666,828; 4,683,202; 4,801 ,531 ; 5,192,659, 5,272,057, 5,882,864, and 6,218,529 and incorporated herein by reference.
  • An example of an in- situ hybridisation technique for assessing mRNA expression would be fluorescence in- situ hybridisation (FISH) (see Angerer (1987) Meth. Enzymol., 152: 649).
  • FISH fluorescence in- situ hybridisation
  • in situ hybridization comprises the following major steps: (1 ) fixation of tissue to be analyzed; (2) prehybridization treatment of the sample to increase accessibility of target nucleic acid, and to reduce nonspecific binding; (3) hybridization of the mixture of nucleic acids to the nucleic acid in the biological structure or tissue; (4) post- hybridization washes to remove nucleic acid fragments not bound in the hybridization, and (5) detection of the hybridized nucleic acid fragments.
  • the probes used in such applications are typically labelled, for example, with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters.
  • Preferred probes are sufficiently long, for example, from about 50, 100, or 200 nucleotides to about 1000 or more nucleotides, to enable specific hybridization with the target nucleic acid(s) under stringent conditions.
  • Standard methods for carrying out FISH are described in Ausubel, F.M. et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc and Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization: Technical Overview by John M. S. Bartlett in Molecular Diagnosis of Cancer, Methods and Protocols, 2nd ed.; ISBN: 1-59259-760-2; March 2004, pps. 077-088; Series: Methods in Molecular Medicine.
  • double-stranded cDNA is synthesized from total RNA Using a (dT)24 oligomer for priming first-strand cDNA synthesis, followed by second strand cDNA synthesis with random hexamer primers.
  • the double-stranded cDNA is used as a template for in vitro transcription of cRNA using biotinylated ribonucleotides.
  • cRNA is chemically fragmented according to protocols described by Affymetrix (Santa Clara, CA, USA), and then hybridized overnight on Human Genome Arrays.
  • the protein products expressed from the mRNAs may be assayed by immunohistochemistry of tumour samples, solid phase immunoassay with microtitre plates, Western blotting, 2-dimensional SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, ELISA, flow cytometry and other methods known in the art for detection of specific proteins.
  • Detection methods would include the use of site specific antibodies.
  • the skilled person will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of upregulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR, or detection of FGFR, and/or VEGFR variants or mutants could be applicable in the present case.
  • Abnormal levels of proteins such as FGFR or VEGFR can be measured using standard enzyme assays, for example, those assays described herein. Activation or
  • overexpression could also be detected in a tissue sample, for example, a tumour tissue.
  • a tissue sample for example, a tumour tissue.
  • an assay such as that from Chemicon International.
  • the tyrosine kinase of interest would be immunoprecipitated from the sample lysate and its activity measured.
  • Alternative methods for the measurement of the over expression or activation of FGFR or VEGFR including the isoforms thereof include the measurement of microvessel density. This can for example be measured using methods described by Orre and Rogers (Int J Cancer (1999), 84(2) 101-8). Assay methods also include the use of markers, for example, in the case of VEGFR these include CD31 , CD34 and CD 05. Therefore all of these techniques could also be used to identify tumours particularly suitable for treatment with the compounds of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention are particular useful in treatment of a patient having a mutated FGFR.
  • the G697C mutation in FGFR3 is observed in 62% of oral squamous cell carcmonas and causes constitutive activation of the kinase activity.
  • Activating mutations of FGFR3 have also been identified in bladder carcinoma cases. These mutations were of 6 kinds with varying degrees of prevelence: R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q.
  • a Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4 has been found to be associated with increased incidence and aggressiveness of prostate, colon, lung, liver (HCC) and breast cancer.
  • the invention includes use of a compound according to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease state or condition in a patient who has been screened and has been determined as suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from, a disease or condition which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR.
  • the invention includes a compound of the invention for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a variant of the FGFR gene (for example G697C mutation in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4).
  • MRI determination of vessel normalization e.g. using MRI gradient echo, spin echo, and contrast enhancement to measure blood volume, relative vessel size, and vascular permeability
  • circulating biomarkers circulating progenitor cells (CPCs), CECs, SDF1 , and FGF2
  • CPCs circulating progenitor cells
  • SDF1 circulating vascular permeability
  • FGF2 circulating progenitor cells
  • the subject compounds may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes.
  • the pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprises at least one active compound of the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
  • compositions of this invention an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, as the active ingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, which carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier which carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be in any form suitable for oral, parenteral, topical, intranasal, ophthalmic, otic, rectal, intra-vaginal, or transdermal administration.
  • These pharmaceutical compositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably, for administration orally, rectally, percutaneously, or by parenteral injection.
  • any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs and solutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of powders, pills, capsules and tablets.
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed.
  • the carrier will usually comprise sterile water, at least in large part, though other ingredients, to aid solubility for example, may be included.
  • injectable solutions for example, may be prepared in which the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucose solution.
  • injectable suspensions may also be prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed.
  • the carrier optionally comprises a penetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable wetting agent, optionally combined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions, which additives do not cause a significant deleterious effect to the skin.
  • Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skin and/or may be helpful for preparing the desired compositions.
  • Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.
  • Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient, calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.
  • the compound of the invention is administered in an amount sufficient to exert its anti- tumour activity.
  • a therapeutically effective amount would be from 0.005 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg body weight, and in particular from 0.005 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight. It may be appropriate to administer the required dose as single, two, three, four or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day. Said sub-doses may be formulated as unit dosage forms, for example, containing 0.5 to 500 mg, in particular 1 mg to 500 mg, more in particular 10 mg to 500 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.
  • the pharmaceutical composition will preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99 % by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 70 % by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50 % by weight of the compound of the present invention, and, from 1 to 99.95 % by weight, more preferably from 30 to 99.9 % by weight, even more preferably from 50 to 99.9 % by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of the composition.
  • a combination of a compound of the present invention with another anticancer agent is envisaged, especially for use as a medicine, more specifically for use in the treatment of cancer or related diseases.
  • the compounds of the invention may be advantageously employed in combination with one or more other medicinal agents, more particularly, with other anti-cancer agents or adjuvants in cancer therapy.
  • anti-cancer agents or adjuvants include but are not limited to:
  • platinum coordination compounds for example cisplatin optionally combined with amifostine, carboplatin or oxaliplatin; taxane compounds for example paclitaxel, paclitaxel protein bound particles (AbraxaneTM) or docetaxel;
  • topoisomerase I inhibitors such as camptothecin compounds for example irinotecan, SN-38, topotecan, topotecan hcl;
  • topoisomerase II inhibitors such as anti-tumour epipodophyllotoxins or podophyllotoxin derivatives for example etoposide, etoposide phosphate or teniposide;
  • anti-tumour vinca alkaloids for example vinblastine, vincristine or vinorelbine
  • anti-tumour nucleoside derivatives for example 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, gemcitabine, gemcitabine hcl, capecitabine, cladribine, fludarabine, nelarabine
  • alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea for example cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, carmustine, thiotepa, mephalan (melphalan), lomustine, altretamine, busulfan, dacarbazine, estramustine, ifosfamide optionally in combination with mesna, pipobroman, procarbazine, streptozocin, telozolomide, uracil;
  • anti-tumour anthracycline derivatives for example daunorubicin, doxorubicin optionally in combination with dexrazoxane, doxil, idarubicin, mitoxantrone, epirubicin, epirubicin hcl, valrubicin;
  • IGF-1 receptor molecules that target the IGF-1 receptor for example picropodophilin
  • tetracarcin derivatives for example tetrocarcin A
  • glucocorticoiden for example prednisone
  • estrogen receptor antagonists or selective estrogen receptor modulators or inhibitors of estrogen synthesis for example tamoxifen, fulvestrant, toremifene, droloxifene, faslodex, raloxifene or letrozole;
  • aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane, anastrozole, letrazole, testolactone and vorozole;
  • differentiating agents such as retinoids, vitamin D or retinoic acid and retinoic acid metabolism blocking agents (RAMBA) for example accutane;
  • DNA methyl transferase inhibitors for example azacytidine or decitabine
  • antifolates for example premetrexed disodium; - antibiotics for example antinomycin D, bleomycin, mitomycin C, dactinomycin, carminomycin, daunomycin, levamisole, plicamycin, mithramycin;
  • - antimetabolites for example clofarabine, aminopterin, cytosine arabinoside or methotrexate, azacitidine, cytarabine, floxuridine, pentostatin, thioguanine;
  • Bcl-2 inhibitors for example YC 137, BH 312, ABT 737, gossypol, HA 14-1 , TW 37 or decanoic acid;
  • tubuline-binding agents for example combrestatin, colchicines or nocodazole;
  • - kinase inhibitors e.g. EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor) inhibitors, MTKI (multi target kinase inhibitors), mTOR inhibitors
  • EGFR epidermal growth factor receptor
  • MTKI multi target kinase inhibitors
  • mTOR inhibitors for example flavoperidol, imatinib mesylate, erlotinib, gefitinib, dasatinib, lapatinib, lapatinib ditosylate, sorafenib, sunitinib, sunitinib maleate, temsirolimus;
  • HDAC histone deacetylase
  • SAHA suberoylanilide hydroxamide acid
  • FR 9012208 depsipeptide
  • NVP- LAQ824 R306465
  • JNJ-26481585 trichostatin A
  • vorinostat
  • telomestatin for example telomestatin
  • Matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors for example batimastat, marimastat, prinostat or metastat.
  • interleukins for example aldesleukin, denileukin diftitox, interferon alfa 2a, interferon alfa 2b, peginterferon alfa 2b
  • Retinoids for example alitretinoin, bexarotene, tretinoin
  • Steroids for example dromostanolone propionate, megestrol acetate, nandrolone (decanoate, phenpropionate), dexamethasone
  • Gonadotropin releasing hormone agonists or antagonists for example abarelix, goserelin acetate, histrelin acetate, leuprolide acetate

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to new quinoxaline derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

Description

ANTICANCER BENZOPYRAZINES VIA THE INHIBITION OF FGFR KINASES
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to new quinoxaline derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
According to a first aspect of the invention there is provided compounds of formula (I):
Figure imgf000002_0001
including any tautomeric or stereochemical^ isomeric form thereof, wherein
W is -N(R3)- or -C(R3aR3b)-; each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C -4alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, C2-4alkynyl, C^alkoxy, hydroxyC^alkyl, hydroxyC -4alkoxy, haloCi_ alkyl, haloC-i- 4alkoxy,
Figure imgf000002_0002
halod.
4alkoxyCi-4alkyl, C^alkoxyC^alkyl wherein each C1-4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, hydroxyhaloC^alkoxyC^alkyl, R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkoxy substituted with R13, C1-4alkoxy substituted with -C(=0)-R13, -C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with - NR7R8, Ci-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR7R8, C1-4alkoxy substituted with -NR7R8, d_ 4alkoxy substituted with -C(=0)-NR7R8, -NR7R8 and -C(=0)-NR7R8; or when two R2 groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula:
-0-(C(R17)2)p-0-;
-X-CH=CH-; or
-X-CH=N-; wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and X represents O or S;
Y represents -CR18=N-OR19 or -E-D; E represents a bond, -(CR22R23)n-, C^alkenediyl optionally substituted with R22, C2- 4alkynediyl optionally substituted with R22, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR 2R23)s-CO-, -NR22- (CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)S-NR22-, -0-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR 2R23)s-0-, -S(0)m-(CR 2R23)s-, (CR22R23)s-S(0)m-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-NR22-(CR22R23)s- or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO- (CR22R23)S-;
D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
provided that when Y represents -E-D, and E represents a bond, then D does not
represent
Figure imgf000003_0001
wherein R1 represents hydrogen, C1-6alkyl, d_4alkenyl, hydroxyC^-ealkyl, halod ealkyl, hydroxyhaloC -6alkyl, cyanoC1-4alkyl, d-6aIkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C^alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, C1-6afkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-C1. 6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1- 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000003_0002
d ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2- NR14R15, d_6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH- S(=0)2-haIoC1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, d-6alkyl substituted with R6, Ci-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyCi.6alkyl substituted with R6, d-ealkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d_6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d- 6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od_6alkyl)2; and each R1a is independently selected from hydrogen, d-4alkyl, hydroxyCi-4alkyl, d.4alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(d. 4alkyl)amino or -NH(d-8cycloalkyl), cyanod.4alkyl, d-4alkoxyd-4alkyl, and C1-4alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms;
R represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, d-6alkyl, d_6alkoxy, -C(=0)-0- d^alkyl, C2.
4alkenyl, hydroxyC^ealkyl, haloCi_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC ealkyl, cyanod.4alkyl, ealkoxyC!-ealkyl wherein each d.6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, -NR4R5, C1-6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- d-aalkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, -C(=0)-NR4R5, -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl-NR4R5, d-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR1 R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d^alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NR12- S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with - C(=0)-R6, hydroxyCi-6alkyl substituted with R6, C -6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d- 6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2;
R3a represents -NR10R11, hydroxy!, d.6alkoxy, hydroxyd-6alkoxy, C1-6alkoxy substituted with -NR10R11, d_6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl, halod_6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl,, hydroxyCi_6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d.6alkyl„ hydroxyC2.6alkenyl, hydroxyC2-6alkynyl, hydroxyhaloCi_6alkyl, cyanod-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-d.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with C1-6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-l d-6alkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-C(=0)-, d-ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)-d- 6alkyl, d ealkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl substituted with d- 6alkoxy, C2.6alkynyl substituted with C1-6alkoxy, C -6alkyl substituted with R9 and optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d. 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, C2.6alkenyl substituted with R9, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2_6alkenyl substituted with - NR10R11, C2.6alkynyl substituted with -NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with hydroxyl and - NR10R11, d.6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, -C1-6alkyl-
C(R12)=N-0-R12, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with - O-C(=O)-NR10R11, -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C^ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d. 6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000004_0001
6alkyl, C^ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with - NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13, d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2; R3b represents hydrogen or hydroxyl; provided that if R3a represents -NR10R11, then R3b represents hydrogen; or
R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0, to form =NR10, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form =CH-C0-4alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000005_0001
R3c, or to form ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, C1-4alkyl, hydroxyC1-4alkyl, H2N-C1.4alkyl, (Ci-4alkyl)NH-Ci-4alkyl, (d-4aikyl)2N-d-4alkyl, haloC^alky NH-C^alkyl, C^alkoxyC^alkyl, -C(=0)-NH2, - C(=0)-NH(C1-4alkyl), -C(=0)-N(C1.4alkyl)2;
R3c represents hydrogen, hydroxyl, d-ealkoxy, R9, -NR10R11, cyano, -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl or -CH(OH)- d-ealkyl; R3 represents hydroxyl, d ealkoxy, hydroxyCi_6alkoxy, C1-6alkoxy substituted with -
NR10R11, Ci-6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl, halod-6alkyl optionally substituted with -O- C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyd-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyd-6alkenyl, hydroxyd-6alkynyl, hydroxyhalod.6alkyl, cyanod ealkyl, d-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C -6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-, d-ealkyl substituted with C1-6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-C(=0)-, d-ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)-d- 6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each d-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl substituted with d- 6alkoxy, d-6alkynyl substituted with d-6alkoxy, Ci-6a!kyl substituted with R9 and optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d- 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, d-6alkenyl substituted with R9, d ealkynyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2-6alkenyl substituted with - NR10R11, d-ealkynyl substituted with -NR10R11, d.6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and - NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, -C1-6alkyl- C(R12)=N-0-R12, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d_6alkyl substituted with -
Figure imgf000005_0002
d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C^alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-d_ 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with - NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13, C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC1-6alkyl)2; R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, C^alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with - NR14R15, hydroxyd-ealkyl, haloCi_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, d-ealkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each Ci_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, - S(=0)2-C1_6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, -C(=0)-0- d-ealkyl, -C(=0)-R13, Ci.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC,-6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-d-6alkyl, C^alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod- 6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH- S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13 or d-6alkyl substituted with R13; R6 represents C3.8cycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S; said C3.
8cycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1 , 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from cyano, C -6alkyi, cyanoC^alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, halogen, halod-ealkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, d-ealkoxy, d- 6alkoxyd-6alkyl, C1_6alkyl-0-C(=0)-, -NR14R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR 4R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR1 R15, -S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod- 6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d_6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d-ealkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod- 6alkyl or C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-NR14R15;
R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen, d_6alkyl, hydroxyd.6alkyI, halod- 6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl or d.6alkoxyd.6alkyl;
R9 represents d-scycloalkyl, d-scycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said C3.8cycloalkyl, d-scycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently being substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from =0, d^alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyCi-4alkyl, cyano, cyanod-4alkyl, d-4alkyl-0-C(=0)-, C1-4alkyl substituted with C1-4alkyl-0-C(=0)-, C1-4alkyl-C(=0)-, d. 4alkoxyC1-4alkyl wherein each C1-4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC1-4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, -NR14R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, d.4alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, C1-4alkoxy, -S(=0)2-C1.4alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod.4alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR 4R15, d.4alkyl substituted with - S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1-4alkyl, C1-4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1-4alkyl, d.4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13, - C(=0)-R13, d.4alkyl substituted with R13, phenyl optionally substituted with R16, phenylCi-6alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with R16, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R16;
or when two of the substituents of R9 are attached to the same atom, they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S;
R10 and R 1 each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C1-6alkyl, cyanod.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, d_6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, halod. 6alkyl, hydroxyd_6alkyl, hydroxyhalod.6alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, d.6alkoxyd_6alkyl wherein each C-i-ealk l may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, R6, d- 6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-R6, -C(=0)-d-6alkyl, -C(=0)-hydroxyC1.6alkyl, -C(=0)- haloCi.6alkyl,-C(=0)-hydroxyhaloC1_6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, -S(=0)2- d.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d. 6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, Ci-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2- NR14R15, Ci-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NH-
Figure imgf000007_0001
Ci-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, or d_6alkyl substituted with - NH-S(=0)2-NR14R15; R12 represents hydrogen or C -4alkyl optionally substituted with C1-4alkoxy;
R13 represents C3.8cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said C3-8cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C1-6alkyl, haloC^alkyl, =0, cyano, - C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, or -NR14R15;
R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen, or haloCi.4alkyl, or C -4alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected from hydroxyl, C1-4alkoxy, amino or mono-or di(Ci-4alkyl)amino;
R16 represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C -4alkyl, C^alkoxy, -NR14R15 or - C(=0)NR 4R15;
R18 represents hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl, C3.8 cycloalkyl, C1-4alkyl substituted with C3-8 cycloalkyl;
R19 represents hydrogen; C1-6 alkyl; C3-8 cycloalkyl;
Figure imgf000008_0001
substituted with -O-R20; - (CH2)r-CN; -(CH2)rCONR20R21; -(CH2)n-NR20R21; -(CH2)r1-NR20COR21 ; -(CH2)r1-NR20- (CH2)s-S02-R21; -(CH2)r1-NH-SO2-NR20R21 ; -(CH2)r1-NR20CO2R21 ; -(CH2)r-SO2NR20R21; phenyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2 , 3, 4 or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C1-4alkyl, C^alkyloxy, cyano or amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heterocycle being optionally substituted with 1 , 2 , 3 or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C^alkyl, C1-4alkyloxy, cyano or amino; wherein said C1-6 alkyl and C3.8 cycloalkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or more R20 groups R20 and R21 independently represent hydrogen, Ci_6 alkyl, hydroxyC^alkyl, -(CH2)n-0-C1_ 6alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R20 and R21 can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6- membered ring which optionally contains a further heteroatom selected from O, S or N; R22 and R23 independently represent hydrogen, Ci_6 alkyl, or hydroxyC -6alkyl; m independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2;
n independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
s independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4; r independently represent an integer equal to 1 , 2, 3, or 4;
r1 independently represent an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4;
provided that when R3a and R3 are taken together to form =0, n=0, Y represents -E-D, and E represents a bond, then D does not represent unsubstituted phenyl;
the /V-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
WO2006/092430, WO2008/003702, WO01/68047, WO2005/007099, WO2004/098494, WO2009/141386, WO 2004/030635, WO 2008/141065, WO 201 1/026579, WO
201 1/028947, WO2007/003419, WO 00/42026 and WO201 1/135376 which each disclose a series of heterocyclyl derivatives.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) in all sections of this document (including the uses, methods and other aspects of the invention) include references to all other sub-formula, sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples as defined herein.
The prefix "Cx-y" (where x and y are integers) as used herein refers to the number of carbon atoms in a given group. Thus, a C1-6alkyl group contains from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a C3.6cycloalkyl group contains from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, a Ci_4alkoxy group contains from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and so on.
The term 'halo' or 'halogen' as used herein refers to a fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atom.
The term 'C -4alkyr, or 'Chalky!' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl and the like.
The term 'C2.4alkeny or 'C2-6alkenyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group containing from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond. The term 'C2-4alkenediyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched bivalent hydrocarbon group containing from 2 to 4 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.
The term 'C2-4alkynyl' or 'C2-6alkynyr as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon triple bond. The term 'C^alkoxy' or 'C1-6alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an -O-C^alkyl group or an -0-C1-6alkyl group wherein C1-4alkyl and Ci_6alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, and the like. The term
Figure imgf000010_0001
as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1_4alkyl-0-C1.4alkyl group or a Ci-6alkyl-0-C1-6alkyl group wherein d^alkyland C -6alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxyethyl, ethoxyethyl, propoxymethyl, butoxypropyl, and the like. The term 'C3.8cycloalkyr as used herein refers to a saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of such groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl and the like.
The term 'C3.8cycloalkeny as used herein refers to a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a carbon carbon double bond.
The term 'hydroxyC^alkyl' or 'hydroxyC^alkyr as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1-4alkyl or C -6alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The terms 'hydroxyC1-4alky or 'hydroxyC^alkyl' therefore include monohydroxyC^alkyl, monohydroxyCi-ealkyl and also polyhydroxyC^alkyl and polyhydroxyC^alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group, so the hydroxyC^alkyl or hydroxyC^alkyl may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and the like. The term 'haloC^alkyl' or 'haloCi.6alkyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C1-4alkyl or C -6alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term 'halod-4alkyl' or 'halod-6alkyl' therefore include monohaloCi-4alkyl, monohaloCi.6alkyl and also polyhaloC1-4alkyl and polyhaloC^alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloCi_4alkyl or halod ealkyl may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl or trifluoroethyl and the like.
The term 'hydroxyhaIod-4aIkyl' or 'hydroxyhaloC^alkyl' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a d-4alkyl or C -6alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term 'hydroxyh.alod-4alkyl' or 'hydroxyhalod-6alkyl' therefore refers to a C _4alkyl or C1-6aikyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.
The term 'hydroxyC^alkoxy' or 'hydroxyd ealkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an -0-d-4alkyl group or an -O-d ealkyl group wherein the d^alkyl and Ci_6alkyl group is as defined above and one or more than one hydrogen atom of the Ci_4alkyl or C^alkyl group is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The term 'hydroxyd- 4alkoxy' or 'hydroxyCi.6alkoxy' therefore include monohydroxyd-4alkoxy,
monohydroxyd ealkoxy and also polyhydroxyd_4alkoxy and polyhydroxyd.6alkoxy. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group so the hydroxyd_4alkoxy or hydroxyd.6alkoxy may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethoxy, hydroxyethoxy, hydroxypropoxy and the like. The term 'haloC1-4alkoxy' or 'halod.6alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a -0-d.4alkyl group or a -O-d-6 alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms 'halod.4alkoxy' or 'halod.6alkoxy' therefore include monohaIod_4alkoxy, monohaloC1-6alkoxy and also polyhaloC1-4alkoxy and polyhaloC -6alkoxy. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloC^alkoxy or haloC^alkoxy may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups include fluoroethyloxy, difluoromethoxy or trifluoromethoxy and the like. The term 'hydroxyhaloC^alkoxy' as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to an -0-C1-4alkyl group wherein the Ci_4alkyl group is as defined herein and wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term 'hydroxyhaloC^alkoxy' therefore refers to a -0-C-|.4alkyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.
The term
Figure imgf000012_0001
as used herein as a group or part of a group refers to a C-Malkyl-O-C^alkyl group wherein C1-4alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C1-4alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term 'haloCi.4 alkoxyC^alkyl' therefore refers to a C^alkyl-O-C^alkyl group wherein in one or both of the Ci_4alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein d-4 alkyl is as defined herein.
Preferably, in one of the C1-4alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. Preferably, haloC^alkoxyC^alkyl means C -4alkyl substituted with haloC1-4alkoxy.
The term
Figure imgf000012_0002
group wherein C1-4alkyl is as defined herein and wherein in one or both of the C -4alkyl groups one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms 'hydroxyhaloC 4alkoxyC1-4alkyr therefore refers to a C1_4alkyl-0-C1.4alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C _4alkyl groups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C-i_4alkyl is as defined herein.
The term 'hydroxyC2-6alkenyl' as used herein refers to a C2-6alkenyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C2. 6alkenyl is as defined herein. The term 'hydroxyC2-6alkynyr as used herein refers to a C2-6alkynyl group wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and wherein C2- 6alkynyl is as defined herein.
The term phenylC^alkyl as used herein refers to a C1-6a(kyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one phenyl group.
The term cyanoC^alkyl or cyanoC1-6alkyl as used herein refers to a C -4alkyl or C1-6alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted with one cyano group.
The term "heterocyclyl" as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term "heterocyclyl group" includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 1 1 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein to heterocyclyl groups, the heterocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
The heterocyclyl groups can be heteroaryl groups having from 5 to 12 ring members, more usually from 5 to 10 ring members. The term "heteroaryl" is used herein to denote a heterocyclyl group having aromatic character. The term "heteroaryl" embraces polycyclic (e.g. bicyclic) ring systems wherein one or more rings are non-aromatic, provided that at least one ring is aromatic. In such polycyclic systems, the group may be attached by the aromatic ring, or by a non-aromatic ring. Examples of heteroaryl groups are monocyclic and bicyclic groups containing from five to twelve ring members, and more usually from five to ten ring members. The heteroaryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings, or two fused five membered rings. Each ring may contain up to about five heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example a single heteroatom. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five. Examples of five membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups.
Examples of six membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine.
A bicyclic heteroaryl group may be, for example, a group selected from:
a) a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1 , 2 or 3 ring
heteroatoms;
b) a pyridine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 , 2 or 3 ring
heteroatoms;
c) a pyrimidine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring
heteroatoms;
d) a pyrrole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 , 2 or 3 ring
heteroatoms;
e) a pyrazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring
heteroatoms;
f) an imidazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring
heteroatoms; g) an oxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;
h) an isoxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring
heteroatoms;
i) a thiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring
heteroatoms;
j) an isothiazoie ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;
k) a thiophene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 , 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;
I) a furan ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0, 1 , 2 or 3 ring
heteroatoms;
m) a cyclohexyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1 , 2 or 3 ring
heteroatoms; and
n) a cyclopentyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1 , 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.
Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole (e.g.
imidazo[2,1-b]thiazole) and imidazoimidazole (e.g. imidazo[1 ,2-a]imidazole).
Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limited to benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole,
benzisothiazole, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, indolizine, indoiine, isoindoline, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine (e.g. pyrazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidine), triazolopyrimidine (e.g. [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-a]pyrimidine), benzodioxole, imidazopyridine and pyrazolopyridine (e.g. pyrazolo[1 ,5-a]pyridine) groups.
Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups. Examples of polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non- aromatic ring include, tetrahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, dihydrobenzthiene, dihydrobenzfuran, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1 ,4]dioxine, benzo[1 ,3]dioxole, 4,5,6,7- tetrahydrobenzofuran, tetrahydrotriazolopyrazine (e.g. 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro- [1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine), indoline and indane groups.
A nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. Each ring may, in addition, contain up to about four other heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 3 heteroatoms, for example 1 , 2 or 3, more usually up to 2 nitrogens, for example a single nitrogen. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.
Examples of nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxatriazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furazanyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 1 ,2,3-triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazolyl), tetrazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole, benzthiazolyl and benzisothiazole, indolyl, 3H-indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, isoindolinyl, purinyl (e.g., adenine [6-aminopurine], guanine [2- amino-6-hydroxypurine]), indazolyl, quinolizinyl, benzoxazinyl, benzodiazinyl,
pyridopyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl and pteridinyl.
Examples of nitrogen-containing polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring include tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, and indolinyl.
The term "non-aromatic group" embraces, unless the context indicates otherwise, unsaturated ring systems without aromatic character, partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. The terms "unsaturated" and "partially saturated" refer to rings wherein the ring structure(s) contains atoms sharing more than one valence bond i.e. the ring contains at least one multiple bond e.g. a C=C, C≡C or N=C bond. The term "fully saturated" refers to rings where there are no multiple bonds between ring atoms. Saturated heterocyclyl groups include piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine. Partially saturated heterocyclyl groups include pyrazolines, for example 2-pyrazoline and 3-pyrazoline.
Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups are groups having from 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Such groups can be monocyclic or bicyclic, for example, and typically have from 1 to 5 heteroatom ring members (more usually 1 , 2, 3 or 4 heteroatom ring members), usually selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur. The heterocyclyl groups can contain, for example, cyclic ether moieties (e.g. as in tetrahydrofuran and dioxane), cyclic thioether moieties (e.g. as in
tetrahydrothiophene and dithiane), cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amide moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidone), cyclic thioamides, cyclic thioesters, cyclic ureas (e.g. as in imidazolidin-2-one) cyclic ester moieties (e.g. as in butyrolactone), cyclic sulphones (e.g. as in sulpholane and sulpholene), cyclic sulphoxides, cyclic
sulphonamides and combinations thereof (e.g. thiomorpholine).
Particular examples include morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1 -piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), piperidone, pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, azetidine, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran),
dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoiine, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazone, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. In general, preferred non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include saturated groups such as piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, morpholine, piperazine and N-alkyl piperazines.
In a nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl ring the ring must contain at least one ring nitrogen atom. The heterocylic groups can contain, for example cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amides (such as a pyrrolidinone, piperidone or caprolactam), cyclic sulphonamides (such as an isothiazolidine 1 ,1 -dioxide,
[1 ,2]thiazinane 1 ,1 -dioxide or [1 ,2]thiazepane 1 ,1-dioxide) and combinations thereof. Particular examples of nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include aziridine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3- piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3- pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, dihydrothiazole, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 6H-1 ,2,5-thiadiazine, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine.
The heterocyclyl groups can be polycyclic fused ring systems or bridged ring systems such as the oxa- and aza analogues of bicycloalkanes, tricycloalkanes (e.g.
adamantane and oxa-adamantane). For an explanation of the distinction between fused and bridged ring systems, see Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4th Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages 131 -133, 1992.
The heterocyclyl groups can each be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituent groups. For example, heterocyclyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted by 1 , 2, 3 or 4 substituents. Where the heterocyclyl group is monocyclic or bicyclic, typically it is unsubstituted or has 1 , 2 or 3 substituents.
The term "carbocyclyl" as used herein shall, unless the context indicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ring systems. Thus, for example, the term "carbocyclyl group" includes within its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated and fully saturated carbocyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 1 1 and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein to carbocyclyl groups, the carbocyclyl ring can, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.
The term carbocyclyl comprises aryl, C3-8cycloalkyl, C3-8cycloalkenyl. The term aryl as used herein refers to carbocyclyl aromatic groups including phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl groups. Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that substituents can be selected each independently out of a list of numerous definitions, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible. Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that a particular substituent is further substituted with two or more groups, such as for example hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkoxy, all possible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.
In one embodiment, Y represents -CR18=N-OR19. In particular wherein R18 and R19 represent C^alkyi; in particular R18 is -CH3 and R19 is -CH3 or -C(CH3)3. In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D wherein E represents a bond.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12 (e.g. 5 to 10) ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R groups. In one embodiment, Y represents phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups. In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups. In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups. In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups. In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyciyi containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyciyi may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups.
In one embodiment, E represents a bond, C2-4alkenediyl optionally substituted with R22, CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-, -NR22-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)S-NR22-, -0-(CR22R23)s-, - (CR22R23)s-CO-NR22-(CR22R23)s- or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s-.
In one embodiment, E represents a bond, C2-4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)S- CO-, -NR22-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR2 R 3)S-NR22-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-NR 2-(CR22R23)s- or - (CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s-.
In one embodiment, E represents C2.4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-, - NR22-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)s-NR22-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-NR2 -(CR 2R23)s- or -(CR2 R 3)S- NR 2-CO-(CR22R23)s
In one embodiment, E represents a bond, C2.4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR2 R23)s-, -NR22- (CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-NR22-, -(CR 2R23)s-CO-NR22-(CR22R23)s- or -(CR22R23)S-NR22- CO-(CR22R23)s-. In one embodiment, E represents a bond.
In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond.
In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond and D represents any one of the following : - a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
- a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
Figure imgf000023_0001
C2-4alkenyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, halod-6aikyl. hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, cyanod-4alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each d- 6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C -6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5,
Figure imgf000023_0002
- S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR 4R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1_6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-d-ealkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2- halod-ealkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, d-ealkyl substituted with R6, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyd.6alkyl substituted with R6, d- 6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d-ealkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC1-6alkyl)2; and each R1a is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-4aikyl, hydroxyd-4alkyl, d.4alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(d- 4alkyl)amino or -NH(C3.8cycloalkyl), cyanod-4alkyl, d-4alkoxyd-4alkyl, and d-4alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms;
Figure imgf000023_0003
wherein R1 represents hydrogen, C -6alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, hydroxyd ealkyl, halod-6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each d_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, d_6alkyl substituted with - NR4R5, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-d_6alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod. 6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-ea!kyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod. 6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, d.6alkyl substituted with R6, d-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyd_6alkyl substituted with R6, d-ealkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2. In one embodiment, D is other than phenyl. In one embodiment, D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heterocyclyl being other than pyrazol-4-yl, wherein said heterocyclyl may be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R groups.
In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted. Said optional substituents may represent halo, cyano, d.6alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, -C(=0)-0-d-6alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, -NR4R5, C,.6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- d-6alkyl, C^alkyl substituted with -NR4R5,-C(=0)-NR4R5, - C(=0)-C1_6alkyl-NR4R5, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6. In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl and phenyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
In one embodiment, D represents piperidinyl, pyridinyl (e.g. pyridin-3-yl or pyridine-4-yl), phenyl, pyrrolyl (e.g. pyrrol-2-yl or pyrrol-3-yl), imidazolyl (e.g. imidazol-1-yl, imidazol-2- yl or imidazol-4-yl), triazolyl (e.g. 1 ,2 3 triazol-4-yl or 1 ,2,4 triazol-1-yl), pyrrolopyridinyl (e.g. pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl), benzodioxolyl (e.g 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl), indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrrolyl, pyrimidinyl (e.g. pyrimidin-5-yl), pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl (e.g. 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl), said rings being optionally substituted. Said optional substituents may represent halo, cyano, C^alkyl, d^alkoxy, -C(=0)-0-C1- 6alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, -NR4R5, d.6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- d-6alkyl, d-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R ,-C(=0)-NR4R5, -C(=0)-C1_6alkyl-NR4R5, R6, C1-6a!kyl substituted with R6.
In one embodiment, said optional substituents may represent halo (e.g. fluoro or chloro), cyano, C1-6alkyl (e.g. methyl), C1-6alkoxy (e.g. methoxy), -C(=0)-0-C1.6alkyl (e.g. - C02C(CH3)3), hydroxyC1-6alkyl (e.g. -CH2CH2OH or -CH2OH), -NR4R5 (e.g. -NH2 - NHCH3, -NHCO-morpholinyl or -NHC02C(CH3)3), Chalky! substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1- 6alkyl, for example -CH2-0-C(=0)CH3), C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5 (e.g. - CH2NH2), -C(=0)-NR4R5 (e.g. -C(=0)-NH-CH2CH2NH2, -C(=0)-NH-CH2CH2CH2NH2, - C(=0)-NHCH3 or -C(=0)-NH-CH2CH2CH2OH),-C(=0)-R6 (e.g. where R6 is 4 to 7- membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O for example R1 is -C(=0)-morpholinyl), R6 (e.g. 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O such as morpholinyl, N-methylpiperazinyl or piperazinyl), or C -6alkyl substituted with R6 (e.g. 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O such as -CH2CH2-morpholinyl).
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is other than pyrazolyl or phenyl, in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 1 -pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl or 3-pyrazolyl, all may optionally be substituted.
In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted. In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.
In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl. one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is optionally substituted pyrazol-4-yl. In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)-. In one embodiment, W is -C(R3aR3b)-.
In one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen, C^alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, hydroxyC^alkyl, haloCi_6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, cyanoC1_4alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each d- 6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C-|.6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, - S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d_6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2- haloC1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, -C(=0)R6, d.6alkyl substituted with R6, d ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyd-6alkyl substituted with R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d-ealkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d- 6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC1-6alkyl)2.
In one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen, d ealkyl, d-4alkenyl, hydroxyd_6alkyl, haloC -6alkyl, d ealkoxyd ealkyl wherein each d_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, d ealkyl substituted with -NR4R5, d_6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with - S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, R6, -C(=0)R6, d_6alkyl substituted with R6, d-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyd ealkyl substituted with R6, or d.6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3.
In one embodiment R1 represents halo, cyano, d.6alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, -C(=0)-0-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyd_6alkyl, -NR4R5, d-6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- C1-6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with .NR4R5,-C(=0)-NR4R5, -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl-NR4R5, R6, -C(=0)R6, d.6alkyl substituted with R6.
In one embodiment R1 represents hydrogen.
In one embodiment R1 represents C1-6alky!. In one embodiment R1 represents methyl. In one embodiment each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, Ci-4alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, d^alkoxy, hydroxyd-4alkyl, hydroxyC^alkoxy, halod-4alkyl> haloC1-4alkoxy, d-4alkoxyd-4alky!, R13, C1-4alkoxy substituted with R13, -C(=0)-R13, d- 4alkyl substituted with NR7R8, d-4alkoxy substituted with NR7R8, -NR7R8 and -C(=0)- NR7R8; or when two R2 groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula -0-(C(R17)2)p-0- wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine and p represents 1 or 2.
In one embodiment each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, d-4alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, d-4alkoxy, hydroxyd-4alkyl, hydroxyd-4alkoxy, halod-4alkoxy, d- 4alkoxyC1-4alkyl, R13, d-4alkoxy substituted with R13, -C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with NR7R8, d.4alkoxy substituted with NR7R8, -NR7R8 or -C(=0)-NR7R8.
In one embodiment one or more R2 represents d_4alkoxy, for example CH30-.
In one embodiment one or more R2 represents d_ alkoxy or halogen, for example CH3O- or fluoro or chloro.
In one embodiment n is equal to 0. In one embodiment n is equal to 1. In one
embodiment n is equal to 2. In one embodiment n is equal to 3. In one embodiment n is equal to 4.
In one embodiment, n is equal to 2, 3 or 4. In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position.
In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and the other is present at the 5-position and each R2 represents d-4alkoxy, for example each R2 represents CH30-.
In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R2 is present at the 2-position, one R2 is present at the 3-position and one R2 is present at the 5-position. In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and represents Ci.4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R is present at the 5-position and represents d- 4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.
In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R2 is present at the 2-position, one R2 is present at the 3-position, one R2 is present at the 5-position and one R2 is present at the 6-position. In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R2 is present at the 3-position and represents d-4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is present at the 5-position and represents d- 4alkoxy, for example CH30-; one R2 is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro, and one R2 is present at the 6-position and represents halogen, for example fluoro.
In one embodiment, R3 represents C^alkyl, hydroxyd ealkyl, hydroxyhalod ealkyl, hydroxyC2-6alkynyl, halod-6alkyl, ha!od-6alkyl optionally substituted (e.g. substituted) with -0-C(=0)-Ci_6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C^alkoxyC^alkyl wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each Ci-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1_6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, d ealkyl substituted with »NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, d^alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0- d-ealkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with carboxyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-d- 6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with R9 and optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -d-6alkyl-C(R12)=N-0-R12, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, C2. 6alkenyl substituted with R9, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyd-6alkoxy, C2- 6alkenyl, d ealkynyl, R13, d.6alkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1-6alkyl-C(=0)- or d- 6aikyl substituted with -P(=0)(OCi^alkyl)2. In one embodiment. R3 represents Chalky!, hydroxyd-6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, halod-ealkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each Ci_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, d-ealkyl substituted with -NR10R1 , C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11 , C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11 , d- 6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11 , d- 6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, d_6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -d.6alkyl-C(R12)=N-0-R12, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyd_6alkoxy, d ealkenyl, C2-6alkynyl, R13 or d-6alkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-C(=0)-.
In one embodiment R3 represents C -6alkyl, hydroxyd-6alkyl, haloCi.6alkyl, haloC1-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, hydroxyC2.6alkynyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, d.6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C . 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, cyanod-ealkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11 , Ci-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11, Ci-6alkyl substituted with one or two halo atoms and -NR 0R11. C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-d.6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with d.6alkoxyd.6alkyl-C(=0)-, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, d_6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, . 6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with R9 and substituted with -0-C(=0)-d-6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -d-6alkyl- C(R12)=N-0-R12, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d-6alkenyl substituted with R9 C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, d-6alkyloxyd-6alkyI wherein each d.6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C2-6alkenyl, C2.6alkynyl, R13, or d_6alkyl substituted with - P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2.
In one embodiment, R3 represents C1-6alkyl, hydroxyd-6alkyl. hydroxyhalod.6alkyI, halod-6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each Ci-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, d_6alkyl substituted with R9, d_6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11 , d.6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, d- 6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, d.6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -C1-6alkyl-C(R12)=N-0-R12, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d-ealkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyd.6alkoxy, C2- 6alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl or R13. In one embodiment R3 represents C2-6alkynyl, haloC1-6alkyl optionally substituted with - 0-C(=0)-d-6alkyl, hydroxyd.6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C .6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, d ealkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with R9, d-ealkynyl substituted with R9,C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, or d.6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11.
In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyd_6alkyl, hydroxyd ealkoxy, hydroxyhaloCi. 6alkyl, d.6alkoxy, d.6alkyl substituted with R9, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2. 6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d- 6alkyf, halod-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1_6alkyl, d-6alkenyl, or C2- 6alkynyl.
In one embodiment R3 represents C2.6alkenyl. R3 may represent -CH2-CH=CH2. In one embodiment R3 represents C2.6alkynyl. R3 may represent -CH2-C≡C— H .
In one embodiment R3 represents C2.6alkynyl (e.g. -CH2 c≡c ) substituted with R9.
R9 may represent an optionally substituted aromatic 6-membered monocyclic heterocycle containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl. The heterocyclyl may be unsubstituted or substituted, for example substituted with one C1-4alkoxyl substituent, for example -OCH3. In one embodiment R3 may represent-CH2 C≡C (2-pyrimidinyl) or -CH2— c≡c (3-methoxy-pyridin-2-yl). In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyC^alkyl, hydroxyhaloC ealkyl, Ci-6alkyl substituted with R9, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, or C2-6alkynyl. In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyCi„6alkyl, hydroxyhaloCi-ealkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11,
Figure imgf000031_0001
wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -O- C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, or C2-6alkynyl. In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyCLgalkyl, haloCi.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C^alkoxyCLealkyl, or C2.6alkynyl.
In one embodiment when R3 represents C -6alkyl (e.g. Ci-4alkyl) substituted with R9. R9 represents an optionally substituted saturated or an aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl.
In one embodiment when R3 represents C1-6alkyl (e.g. C^alkyl) substituted with R9, wherein R9 represents an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two nitrogen heteroatom, for example pyridinyl. The heterocyclyl may be unsubstituted or substituted, for example substituted with C1-4alkyl substituted with -NR14R15 (e.g. -NH2), for example -CH2NH2
In one embodiment when R3 represents C1-6alkyl (e.g. C1-4alkyl) substituted with R9, wherein R9 represents optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two heteroatoms selected from N, or O, for example pyrrolidinyl, morpholinyl, piperidinyl and piperazinyl. In one embodiment R3 represents - CH2CH2-morpholinyl, -CH2CH2-piperazinyl, -CH2CH2-(4-piperazin-1 -yl-ethanone) or - CH2CH2-pyrrolidin-2-one. In one embodiment when R3 represents C1-6alkyl (e.g. C -4alkyl) substituted with R9, wherein R9 represents C3.8cycloalkyl, for example cyclopropyl. In one embodiment R3 represents -CH2-cyclopropyl. In one embodiment R3 represents C^alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo and/or - NR10R11. In one embodiment R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl, halo or - NR10R11, wherein the C1-6alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl. In a further embodiment R3 represents Ci-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl or - NR10R11.
In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyC^ealkyl. R3 may represent - CH2CHOHCH2OH, -CH2CH2OH or -CH2CH2CH2OH. In one embodiment R3 represents Ci-ealkoxyd-ealkyl wherein each Ci_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups. R3 may represent
CH2CHOHCH2OCH3.
In one embodiment R3 represents
Figure imgf000032_0001
R3 may represent -CH2CH2OCH3 or -CH2CH2CH2OCH3.
In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, for example R3 may represent - CH2CHOHCF3. In one embodiment R3 represents hydroxyC^alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)- C1-6alkyl such as -0-C(=0)CH3, for example R3 may represent - CH2CH(OC(=0)CH3)CH2OCH3.
In one embodiment R3 represents halod-ealkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1_ 6alkyl such as -0-C(=0)CH3, for example R3 may represent -CH2CH(OC(=0)CH3)CF3.
In a yet further embodiment R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11.
In one embodiment R3 represents C1-4alkyl substituted with -NR10R11. In one
embodiment R3 represents C -4alkyl substituted -NR10R11, wherein the Ci_4alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl. In one embodiment R3 represents d, 4alkyl substituted with -NR10R11 , wherein the d-4alkyl group is an ethylene group (- CH2CH2-). In one embodiment when R3 represents C -6alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl) substituted with -NR10R11, wherein R10 and R11 are independently selected from hydrogen, C^alkyl and haloCi.6alkyl (e.g. hydrogen, iso-propyl or -CH2CF3). In one embodiment when R3 represents C -6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11 , R10 and R11 have the following meanings:
a) one of R10 and R 1 represents hydrogen and the other represents C -6alkyl, for example CH3 or -CH(CH3)2. R3 may represent -CH2CH2NHCH3 or - CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2;
b) one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents haloC^alkyl, for example -CH2CF3. R3 may represent -CH2CH2CH2NHCH2CF3 ;
c) one of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen and the other represents hydroxyCi.6alkyl, for example -CH2CH2CH2OH. R3 may represent -CH2CH2CH2NHCH2CH2CH2OH ;
d) both of R10 and R11 represents hydrogen;
In one embodiment R3 represents -CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2.
R3a may represent -NR10R11, hydroxyl, C1-6alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, haloCi.6alkyl. C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1_6alkyl, C1-6alkoxyC -6alkyl wherein each C1-6aikyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, Ci-6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, d- 6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, Ci-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C^alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR 2-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -C1.6alkyl-C(R12)=N-0-R12, C -6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, Ci-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1-6alkoxy, C2.6alkenyl, C2.6alkynyl, R13 or d^alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000033_0001
In one embodiment R3a is -NR10R11, hydroxyl, hydroxyCi.6alkyl, cyanod-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000033_0002
C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, C -6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11 , C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11 , or C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11. ln one embodiment R represents hydroxyl.
In one embodiment R represents hydrogen. In one embodiment R3b represents hydroxyl.
In one embodiment R3a represents hydroxyl and R3b represents hydrogen.
In one embodiment R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0, to form =NR10, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form =CH-C0-
4alkyl substituted with R3°, or to form -Θ— wherein ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, Ci_4alkyl, hydroxyC^alkyl, H2N-C1.4alkyl, (d^alky NH-d^alkyl, (C1- alkyl)2N-C1-4alkyl, (haloC^alky NH-C^alkyl, C1-4alkoxyC1. 4alkyl, -C(=0)-NH2, -C(=0)-NH(C1-4alkyl), or -C(=0)-N(C1-4alkyl)2.
In one embodiment R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom t
bstituted with R , or to form
Figure imgf000034_0001
membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond.
In one embodiment R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0.
In one embodiment R and R are taken together to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached.
In one embodiment R3a and R3b are taken together to form =CH-C0.4alkyl substituted with
R ,3c
In one embodiment R represents hydrogen. In one embodiment R3c represents hydroxyl, C1-6alkoxy, R9, -NR10R11, cyano, -C(=0)-C1. 6alkyl or -CH(OH)- C^alkyl.
In one embodiment R c represents hydroxyl, -NR 0R11, cyano, or -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl.
In one embodiment R3a and R3b are taken together to form =CH-C0-4alkyl in the Z configuration.
In one embodiment, R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, d-6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, hydroxyCi.6alkyl, d-6al oxyd-6alkyl wherein each d. 6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one hydroxyl group, -C(=0)-NR14R15, -C(=0)- O- C1-6alkyl or -C(=0)-R13
In one embodiment, R4 represents hydrogen, d-6alkyl, Ci-6alkyl substituted with - NR14R15, hydroxyd-6alkyl, d.6alkoxyd.6alkyl wherein each d.6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one hydroxyl group, -C(=0)-NR14R15, -C(=0)-0- C1-6alkyl, -C(=0)-R13.
In one embodiment, R5 represents hydrogen or C1-6alkyl. In one embodiment, R14 and R15 represent hydrogen.
In one embodiment, R 3 represents a saturated 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O, such as for example morpholinyl.
In one embodiment, R9 is selected from:
an optionally substituted d-scycloalkyl,
an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl,
an optionally substituted saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl,
a saturated or an aromatic 3, 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or two oxygen heteroatoms,
an optionally substituted 4 membered heterocyclyl containing one oxygen heteroatom, an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocycie containing one or two nitrogen heteroatoms, a partially saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom which may optionally be substituted,
an optionally substituted saturated 4 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom,
a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom, a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen heteroatom, a bicyclic heterocyclyl containing a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1 , 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms,
a 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle substituted with two
substituents which are attached to the same atom and which are taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,
an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one sulphur heteroatom,
an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one sulphur and one nitrogen heteroatom,
a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen heteroatoms, an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing four nitrogen heteroatoms, an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one oxygen and two nitrogen heteroatoms, .
an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen heteroatoms,
an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing three nitrogen heteroatoms,
a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom,
a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen and one sulphur heteroatom,
a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogen heteroatoms, a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogen and one oxygen heteroatom, and
phenyl or naphthyl, in particular phenyl. In one embodiment, R9 represents C3.6cycloalkyl, such as for example cyclopropyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, such as for example oxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example 1 H-isoindol-1 ,3-dione. Optional substituents may represent =0, Ci.4alkoxy,
Figure imgf000037_0001
substituted with -NR14R15, hydroxyC1.4alkyl, or C1-4alkyl-C(=0)-.. In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl. Optional substituents may represent C1-4alkoxy or -S(=0)2-NR14R15. In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl. Optional substituents may represent - S(=0)2-NR14R15.
In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl. Optional substituents may represent C^alkoxy.
In one embodiment, R9 represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl. Optional substituents may represent =0, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R16; or -S(=0)2-NR14R15.
In one embodiment R10 represents hydrogen or C1-6aikyl,
In one embodiment R10 is hydrogen.
In one embodiment R11 represents hydrogen, C -6alkyl, haloC1-6alkyl, -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, - S(=0)2-C1-6alkyi, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, hydroxyCi_6alkyl, -C(=0)-hydroxyhaloC1.6alkyl, - C(=0)-R6, cyanoCi.6alkyl, R6, -C(=0)-R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-haloC1. 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, d-6alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC1-6alkyl, carboxyl, or d- 6alkoxyCi-6alkyl.
In one embodiment R10 or R11 represents hydrogen, d ealkyl, haloCi_6alkyl, hydroxyd- 6alkyl, Chalky! substituted with -NR14R15, d-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl.
In one embodiment R10 and R11 represent hydrogen or Chalky!.
In one embodiment R10 represents hydrogen or Ci_6alkyl. In one embodiment R10 is hydrogen. In one embodiment R11 represents hydrogen, Ci_6alkyl, halod-6alkyl, -C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, - S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, hydroxyC^alkyl, -C(=0)-hydroxyhaloC1.6alkyl, - C(=0)-R6, cyanoC1-6alkyl, R6, -C(=0)-R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-haloC1- 6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, d ealkoxy, hydroxyhalod ealkyl, carboxyl, or d- 6alkoxyd-6alkyl.
In one embodiment, R6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example piperazinyl or morpholinyl or
tetrahydropyranyl, optionally substituted with halogen, d_6alkyl, or d.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-.
In one embodiment, R6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example pyridinyl, optionally substituted with halogen, d-ealkyl, or d.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-. In one embodiment, R12 represents hydrogen or C -4alkyl optionally substituted with d- 4alkyloxy.
In one embodiment, R13 represents a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O. In one embodiment, R and R each independently represent hydrogen or C -4alkyl.
In one embodiment, R22 and R23 each independently represent hydrogen.
In one embodiment, Y represents -CR18=N-OR19 or -E-D; R18 and R19 represent d- 6alkyl; E represents a bond, C2.4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR22R 3)s-, -NR -(CR22R23)S-, - (CR22R23)s-NR22-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-NR22-(CR22R23)s- or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s-; D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted with halo, cyano, C1-6alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl, hydroxyCi-6alkyl, -NR4R5, C1-6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- d-6alkyl, d-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5,-C(=0)-NR4R5, - C(=0)-C1.6alkyl-NR4R5, R6, d-6alkyl substituted with R6; W is -N(R3)-; R2 represents d- 4alkoxy; n is equal to 2; R3 represents C2-6alkynyl, halod-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d,6alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each d_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, d_6alkyl substituted with R9, d-ealkynyl substituted with R9,d.6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, d- 6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11; R9 represents C3.6cycloalkyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle; R10 and R1 represents hydrogen, d-6alkyl, halod. 6alkyl, hydroxyd.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl; R6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated or aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted; R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen or C -4alkyl; R22 and R23 each independently represent hydrogen.
In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (I) including any tautomeric or stereochemical^ isomeric form thereof, wherein
W is -N(R3)-;
each R2 represents d_4alkoxy, for example CH30-;
Y represents -CR18=N-OR19 or -E-D;
E represents a bond, C2-4alkynediyl for example -C(triple bond)C-, -CO-(CR22R23)s- for example -C(=0)-, -NR 2-(CR2 R23)S- for example -NH-, or -NH-(CH2)-, -(CR22R23)s-CO- NR22-(CR22R i)s- for example -C(=0)-NH-, -C(=0)-NH-(CH2)2-, -C(=0)-NH-(CH2)-, - C(=0)-NH-(CH2)3-, or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s- for example -NH-C(=0)-;
D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups; for example D represents piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl (e.g. 1-pyrazolyl, 2-pyrazolyl, or 3-pyrazolyl);
R1 represents
- halo, for example fluoro or chloro;
- cyano;
- Ci-6alkyl, for example -CH3;
- C -6alkoxy, for example -0-CH3;
- -0(=0)-0-01-63ΐΙ Ι, for example -C(=0)-0-CH2CH3, -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3, -C(=0)-0-CH3;
- hydroxyC1-6alkyl, for example -CH2CH2OH, -CH2OH;
- -NR4R5, for example -NH2,-NHCH3, -NH-C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3, -NCH3-C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3, - NH-C(=0)-NH-CH(CH3)2, -NH-C(=0)- substituted with morpholin-4-yl;
- d-ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- C^alkyl, for example -CH2-0-C(=0)-CH3;
- C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, for example -CH2NH2, -CH2NH-C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3;
- -C(=0)-NR4R5, for example -C(=0)-NH(CH3), -C(=0)-NH(CH2)3NH2, -C(=0)- NH(CH2)4NH2, -C(=0)-NH(CH2)5NH2, -C(=0)-NH(CH2)5OH;
- R6, for example morpholinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperazinyl, pyridinyl substituted with chlorine, piperazinyl substituted with -CH3 or -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3;
- C -6alkyl substituted with R6, for example -CH2CH2- substituted with morpholin-4-yl; or
- -C(=0)-R6 , for example -C(=0) substituted with morpholin-4-yl;
R3 represents
- C2-6alkynyl, for example -CH2-C(triple bond)CH;
- halod-ealkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, for example -CH2CH(-0- C(=0)-CH3)CF3;
- hydroxyCi_6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C -6alkyl, for example - CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH(OH)CH2(OH);
- hydroxyhaloCLealkyl, for example -CH2CH(OH)CF3; - C^alkoxyCT-ealkyl wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C .6alkyl, for example -CH2CH2-O-CH3, - CH2CH2CH2-0-CH3, -CH2CH(OH)CH2-0-CH3, -CH2CH(-0-C(=0)-CH3)CH2-0-CH3;
- C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, for example -CH2-(C3H5), -CH2CH2 substituted with 1 H- isoindol-1 ,3-dione or with pyrrolidin-1 -yl substituted in the 4 position with =0 or -CH2OH, -CH2- substituted with oxiranyl or pyridine-5-yl substituted in the 2 position with - CH2NH2, -CH2CH2- substituted with piperazin-1 -yl optionally substituted in the 4 position with -C(=0)-CH3, -CH2CH2- substituted with morpholin-4-yl;
- C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, for example -CH2-C(triple bond)C substituted with pyridin-2-yl substituted in the 3 position with -O-CH3 or with pyrimidin-2-yl;
- C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, for example -CH2CH2NH2, -CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2, -CH2CH2CH2NHCH(CH3)2, -CH2CH2NHCH3, -CH2CH2NHCH2CF3, - CH2CH2CH2NHCH2CF3, CH2CH2CH2NHCH2C(=0)-OH, -CH2CH2CH2NHCH2CH2CH2OH; or
- d_6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11; for example -CH2CH2-0-C(=0)-NHCH3; R18 represents Ci_6 alkyl, for example -CH3;
R19 represents C1-6 alkyl, for example -CH3, C(CH3)3; and
n represents an integer equal to 2; the /V-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof or the solvates thereof.
In one embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is any one of the following compounds
Figure imgf000041_0001
as a HCI salt -41-
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
a /V-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)- and Y is D (E is a bond).
In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)- and Y is -E-D wherein E is other than a bond.
In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)- , and Y is -CR18=N-OR19. In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)- , Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups, and wherein one or more of the following applies :
n is 2;
R2 is C^alkyloxy;
R2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
In one embodiment, W is -N(R3)- , Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted and n is 2, even more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted; n is 2, R2 is C^alkyloxy, even further in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted; n is 2, R2 is (I ealkyloxy and said R2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
In one embodiment, W is -C(R3aR3b)- and Y is D (E is a bond).
In one embodiment, W is -C(R3aR3b)- and Y is -E-D wherein E is other than a bond.
In one embodiment, W is -C(R aR3b)-, and Y is -CR18=N-OR19
In one embodiment, W is -C(R3aR3b)-, Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is a 5 or 6 membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl may optionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups, and wherein one or more of the following applies :
n is 2;
R2 is C^alkyloxy;
R2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
In one embodiment, W is -C(R3aR3b)-, Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3- benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted and n is 2, even more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted; n is 2, R2 is C^alkyloxy, even further in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5- dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted; n is 2, R2 is C1-6alkyloxy and said R2 is placed in position 3 and 5.
For the avoidance of doubt, it is to be understood that each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one substituent may be combined, whenever possible, with each general and specific preference, embodiment and example for one or more, preferably, all other substituents as defined herein and that all such
embodiments are embraced by this application.
Methods for the Preparation of Compounds of Formula (I) In this section, as in all other sections of this application unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) also include all other sub-groups and examples thereof as defined herein.
In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein W is -N(R3)- and Y is D (E is a bond), said compounds being represented by formula (la), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000046_0001
(ΙΧ') : Ru is-Cl (Ia-b)
In scheme 1 , an intermediate of formula (IV) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (II) wherein and W2, each independently represent a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro or bromo and the like, with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or palladium (II) acetate , a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, a suitable ligand, such as for example
triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water. Instead of an intermediate of formula (III) also the boronic acid of D can be used. The intermediate of formula (IV) is then further reacted in a next step with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or Cs2C03, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]- 2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VI). Said intermediate of formula (VI) can then be reacted with an
intermediate of formula (VII) wherein W3 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and wherein Rx and Ry represent C1-4alkyl, and Rz represent C1-4alkyl or phenyl, for instance Rx and Ry represent CH3 and Rz represents C(CH3)3 or phenyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or N,N- dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIII). Intermediates of formula (VIII) or intermediates of formula (VIII) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (IV) or an intermediate of formula (IV) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group with an intermediate of formula (ΧΧΙΙ ) wherein R3d represent -Ci. 6alkyl-0-Si(Rx)(Ry)(Rz) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example racemic -2,2'- bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 , 1 '-binaphtyl, a suitable base, such as for example Cs2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1 ,2-dimethoxyethane. Intermediates of formula (VIII) can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents - Ci.6alkyl-OH, said compounds being represented by formula (la-a) or compounds of formula (l-a) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group, by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This type of reaction can also be performed in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid or HCI, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofurane or dioxane. Alternatively, an intermediate of formula (VI) can react with an intermediate of formula (VII') wherein W3 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or Ν,Ν-dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXV) which can then be deprotected in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or isopropanol, to give a compound of formula (la-a).The compounds of formula (la-a) or compounds of formula (la-a) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group can be reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, diisopropylethanamine or N,N-dimethyl-4- aminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane or tetrahydrofuran, to result in an intermediate of formula (IX) (mesylate derivative) or an intermediate of formula (IX') (chloride derivative) or intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX') wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group. Intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX') can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (X) to obtain a compound of formula (la) wherein R3 represents C^alkyl substituted with NR10R11, said compounds being represented by formula (la-b) or compounds of formula (la-b) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group. This reaction may optionally be performed in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, K2C03, Na2C03 or sodium hydride and optionally a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitriie, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide, 1 -methyl-pyrrolidinone, a suitable alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol and the like. This type of reaction can also be performed with a suitable salt of the intermediate of formula (X), e.g. HCI salt of intermediate of formula (X), or may be performed in the presence of potassium iodide. In this way compounds wherein R3 represents iodoCi-6alkyl can be obtained. Compounds of formula (la-b) wherein the R1 substituent carries a suitable protective group can be converted in a compound of formula (la-b) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R9, said ring being represented by formula (XXI) or a suitable salt of an intermediate of formula (XXI), in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitriie, 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, or an alcohol, e.g. 1 -butanol, optionally in the presence of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03, K2C03 or triethylamine, resulting in a compound of formula (la-d). Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with an intermediate of formula (X-a) wherein P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXX) which can be deprotected to a compound of formula (la-b-1 ) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol. Intermediates of formula (XXX) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula We-C^alkyl-NR^P wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, and P is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, e.g. Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or Ν,Ν-dimethylacetamide. Alternatively compounds of formula (la-d) or (la-b-1 ) can also be prepared by reacting respectively an intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula W6-C -6alkyl-Ncycle or W6- C^alkyl-NHR10 wherein W6 is as defined above.
Intermediates of formula (VI) can react with WQ-R 0 wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, and R3d represents optionally substituted C1-6alkyl, such as for example -CH2-C3H5, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or Cs2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide or acetonitrile, resulting in a compound of formula (la-c). In this way, compounds of formula (la-c) wherein R3 represents -S(=0)2-N(CH3) 2 can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with dimethylsulfamoyl chloride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (la-c) wherein R3d represents -CH2-C(OH)(R')(R") wherein R' represents optionally substituted Ci_4alkyl and R" represents hydrogen or optionally substituted C -4alkyl, said compounds being represented by formula (la-c-1 ), can be prepared by reacting the intermediate of formula (VI) with an intermediate of formula (XXII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, Cs2C03, or potassium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide, Ν,Ν-dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile or water. Intermediates of formula (IV) can also react with an intermediate of formula (XXIII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate or
tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'- diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine] or 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2'-(N,N- dimethylamino)biphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (la-c).
Compounds of formula (la-b) wherein R11 is C1-6alkyl substituted with amino, said compounds being represented by formula (la-b-2), can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1A.
Scheme 1A
Figure imgf000050_0001
(Ia-b-2)
(Ia-b-1) (XXXVI)
In Scheme 1A, a compound of formula (la-b-1 ) is reacted with NKhaloC!.
6alkyl)phtalimide in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXVI) which can be converted into a compound of formula (la- b-2) by reaction with hydrazine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (la) wherein R3 represents optionally substituted C2-6alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (la-k), can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 1 B. Scheme 1 B
Figure imgf000051_0001
(VI)
(Ia-k)
In Scheme 1 B, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with an intermediate of formula Wi 3e wherein R3e represents optionally substituted C2-6alkynyl and W represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide. The intermediate W R3e wherein Wn represents -0-S(=0)2-CH3, can be prepared by reacting the corresponding alcohol derivative with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (la-k), wherein R3e represents C2-6alkynyl substituted with hydroxyl, said compounds being represented by formula (la-k-1 ), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1 C.
Scheme 1 C
Figure imgf000052_0001
(VIII')
Figure imgf000052_0002
(Ia-k-1)
In Scheme 1 C, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XXXVIII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIH'), which is converted into a compound of formula (la-k-1 ) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyi ammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for example tetrqahydrofuran.
Alternatively, instead of an intermediate of formula (XXXVIII), halo-C2-6alkynyl-0- Si( x)(Ry)(Rz) can also be used.
Compounds of formula (la-k), wherein R3e represents C2-6alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (la-k-2), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1 D. Scheme 1 D
Figure imgf000053_0001
(ΧΧΧΧΠ)
Figure imgf000053_0002
(Ia-k-2)
In Scheme 1 D, a compound of formula (la-k-2) is prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXXXII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. Said intermediate of formula (XXXXII) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) with W13-C2-6alkynyl-Si(CH3) 3 wherein W13 is a suitable leaving group, such as for example halogen, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (la), wherein R3 represents ethyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC . 6alkyl)2, said compounds being represented by formula (la-l), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1 E.
Scheme 1 E
Figure imgf000054_0001
(VI)
(Ia-1)
In scheme 1 E, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with di^.
6alkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N- butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile resulting in a compound of formula (la-l).
Intermediates of formula (VI) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 2.
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000054_0002
(VI)
In Scheme 2, an intermediate of formula (XII) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XI) wherein represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03, and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water. The intermediate of formula (XII) is hydrogenated in a next step to an intermediate of formula (XIII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Nickel, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran, or mixtures thereof.
Intermediates of formula (XIII) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (IV) with NH4OH in the presence of Cu20. In a next step, the intermediate of formula (XIII) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XIV) wherein W5 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 , 1 '-binaphthalenej-2,2'-diylbis[1 , 1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethyl ether or dioxane, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VI). This reaction may also be performed in the presence of Pd2(dba)3 as catalyst, Xphos as ligand, a suitable base, such as for example Cs2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. butanol.
Intermediates of formula (IV) wherein R1 is hydrogen can be converted into an intermediate of formula (IV) wherein R1 is other than hydrogen, said R1 being
represented by R1 , by reaction with W14-R1 wherein W 4 is a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Intermediates of formula (VI) can alternatively also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 3.
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000056_0001
cinimide
Figure imgf000056_0002
(VI)
In Scheme 3, an intermediate of formula (XV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 , 1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XVI). In a next step, the intermediate of formula (XVI) is reacted with P(=0)CI3 or chlorosuccinimide, optionally in the presence of a solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XVII) which is converted into an intermediate of formula (VI) by reaction with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03 or K3P04, optionally in the presence of a suitable ligand, such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether.
In the above (III) can react in its protected form,
such as for e
Figure imgf000056_0003
D' represents the ring moiety within the
D definition. The resulting protected intermediate of formula (VI) can be converted into the deprotected
Figure imgf000057_0001
intermediate by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said -C1-6alkyl-OH can be converted into -C1.6alkyl-NH2 by first reacting the -C1-6alkyl- OH with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, followed by reacting the obtained intermediate with di-tert-butyl-iminocarboxylate in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, followed by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in a suitable solvent, such as for example
dichloromethane.
Intermediates of formula (VIII) can alternatively also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 4.
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000057_0002
(VIII)
In Scheme 4, an intermediate of formula (XVII) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (VII) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XVIII). The intermediate of formula (XVIII) can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Pd2(dba)3, a suitable base, such as for example K3P04, a suitable ligand, such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxy-biphenyl, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water or mixtures thereof.
Intermediates of formula (VIM') can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 4A.
Scheme 4A
Figure imgf000058_0001
(XVIII) (Vlir)
In Scheme 4A, an intermediate of formula (XVIII) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XXXVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenylphisphine)palladium (0), and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene.
Intermediates of formula (VIM') wherein D is a ring moiety containing a nitrogen atom, as represented in Scheme 4B, can be further reacted according to the following reaction Scheme 4B.
Scheme 4B
Figure imgf000059_0001
(Vnr-b)
(Vin'-a) (VIH'-c)
Figure imgf000059_0002
(XXXXI)
In Scheme 4B, the D'N moiety represents a -D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom. Intermediates of formula (VIII') wherein D represents D'NH, said intermediates being represented by formula (Vlll'-a), can be converted into an intermediate of formula (VIN'-b) by reaction with W12-Ci-6alkyl-halo wherein W12 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide. Said intermediates of formula (Vlll'-b) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (VIH'-c) by reaction with R6 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. When in an intermediate of formula (VIH'-c) the R6 carries a hydroxyl group as in an intermediate of formula (VII !'-c-1 ), then said hydroxyl group can be protected by a suitable protective group P, such as for example -0-C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, by reaction with C .6alkyl-C(=0)-W12, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VII l'-c-2) which can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXIX) by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said intermediate of formula (XXXIX) can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXX) wherein Ru represents -S02CH3, by reaction with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, which can be converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXXI) by reaction with an intermediate of formula (X) in a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. Said intermediate of formula (XXXXI) can then be deprotected into a compound of formula (la-b-4) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize for which other D ring moieties the described reactions also apply.
Intermediates of formula (VIM') can also be reacted to prepare compounds of the present invention according to the reaction schemes as presented in Scheme 1. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize in which condition and for which definitions of R1 on the D ring moiety a protective group may be appropriate for the reactions to be carried out. For instance, a hydroxyl group within the definition of R1 may be protected with a tert. butyldimethylsilyl moiety; a NH group within the definition of R1 may be protected with a -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3 group.
It is also considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize appropriate deprotection reactions.
Compounds of formula (la) wherein R3 represents optionally substituted d^alkyl, said compounds being represented by formula (la-c), can also be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 5. Scheme 5
Figure imgf000061_0001
(Ia-c-2)
In Scheme 5, an intermediate of formula (XVII) is reacted with W6-R wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and R3d represents optionally substituted C1-6alkyl, such as for example -CH2-C3H5, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XIX). In a next step, the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) or (lll-a) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd2(dba)3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), optionally a suitable ligand, such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'- dimethoxybiphenyl, a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03 or K3P04, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether or dioxane or water. Or the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (XXXVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or toluene. Or the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D-W, wherein W
represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, iodod and the like, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, ethylmagnesium chloride, zinc chloride to generated in situ a reactive organometallic species, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with a suitable ring moiety represented by D, e.g. imidazole or 4-methylimidazole or 3-methylpyrazole or 2-methylimidazole, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0), a suitable ligand, such as for example Rac- bis (diphenylphosphino)-1 ,1 '-binaphthyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene to obtain the corresponding final compound. Or an intermediate of formula (XIX) can react with e.g. 4-(aminomethyl)piperidine, morpholine, 1 ,2,4-triazole, ethyl 4-methyl-5- imidazolecarboxylate, piperazine or a derivative thereof, e.g. 1 -(2- hydroxyethyl)piperazine or 1 -methyl-piperazine, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or sodium hydride or cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example , tetrahydrofuran, Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, or an alcohol, e.g. 1 -butanol, to obtain the corresponding final compound.
An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with 1-(triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3-boronic acid, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, tetrabutylammonium fluoride to cleave the C-silicon bond, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether, to obtain a compound of formula (la-c-2). An intermediate of formula (XIX) can react with zinc cyanide in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. The resulting intermediate of formula (IXL) can react with sodium azide and ammonium chloride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, to obtain a compound of formula (la-c-3). it is considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled person to recognize that instead of R3d, also a suitable protected form of R3d can be used.
Compounds of formula (la-c) can alternatively also be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 6.
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000063_0001
(Ia-c)
In Scheme 6, an intermediate of formula (IV) is reacted with R3d-NH2 in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, and a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '- binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], resulting in an intermediate of formula (XX) which is reacted in a next step with an intermediate of formula (XIV) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate or Pd2(dba)3 (tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or 1 , 1 '-[1 , 1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'- diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert- butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents optionally substituted Chalky!, and wherein Y is E-D and E is other than a bond, said compounds being represented by formula (lb) can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 7. Scheme 7
Figure imgf000064_0001
(XLI) (Ia-c-4)
In Scheme 7, an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D-NH2 in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene, a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (lb-1 ). Or an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D CH , in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide to obtain a compound of formula (lb-2). A compound of formula (Ib- 2) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLI) with D-W as defined above, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide and acetonitrile. The intermediate of formula (XLI) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of (XIX) with (trimethylsilyl)acetylene in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide, followed by reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XL) with potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.
methanol. The intermediate of formula (XLI) can also react with 2-(4- morpholino)ethylazide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example copper iodide, a suitable base, such as for example Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, to obtain a compound wherein E is a bond and D is 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl-1 -triazolyl. An intermediate of formula (XLI) can also react with sodium azide and formaldehyde in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example copper sulfate and sodium L ascorbate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane and acetic acid, to obtain a compound of formula (IA-c-4).
Compounds of formula (lb) can also be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 7B.
Scheme 7B
Figure imgf000066_0001
(Ib-5)
In Scheme 7B, an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with CO gaz, potassium acetate, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane. The resulting intermediate of formula (XLII) is reacted with D-(CRxRy)s-NH2 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride, to obtain a compound of formula (lb-3). The intermediate of formula (XLII) can also react with D-H in the presence of of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride to obtain a compound of formula (Ib-4). An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with NH3 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether to obtain intermediate (XLIII), which can react with D-COOH, in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride to obtain a compound of formula (lb-5).
Compounds of formula (I) wherein W is -NR3-, said compound being represented by formula (lc), and said R3 is Chalky! substituted with 5-amino-1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 8.
Figure imgf000067_0001
(XXXI)
(Ic-2)
In Scheme 8, a compound of formula (lc-1 ) is reacted with NH2-NH2 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol resulting in an
intermediate of formula (XXXI) which is then reacted in a next step with W8-CN, wherein W8 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaHC03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or dioxane. Compounds of formula (lc) wherein R3 is C1-6alkyl substituted with 3,3-dimethyl- morpholine can be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 8. A Scheme 8A
Figure imgf000068_0001
(XXXV) (Ic-4)
In Scheme 8A, a compound of formula (lc-3) is reacted with 2-amino-2-methyl-1- propanol in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXII) of which the NH2 moiety is protected by a suitable protecting group P, such as for example -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3, by reaction with for instance di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, and a suitable base, such as for example NaHC03, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXIII). In a next step, said intermediate is reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, and a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXIV) which is converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXV) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane. The intermediate of formula (XXXV) is converted into a compound of formula (lc-4) by reaction with a suitable base, such as for example Λ/,/V-diisopropylethyIamine and triethylamine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein Y represents -CR18=N-OR19, said compounds being represented by formula (Id), can be prepared as in Scheme 9.
Scheme 9
Figure imgf000069_0001
(Id-1)
In Scheme 9, an intermediate of formula (XLIV) is reacted with tributyl(1 -ethoxyvinyl)tin, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) optionally in the presence of copperiodide and a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, followed by reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XLV) with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetone. The obtained intermediate of formula (XLVI) is then reacted with R19-0-NH2 in the presence of a suitable base such as for example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, resulting in a compound of formula (ld-1 ). A preferred intermediate of formula (XLIV) is the intermediate of formula (XIX).
An intermediate of formula (XLVI) can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein E is a direct bond and D is 3-methyl-oxazole or oxazole, by reaction with 1 - methyl-1 -tosylmethyl isocyanide or tosylmethyl isocyanide, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example dipotassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol. In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein W is -C(R R )-, said compounds being represented by formula (le) can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1.
Scheme 10
Figure imgf000070_0001
(XLVII)
(XLX)
In scheme 10, a compound of formula (le-1 ) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) wherein W15 represents a suitable group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, with bis(pinacolato)diboron in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example PdCI2dppf, in the presence of a base, such as for example potassium acetate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, followed by reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XLX) with an intermediate of formula (XLIX) wherein W16 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. A compound of formula (le-1 ) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (XLVIII) in the presence of CO as a reactant, a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tricyclohexylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene.
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 10A. Scheme 10A
Figure imgf000071_0001
(LXXin) (Ie-1-1)
In scheme 10A, an intermediate of formula (LXXI) is reacted with an ethylglyoxalate solution, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol and the like, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXXII). The intermediate of formula (LXXII) is further reacted with a leaving group introducing agent, such as for example phosphorus oxychloride, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXXIII), which is further reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0), a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03, and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water, to give a compound of formula (le-1 - 1 )·
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1 1.
Figure imgf000072_0001
In Scheme 1 1 , an intermediate off ormula (XLVII) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (LI) in the presence of isopropylmagnesium chloride to prepare the magnesium chloride derivative of XLVII and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 12.
Figure imgf000072_0002
In Scheme 12, intermediates of formula (XLVII) are reacted with an intermediate of formula (LI I) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example potassium acetate, and tetrabutylammonium bromide as solid base, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, to give a compound of formula (le-3). Compounds of formula (le-3) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (LIV) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, resulting in an intermediate of formula (Llll), which can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (XIV) wherein W5 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example potassium acetate, and tetrabutylammonium bromide as solid base, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 13.
Scheme 13
NH,R'
Figure imgf000074_0001
(Ie-4)
(LVI II)
Figure imgf000074_0002
(Ie-6)
(LXI )
In Scheme 13, an intermediate of formula (LV) preferably in its salt form, e.g. HCI salt form, and (LI) are reacted with paraformaldehyde in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, then a suitable agent P-O-P to introduce a suitable protective group P, such as for example -C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3 wherein P-O-P is (CH3)3C-0-C(=0)-0-C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3 ), is added in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LVI), which is further reacted with p-toluenesulfonhydrazide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, to give an intermediate of formula (LVII). The intermediate of formula (LVII) is then further reacted with an intermediate of formula (XLVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), a suitable ligand, such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2',4',6'-tri-isopropyl-1 ,1 '-biphenyl a suitable base, such as for example lithium tert-butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LVI II), the E and Z isomers of which can be separated by appropriate separation techniques such as column chromatography. The intermediate of formula (LVI II) can then be converted into a compound of formula (le-4) by deprotection in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol. A compound of formula (le-5) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LX) with p- toluenesulfonhydrazide in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example diethylether and water, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LIX), the E and Z isomers of which can be separated by appropriate separation techniques such as column chromatography. The intermediate of formula (LIX) can then be reacted with an intermediate of formula (XLVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), a suitable ligand, such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2',4',6'-tri-isopropyl-1 ,1 '-biphenyl a suitable base, such as for example lithium tert-butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (le-5). A compound of formula (le-6) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXI) with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example diisobutylaluminium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. The intermediate of formula (LXI) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XLVII) with an intermediate of formula (LXII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tri-o-tolylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 14.
Scheme 14
Figure imgf000076_0001
(LXffl) (Ie-4)
In Scheme 14, a compound of formula (le-6) is reacted with a leaving group introducing agent, such as for example methanesulfonyl chloride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, resulting in an an intermediate of formula (LXIII) wherein W17 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, which is then further reacted with NHR11 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, to give a compound of formula (le-4).
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 15.
Scheme 15
Figure imgf000077_0001
In Scheme 15, a compound of formula (le-7) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXI) with magnesium in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran and an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. A compound of formula (le- 8) is prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (LXIV) with potassium cyanide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide. The intermediate of formula (LXIV) is prepared by reacting a compound of formula (le-9) with methanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for eample triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. (le-9) can be prepared by reduction of (le-6) for example using LiAIH4, in an aprotic solvent such as THF. The intermediate of formula (LXIV) is converted into a compound of formula (le- 10) by reaction with HR9 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 16. Scheme 16
Figure imgf000078_0001
(LXV) (Ie-1 1 )
In Scheme 16, a compound of formula (le-1 ) is reacted with trimethylsulphoxonium iodide in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium tert butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethoxymethane and dimethylsulfoxide resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXV), which can be converted into a compound of formula (Ie-1 1 ) by reaction with NHR10R11 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol and the like.
Compounds of formula (le) can also be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 17.
Scheme 17
Figure imgf000079_0001
(Ie-12)
In Scheme 17, an intermediate of formula (XIV) as defined above, and (LXVI) wherein P represents a suitable protective group as defined above, is reacted with butyllithium in hexane in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran, diethylether or mixtures thereof resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXVII), which is further reacted with p-toluenesulfonhydrazide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, to give an intermediate of formula (LXVIII). The intermediate of formula (LXVIII) is then further reacted with an intermediate of formula (XLVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0), a suitable ligand, such as for example 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2',4',6'-tri-isopropyl-1 ,1 '-biphenyl, a suitable base, such as for example lithium tert-butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in an intermediate of formula (LXIX). The intermediate of formula (LXIX) is then converted into an intermediate of formula (LXX) by hydrogenation in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium on charcoal, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol. The intermediate of formula (LXX) can then be converted into a compound of formula (le-12) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
As already shown above, compounds of formula (I) or some of the above-described intermediates can be prepared by deprotecting the corresponding protected compounds. Other protection-deprotection reactions are shown in the following reaction Scheme 18.
Scheme 18
Figure imgf000081_0001
NHR4R5 NR4R5
C(=0)
6alkyl
Figure imgf000081_0002
In Scheme 18, the Y'N moiety represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydroxy^. 6alkyl can be prepared by deprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXVI) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran (step 2). Intermediates of formula (XXVI) can be prepared by reacting a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 is hydrogen with an intermediate of formula (XXIV) wherein Wg represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example -Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or
Figure imgf000082_0001
, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile (step 1 ). Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents Chalky! substituted with -C(=0)-R6 wherein R6 is an appropriate nitrogen containing ring linked to the C(=0) moiety via the nitrogen atom can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXIX) with an intermediate of formula (XXI) in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as, 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI (step 5). Intermediates of formula (XXIX) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXVIII) with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or water (step 4). Intermediates of formula (XXVIII) can be prepared by as depicted in step 3 with an intermediate of formula (XXVII) wherein W9 is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Step 6 depicts the preparation of compounds of formula (I) starting from an intermediate of formula (XXIX) by reaction with NHR4R5 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Further protection-deprotection reactions can also be used as outlined in the following reaction Scheme 19.
Scheme 19
alkyl
Figure imgf000083_0001
(VI-P2)
Figure imgf000083_0002
Figure imgf000083_0003
In Scheme 19, the following reaction conditions apply:
1 ; in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
2 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether.
3 : in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (ll)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 , 1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether.
4 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
5 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.
6 : in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
7 : in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art to recognize in which condition and on which part of the molecule a protective group may be appropriate. For instance, protective group on the R1 substituent or on the D moiety, or protective group on the R3 substituent or on the R2 substituent or combinations thereof. The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize ible protective group, such as for example -C(=0)-0-C1.4alkyl or
Figure imgf000084_0001
or O- Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or -CH2-0-CH2CH2-0-CH3 or -CH2-0-CH2-CH2-Si(CH3) 3. The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize the most feasible deprotection reaction conditions, such as for example suitable acids, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid, hydrochloric acid, or suitable salts, such as for example tetrabutylammonium fluoride. Reference herefore is also made to the examples described in the Experimental Part hereinafter.
The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize that when R1 represents C(=0)-morpholinyl, said R1 can be prepared from -C(=0)-NH-CH2-CH2-0-CH2-CH2-0- S02-4-methylphenyl, in the presence of sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide. Or that when R1 represents -NH-C(=0)- morpholinyl, said R1 can be prepared from -NH-C(=0)-0-C(CH3)3 in the presence of morpholine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.Or that when R1 represents hydroxylCi_6alkyl, e.g. -CH2-CH2-OH, said R1 can be prepared from the corresponding alkoxycarbonyl intermediate, e.g. -CH2-C(=0)-0-CH2-CH3, in the presence of Dibal-H 1 M in hexane, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
The present invention also comprises deuterated compounds. These deuterated compounds may be prepared by using the appropriate deuterated intermediates during the synthesis process. For instance an intermediate of formula (IV-a) nverted into an intermediate of formula (IV-b)
Figure imgf000085_0001
reactjon wjtn iodomethane-D3 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile. The compounds of formula (I) may also be converted into each other via art-known reactions or functional group transformations.
For instance, compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents tetrahydropyranyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent monohaloalkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C^alkyl substituted with a ring moiety as defined hereinabove by the intermediate of formula (XXI) and linked to the C1-6alkyl moiety by the nitrogen atom, by reaction with an intermediate of formula (XXI) optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or K2C03 or sodium hydride, and optionally in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represents Cvealkyl-OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent Ci_6alkyl-F by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane and in the presence of catalytic amounts of an alcohol, such as for example ethanol. Likewise, a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent d. 6alkyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R or R3 represent C^alkyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with F, by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C -6alkyl substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with
Figure imgf000086_0001
can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C1-6alkyi substituted with R6 or R9 wherein said R6 or R9 is substituted with -CH2-OH, by reaction with LiAIH4 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with 1 ,3-dioxo-2H- isoindol-2-yl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci.
6alkyl substituted with amino, by reaction with hydrazine monohydrate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent Ci_6alkyl substituted with amino, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represents C -6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000086_0002
in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R or R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent C^alkyl substituted with NR4R5 or NR10R11, by reaction with NHR4R5 or NHR10R11, either using such amino in large excess or in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile, N,N-dimethylacetamide or 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents polyhalod-galkyl or polyhydroxyC -6alkyl or C1-6alkyl or -S(=0)2-NR 4R15 or -S(=0)2-C .6alkyl, by reaction with polyhaloC1-6alkyl- W or polyhydroxyCLealkyl-W or C^alkyl-W or W-S(=0)2-NR1 R15 or W-S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or K2C03 or triethylamine or 4-dimethylamino-pyridine or diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile or dichloromethane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents d-ealkyl-OH, by reaction with W-C-i. 6alkyl-0-Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide and, then followed by a reaction with a suitable desilylating agent such as tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen, can also be converted into compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents ethyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, by reaction with Ci_6alkyl-vinylsulfone, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or by reaction with C1-6alkyl-2-bromoethylsulfone in the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethyformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R represents -CH2-CHOH-CH2 - y , by reaction
Figure imgf000087_0001
with in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide, wherein
Figure imgf000087_0002
represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition of R .
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents d-6alkyl substituted with R6 wherein said R6 is substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl or -S(=0)2-NR14R15 or wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1- 6alkyl or -S(=0)2-NR14R15, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 is unsubstituted, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example HCI and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane, acetonitrile or an alcohol, e.g.
isopropylalcohol. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents Ci-6alkyl substituted with R6 wherein said R6 is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with -CH2-OH or wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with -CH2-OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 is unsubstituted, by reaction with sodium hydroxide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C^alkyl substituted with R6 or R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with R9, wherein said R6 or said R9 is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R6 or said R9 is substituted with C1-6alkyl, by reaction with W-C^alkyl wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base. Such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 or R3 represent hydroxyCi-6alkyl, can be converted into the corresponding carbonyl compound, by reaction with dess-Martin- periodinane, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example
dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R6 or R3 represents C^alkyl substituted with R9, wherein said R6 or said R9 is substituted with d. 6alkyl-halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein said R6 or said R9 is substituted with C^alkyl-CN, by reaction with sodium cyanide, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example water or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R6 wherein said R6 is unsubstituted or wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with R9 wherein said R9 is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R6 or R9 is substituted with -CH3 or -CH(CH3)2, by reaction with formaldehyde or acetone and NaBH3CN, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R contains a R6 substituent substituted with OH or wherein R3 contains a R9 substituent substituted with OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with C1-6alkyloxy, by reaction with
Figure imgf000088_0001
in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 contains a R6 substituent substituted with Ci, 6alkyloxy or wherein R3 contains a R9 substituent substituted with Ci_6alkyloxy, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with -OH by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloric acid. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 contains a R6 substituent substituted with halo or wherein R3 contains a R9 substituent substituted with halo can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R6 or R9 substituent is substituted with -NR14R15 by reaction with NHR14R15 in a suitable sovent, such as for example 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1. 6alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with COOH, by reaction with LiOH in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C -6alkyl substituted with COOH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NH2 or -C(=0)-
NHCH3 or -C(=O)NR10R11, by reaction with NH(Si(CH3)3)2 or MeNH3 +CI" or NHR10R11 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCI and 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine and a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethane or Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with COOH, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-N(CH3)(OCH3) by reaction with methylmethoxyamine, in the presence of carbonyldiimidazole and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R represents C^alkyl substituted with ? ^> , can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C -6alkyl substituted with 2 OH's, by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water. These compounds of formula (I) wherein R represents C1-6alkyl substituted with ? ^> , can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with OH and NR10R11, by reaction with NH2R10R11 optionally in salt form, such as for example
NHR10R11+CI", optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or Na2C03 or triethylamine, a suitable additive such as for example Kl, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-3alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-d- 6alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-3alkyl substituted with -C(CH3)2-OH, by reaction with iodomethane and Mg powder, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example diethylether or tetrahydrofuran. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci„5alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1- 6alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -OH, by reaction with LiAIH4 in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-5alkyl substituted with -OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C salkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl by reaction with CI-C(=0)-C1 -6alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents -CH2-CH=CH2, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents -CH2-CHOH-CH2-OH, by reaction with potassium permanganate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetone or water. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C^alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1. 4alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(C -4alkyl)=N-OH, by reaction with hydroxylamine, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NH2, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C -6aikyl substituted with -NH-C(=0)-R6 or with -NH-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl or with -NH-C(=0)-polyhydroxyC1.6alkyl or with -NH-C(=0)-polyhaloC1-6alkyl or with -NH-C(=0)-polyhydroxypolyhaloC1.6alkyl, by reaction with the corresponding COOH analogue, e.g. R6-COOH or CF3-C(CH3)(OH)- COOH and the like, in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1 - hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1 -(3-dimethylamino)propyl)carbodiimide optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NH2, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NH-
C(=0)-CF3, by reaction with trifluoroacetic anhydride, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NH2, can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with -NH-polyhaloC1-6alkyl, e.g. -NH-CH2-CH2-F, by reaction with poIyhaloCi-6alkyl-W, with W as defined above, e.g. iodo-2-fluoroethane, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or dioxane.
Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NH2 can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C -6alkyl substituted with -NH-R6 or -N(R6)2 wherein R6 represents for example oxetane, by reaction with the appropriate R6 in the presence of a suitable reducing agent, such as for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1 ,2-dichloroethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with cyano, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with tetrazolyl by reaction with sodium azide, and NH4 +CI" in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represent -CH2-C≡CH t can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents
Figure imgf000091_0001
; by reaction with ethyl azidoacetate in the presence of Cul and a suitable base, such as for example diisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetraydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents -CH2-C≡CH _ can De converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3
Figure imgf000091_0002
by reaction with sodium azide and formaldehyde, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example CuS04 and sodium L ascorbate, a suitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represent C2.6alkynyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, by reaction with W-R9 wherein W is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable co- catalyst such as Cul, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises R9 substituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises R9 substituted with - NR14R15 by reaction with NHR14R15 in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2-6alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2-6alkyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium on charcoal, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2.6alkynyl, can be hydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises C2-6alkenyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Lindlar catalyst, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylacetate.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C^alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC . 6alkyl)2 can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents d-galkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 by reaction with bromotrimethylsilane in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein the R9 substituent is substituted with =0, can be converted into the corresponding reduced R9 substituent by reaction with a suitable reducing agent, such as for example LiAIH4 in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises -NHR10 can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 comprises -NR10-(C=O)-optionaliy substituted d.
6alkyl, by reaction with the corresponding W-(C=0)-optionally substituted Chalky! wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R3 represents Ci_6alkyl substituted with NR10(benzyl) can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R3 represents C1-6alkyl substituted with NHR10, by reaction with 1 -chloroethylchloroformate in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents unsubstituted piperidine, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R1 represents 1-methyl-piperidine, by reaction with iodomethane in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R1 represents hydrogen can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R represents optionally substituted C -6alkyl, by reaction with optionally substituted Ci.6alkyl-W wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents halo, e.g. bromo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R2 represents cyano, by reaction with zinc cyanide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example Pd2(dba)3 and a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 -bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Said R2 substituent being cyano can be converted into -CH2-NH2 by hydrogenation in the presence of NH3 and Nickel.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents -OCH3 can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents -OH by reaction with boron tribromide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents -OH can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents -OCH3 by reaction with methyl iodine in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.
Compounds of formula (I) wherein R2 represents hydrogen, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R2 represents -CHOH-CF3 by reaction with
trifluoroacetaldehyde methyl hemiketal.
For the conversion reactions, reference is also made to the examples described in the Experimental Part hereinafter. A further aspect of the invention is a process for the preparation of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein, which process comprises:
(i) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXX) wherein P represents a suitable protective group, such as for example a butyloxycarbonyl-group ( -C02C(CH3)3) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid;
Figure imgf000093_0001
(XXX) or (ii) the reaction of a compound of the formula (IX) or (IX'):
Figure imgf000094_0001
(IX) : Ru is -0-(S=0)2-CH3
(IX') : Ru is CI or a protected form thereof, with an appropriately substituted amine or a reactive derivative thereof, such as for example NHR10R11 (X), NHR10P (X-a) or Η_Ι^ (XXI), for example in a sealed vessel, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride and/or in the presence or absence of a solvent such as acetonitrile, N,N- dimethylformamide or Ν,Ν-dimethylacetamide; or the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI):
Figure imgf000094_0002
or a protected form thereof, with a compound of formula We-C^alkyl- R^P wherein P represents a suitable protective group and W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, e.g. N,N- dimethylformamide or Ν,Ν-dimethylacetamide, followed by removing P and optionally removing any further protecting group present; or
(iv) the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI):
Figure imgf000094_0003
or a protected thereof, with a compound of formula We-C^ealkyl-NHR10 wherein W6 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, e.g. Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide;
(v) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXVI)
Figure imgf000095_0001
(XXXVI)
with hydrazine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;
(vi) the reaction of a compound of formula (IX-1 ) wherein Ru represents -0-S(=0)2 CH3,
RU
I
Cr6alkyl
YNYV D + NHR10R"
(X)
(IX-1 )
with an intermediate of formula (X) in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile; (vii) the reaction of a compound of formula (VI)
Figure imgf000095_0002
(VI)
with an intermediate of formula Wi R3b wherein R3b represents optionally substituted C2. 6alkynyl and Wn represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or -0-S(=0)2-CH3, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide;
(viii) the reaction of a compound of formula (VIII') wherein Rx and Ry represent d. 4alkyl, and Rz represent Ci-4alkyl or phenyl,
Figure imgf000096_0001
(vii )
with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran; deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXII)
Figure imgf000096_0002
(XXXXII)
in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like; (ix) the reaction of a compound of formula (VI)
Figure imgf000096_0003
(VI)
with di(Ci_6alkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile; (x) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXI) wherein the D'N moiety represents a D moiety wherein the D moiety contains a nitrogen atom
p
NR10RU I „ ,
I C,-6alk l
C,-6alkyl /
(XXXXI)
in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like;
(xi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XIX) with a compound of formula (III) or (lll-a)
Figure imgf000097_0001
(III) (III-a)
(XIX)
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd2(dba)3 (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2',6'-dimethoxybiphenyl, a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03 or K3P04, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether or dioxane or water;
(xi-1 ) the reaction of a compound of formula (XIX) with a compound of formula
Figure imgf000097_0002
(XXXVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and a suitable solvent, such as for example Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide or toluene.
(xi-2) the reaction of a compound of formula (XIX) with D-W, wherein W represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, iodod and the like,
Figure imgf000098_0001
(XIX)
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, ethylmagnesium chloride, zinc chloride to generated in situ a reactive organometallic species, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.
(xii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XX) wherein R3a represents optionally substituted Chalky!, with a compound of formula (XIV)
Figure imgf000098_0002
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate or Pd2(dba)3 (tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand such as for example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or 1 , 1 '-[1 , 1 '-binaphthalene]- 2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert- butoxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether; (xiii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXI)
Figure imgf000098_0003
(XXXI) with W8-CN, wherein W8 represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaHC03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water or dioxane; (xiv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXV)
Figure imgf000099_0001
(XXXV)
with a suitable base, such as for example A/Jv-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol;
(xv) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXVI) wherein P represents a suitable protective group such as for example -0-Si(CH3)2(C(CH3)3) or
Figure imgf000099_0002
, and wherein Y'N represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom
O-P
I
Cr6alkyl
Figure imgf000099_0003
(XXVI)
in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCI or trifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran;
(xvi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXIX) wherein Y'N represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom, with a compound of formula (XXI)
Figure imgf000100_0001
(XXIX)
in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as, 1 -hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI; (xvii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXIX) wherein Y'N represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom
OH
C(=0)
C 6alkyl
Figure imgf000100_0002
(XXIX)
with NHR4R5 in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as 1-hydroxy- benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide HCI and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example
dichloromethane;
(xviii) reacting the below compound
Figure imgf000100_0003
with NHR7R8 in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;
(xviii) deprotecting the below compound
Figure imgf000100_0004
in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;
(xix) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLI) with D-W
Figure imgf000101_0001
(XLI)
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable base, such for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N- dimethylformamide and acetonitrile;
(xx) the reaction of a compound of formula (XIX) with D-NH2
Figure imgf000101_0002
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example (tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such as for example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5- bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene, a suitable base, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane;
(xxi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XIX) with D CH
Figure imgf000101_0003
in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide (xxii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLII) with D-H
Figure imgf000102_0001
in the presence of of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride
(xxiii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLII) with D-(CRxRy)s-NH2
Figure imgf000102_0002
in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride, (xxiv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLIII) with D-COOH
Figure imgf000102_0003
in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example 1 -(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylene chloride
(xxv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLVI) with R19-0-NH2
Figure imgf000103_0001
(XLVI)
in the presence of a suitable base such as for example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, (xxvi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLVII) with a compound of formula
Figure imgf000103_0002
in the presence of CO as a reactant, a suitable catalyst, such as for example
palladium(ll)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for example tricyclohexylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene
(xxvii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XLX) with a compound of formula (XLIX) wherein W16 represents a suitable leaving group such as for example halo, e.g. bromo
Figure imgf000103_0003
in the presence of a catalyst, such as for example
dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable base, such as for example Na2C03, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran wherein the variables are as defined herein; and optionally thereafter converting one compound of the formula (I) into another compound of the formula (I). A further embodiment is a process for synthesis of a compound of formula (VI) wherein:
Figure imgf000104_0001
(VI) 1 ) a compound of formula (II) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example
tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0) or palladium (II) acetate , a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate, a suitable ligand, such as for example
triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether and water; wherein and W2, each independently represent a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro or bromo; and then 2) a compound of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or Cs2C03, a suitable ligand, such as for example 1 ,1 '-[1 ,1 '-binaphthalene]-2,2'-diylbis[1 ,1 -diphenylphosphine], and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water; wherein optionally the intermediate of formula (II) wherein is chloro and W2 is bromo is prepared by reacting 7-bromo-2(1 H)-quinoxalinone with phosphorus oxychloride, or alternatively with thionyl chloride and Ν,Ν-dimethylformamide in a suitable solvent, such as, for example toluene; or vice versa, wherein a compound of formula (II) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) first and then reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) using the methods described above. In a further embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate. In one embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate of formula described above. In another embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate of formula (VI) or formula (IX).
In one embodiment, the present invention also relates to a compound having the following formula :
Figure imgf000105_0001
or
Figure imgf000105_0002
E' represents -(CR22R23)n-, C2-4alkenediyl optionally substituted with R22, C2-4alkynediyl optionally substituted with R 2z2, -CO
Figure imgf000105_0003
wherein Y, D, R2 and n are as defined for a compound of formula (I) above.
Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts, Solvates or Derivatives thereof
In this section, as in all other sections of this application, unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) include references to all other sub-groups, preferences, embodiments and examples thereof as defined herein. Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound also includes ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof, for example, as discussed below; preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or isomers or N-oxides or solvates thereof; and more preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers or solvates or protected forms thereof, even more preferably the salts or tautomers or solvates thereof. Many compounds of the formula (I) can exist in the form of salts, for example acid addition salts or, in certain cases salts of organic and inorganic bases such as carboxylate, sulphonate and phosphate salts. All such salts are within the scope of this invention, and references to compounds of the formula (I) include the salt forms of the compounds. It will be appreciated that references to "derivatives" include references to ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof.
According to one aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt, tautomer, N-oxide or solvate thereof. According to a further aspect of the invention there is provided a compound as defined herein or a salt or solvate thereof. References to compounds of the formula (I) and sub-groups thereof as defined herein include within their scope the salts or solvates or tautomers or N-oxides of the compounds.
The salt forms of the compounds of the invention are typically pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts," J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1 - 19. However, salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable may also be prepared as intermediate forms which may then be converted into pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Such non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts forms, which may be useful, for example, in the purification or separation of the compounds of the invention, also form part of the invention. The salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods such as methods described in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, P. Heinrich Stahl (Editor), Camille G. Wermuth (Editor), ISBN: 3-90639-026-8, Hardcover, 388 pages, August 2002. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used. The compounds of the invention may exist as mono- or di-salts depending upon the pKa of the acid from which the salt is formed.
Acid addition salts may be formed with a wide variety of acids, both inorganic and organic. Examples of acid addition salts include salts formed with an acid selected from the group consisting of acetic, 2,2-dichloroacetic, adipic, alginic, ascorbic (e.g. L- ascorbic), L-aspartic, benzenesulphonic, benzoic, 4-acetamidobenzoic, butanoic, (+) camphoric, camphor-sulphonic, (+)-(1 S)-camphor-10-sulphonic, capric, caproic, caprylic, cinnamic, citric, cyclamic, dodecylsulphuric, ethane-1 ,2-disulphonic, ethanesulphonic, 2- hydroxyethanesulphonic, formic, fumaric, galactaric, gentisic, glucoheptonic, D-gluconic, glucuronic (e.g. D-glucuronic), glutamic (e.g. L-glutamic), a-oxoglutaric, glycolic, hippuric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, isethionic, lactic (e.g. (+)-L-lactic, (±)-DL- lactic), lactobionic, maleic, malic, (-)-L-malic, malonic, (±)-DL-mandelic,
methanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic (e.g.naphthalene-2-sulphonic), naphthalene- 1 ,5-disulphonic, 1-hydroxy-2-naphthoic, nicotinic, nitric, oleic, orotic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, phosphoric, propionic, L-pyroglutamic, pyruvic, salicylic, 4-amino-salicylic, sebacic, stearic, succinic, sulphuric, tannic, (+)-L-tartaric, thiocyanic, toluenesulphonic (e.g. p-toluenesulphonic), undecylenic and valeric acids, as well as acylated amino acids and cation exchange resins.
One particular group of salts consists of salts formed from acetic, hydrochloric, hydriodic, phosphoric, nitric, sulphuric, citric, lactic, succinic, maleic, malic, isethionic, fumaric, benzenesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic (mesylate), ethanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic, valeric, acetic, propanoic, butanoic, malonic, glucuronic and lactobionic acids. Another group of acid addition salts includes salts formed from acetic, adipic, ascorbic, aspartic, citric, DL-Lactic, fumaric, gluconic, glucuronic, hippuric, hydrochloric, glutamic, DL-malic, methanesulphonic, sebacic, stearic, succinic and tartaric acids.
If the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may be anionic (e.g., -COOH may be -COO"), then a salt may be formed with a suitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but are not limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na+ and K+, alkaline earth metal cations such as Ca2+ and Mg2+, and other cations such as Al3+. Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to, ammonium ion (i.e., NH4 +) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH3R+, NH2R2 +, NHR3 +, NR4 +).
Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derived from:
ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine, butylamine,
ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine, benzylamine,
phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, as well as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a common quaternary ammonium ion is N(CH3)4 +.
Where the compounds of the formula (I) contain an amine function, these may form quaternary ammonium salts, for example by reaction with an alkylating agent according to methods well known to the skilled person. Such quaternary ammonium compounds are within the scope of formula (I). Compounds of the formula (I) containing an amine function may also form N-oxides. A reference herein to a compound of the formula (I) that contains an amine function also includes the N-oxide. Where a compound contains several amine functions, one or more than one nitrogen atom may be oxidised to form an N-oxide. Particular examples of N-oxides are the N-oxides of a tertiary amine or a nitrogen atom of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle. N-Oxides can be formed by treatment of the corresponding amine with an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or a per-acid (e.g. a peroxycarboxylic acid), see for example Advanced Organic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4th Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages. More particularly, N-oxides can be made by the procedure of L. W. Deady (Syn. Comm.
(1977), 7, 509-514) in which the amine compound is reacted with m- chloroperoxybenzoic acid (MCPBA), for example, in an inert solvent such as
dichloromethane. The compounds of the invention may form solvates, for example with water (i.e., hydrates) or common organic solvents. As used herein, the term "solvate" means a physical association of the compounds of the present invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. The term "solvate" is intended to encompass both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid or ethanolamine and the like. The compounds of the invention may exert their biological effects whilst they are in solution.
Solvates are well known in pharmaceutical chemistry. They can be important to the processes for the preparation of a substance (e.g. in relation to their purification, the storage of the substance (e.g. its stability) and the ease of handling of the substance and are often formed as part of the isolation or purification stages of a chemical synthesis. A person skilled in the art can determine by means of standard and long used techniques whether a hydrate or other solvate has formed by the isolation conditions or purification conditions used to prepare a given compound. Examples of such techniques include thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), X-ray crystallography (e.g. single crystal X-ray crystallography or X- ray powder diffraction) and Solid State NMR (SS-NMR, also known as Magic Angle Spinning NMR or MAS-NMR). Such techniques are as much a part of the standard analytical toolkit of the skilled chemist as NMR, IR, HPLC and MS. Alternatively the skilled person can deliberately form a solvate using crystallisation conditions that include an amount of the solvent required for the particular solvate. Thereafter the standard methods described above, can be used to establish whether solvates had formed. Also encompassed by formula (I) are any complexes (e.g. inclusion complexes or clathrates with compounds such as cyclodextrins, or complexes with metals) of the compounds.
Furthermore, the compounds of the present invention may have one or more polymorph (crystalline) or amorphous forms and as such are intended to be included in the scope of the invention. Compounds of the formula (I) may exist in a number of different geometric isomeric, and tautomeric forms and references to compounds of the formula (I) include all such forms. For the avoidance of doubt, where a compound can exist in one of several geometric isomeric or tautomeric forms and only one is specifically described or shown, all others are nevertheless embraced by formula (I). Other examples of tautomeric forms include, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms, as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol (illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol,
amidine/enediamines, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, and nitro/aci-nitro.
Figure imgf000110_0001
keto enol enolate
Where compounds of the formula (I) contain one or more chiral centres, and can exist in the form of two or more optical isomers, references to compounds of the formula (I) include all optical isomeric forms thereof (e.g. enantiomers, epimers and
diastereoisomers), either as individual optical isomers, or mixtures (e.g. racemic mixtures) of two or more optical isomers, unless the context requires otherwise. The optical isomers may be characterised and identified by their optical activity (i.e. as + and - isomers, or d and / isomers) or they may be characterised in terms of their absolute stereochemistry using the "R and S" nomenclature developed by Cahn, Ingold and Prelog, see Advanced Organic Chemistry by Jerry March, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992, pages 109-1 14, and see also Cahn, Ingold & Prelog (1966) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 5, 385-415. Optical isomers can be separated by a number of techniques including chiral chromatography (chromatography on a chiral support) and such techniques are well known to the person skilled in the art. As an alternative to chiral chromatography, optical isomers can be separated by forming diastereoisomeric salts with chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid, (-)-pyroglutamic acid, (- )-di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelic acid, (-)-malic acid, and (-)-camphorsulphonic, separating the diastereoisomers by preferential crystallisation, and then dissociating the salts to give the individual enantiomer of the free base.
The invention includes all isomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, either pure isomeric forms or as a mixture of two or more isomeric forms.
Where compounds of the formula (I) exist as two or more optical isomeric forms, one enantiomer in a pair of enantiomers may exhibit advantages over the other enantiomer, for example, in terms of biological activity. Thus, in certain circumstances, it may be desirable to use as a therapeutic agent only one of a pair of enantiomers, or only one of a plurality of diastereoisomers. Accordingly, the invention provides compositions containing a compound of the formula (I) having one or more chiral centres, wherein at least 55% (e.g. at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95%) of the compound of the formula (I) is present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). In one general embodiment, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the formula (I) may be present as a single optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). When a specific isomeric form is identified (e.g. S configuration, or E isomer), this means that said isomeric form is substantially free of the other isomer(s), i.e. said isomeric form is present in at least 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the total amount of the compound of the invention. The compounds of the invention include compounds with one or more isotopic substitutions, and a reference to a particular element includes within its scope all isotopes of the element. For example, a reference to hydrogen includes within its scope 1H, 2H (D), and 3H (T). Similarly, references to carbon and oxygen include within their scope respectively 12C, 13C and 14C and 160 and 80. The isotopes may be radioactive or non-radioactive. In one embodiment of the invention, the compounds contain no radioactive isotopes. Such compounds are preferred for therapeutic use. In another embodiment, however, the compound may contain one or more radioisotopes.
Compounds containing such radioisotopes may be useful in a diagnostic context. Esters such as carboxylic acid esters and acyloxy esters of the compounds of formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group are also embraced by formula (I). In one embodiment of the invention, formula (I) includes within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. In another embodiment of the invention, formula (I) does not include within its scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. Examples of esters are compounds containing the group -C(=0)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, for example, a C1-6 alkyl group, a heterocyclyl group, or a C5.20 aryl group, preferably a d-6 alkyl group. Particular examples of ester groups include, but are not limited to, -C(=0)OCH3, -C(=0)OCH2CH3, -C(=0)OC(CH3)3, and -C(=0)OPh.
Examples of acyloxy (reverse ester) groups are represented by -OC(=0)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent, for example, a C1-7 alkyl group, a C3.2o heterocyclyl group, or a C5-20 aryl group, preferably a C1-7 alkyl group. Particular examples of acyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, -OC(=0)CH3 (acetoxy), -OC(=0)CH2CH3,
-OC(=0)C(CH3)3, -OC(=0)Ph, and -OC(=0)CH2Ph. For example, some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., a physiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester). By "prodrugs" is meant for example any compound that is converted in vivo into a biologically active compound of the formula (I). During metabolism, the ester group (-C(=0)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug. Such esters may be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylic acid groups (-C(=0)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate, prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parent compound, followed by deprotection if required.
Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those of the formula -C(=0)OR wherein R is: C -6alkyl (e.g., -Me, -Et, -nPr, -iPr, -nBu, -sBu, -iBu, -tBu); C^aminoalkyl [e.g., aminoethyl; 2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl; 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl); and acyloxy- C1-7alkyl [e.g., acyloxymethyl; acyloxyethyl; pivaloyloxymethyl; acetoxymethyl;
1 -acetoxyethyl; 1 -(1-methoxy-1 -methyl)ethyl-carbonyloxyethyl; 1 -(benzoyloxy)ethyl; isopropoxy-carbonyloxymethyl; 1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyl- carbonyloxymethyl; 1 -cyclohexyl-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxymethyl; 1 - cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy) carbonyloxymethyl; 1-(4- tetrahydropyranyloxy)carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxymethyl; and 1 -(4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxyethyl]. Also, some prodrugs are activated
enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compound which, upon further chemical reaction, yields the active compound (for example, as in antigen-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (ADEPT), gene-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (GDEPT) and ligand-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (LIDEPT) etc.). For example, the prodrug may be a sugar derivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid ester derivative.
Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK)
The compounds of the invention described herein inhibit or modulate the activity of certain tyrosine kinases, and thus the compounds will be useful in the treatment or prophylaxis, in particular the treatment, of disease states or conditions mediated by those tyrosine kinases, in particular FGFR.
FGFR The fibroblast growth factor (FGF) family of protein tyrosine kinase (PTK) receptors regulates a diverse array of physiologic functions including mitogenesis, wound healing, cell differentiation and angiogenesis, and development. Both normal and malignant cell growth as well as proliferation are affected by changes in local concentration of FGFs, extracellular signalling molecules which act as autocrine as well as paracrine factors. Autocrine FGF signalling may be particularly important in the progression of steroid hormone-dependent cancers to a hormone independent state. FGFs and their receptors are expressed at increased levels in several tissues and cell lines and overexpression is believed to contribute to the malignant phenotype. Furthermore, a number of oncogenes are homologues of genes encoding growth factor receptors, and there is a potential for aberrant activation of FGF-dependent signalling in human pancreatic cancer (Knights et al., Pharmacology and Therapeutics 2010 125:1 (105-1 17); Korc M. et al Current Cancer Drug Targets 2009 9:5 (639-651 )). The two prototypic members are acidic fibroblast growth factor (aFGF or FGF1 ) and basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF or FGF2), and to date, at least twenty distinct FGF family members have been identified. The cellular response to FGFs is transmitted via four types of high affinity transmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase fibroblast growth factor receptors (FGFR) numbered 1 to 4 (FGFR1 to FGFR4).
Disruption of the FGFR1 pathway should affect tumor cell proliferation since this kinase is activated in many tumor types in addition to proliferating endothelial cells. The over- expression and activation of FGFR1 in tumor- associated vasculature has suggested a role for these molecules in tumor angiogenesis. A recent study has shown a link between FGFR1 expression and tumorigenicity in
Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC). CLCs account for 10-15% of all breast cancers and, in general, lack p53 and Her2 expression whilst retaining expression of the oestrogen receptor. A gene amplification of 8p12-p1 1.2 was demonstrated in -50% of CLC cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1 , or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway. Rhabdomyosarcoma (RMS) is the most common pediatric soft tissue sarcoma likely results from abnormal proliferation and differentiation during skeletal myogenesis. FGFR1 is over-expressed in primary rhabdomyosarcoma tumors and is associated with hypomethylation of a 5' CpG island and abnormal expression of the AKT1 , NOG, and BMP4 genes. FGFR1 has also been linked to squamous lung cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer.
Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 has high affinity for the acidic and/or basic fibroblast growth factors, as well as the keratinocyte growth factor ligands. Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 also propagates the potent osteogenic effects of FGFs during osteoblast growth and differentiation. Mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2, leading to complex functional alterations, were shown to induce abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), implying a major role of FGFR signalling in intramembranous bone formation. For example, in Apert (AP) syndrome, characterized by premature cranial suture ossification, most cases are associated with point mutations engendering gain-of-function in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2. In addition, mutation screening in patients with syndromic craniosynostoses indicates that a number of recurrent FGFR2 mutations accounts for severe forms of Pfeiffer syndrome. Particular mutations of FGFR2 include W290C, D321A, Y340C, C342R, C342S, C342W, N549H, K641 R in FGFR2.
Several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development, including Apert, Crouzon, Jackson-Weiss, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrata, and Pfeiffer syndromes are associated with the occurrence of mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2. Most, if not all, cases of Pfeiffer Syndrome (PS) are also caused by de novo mutation of the fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 gene, and it was recently shown that mutations in fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 break one of the cardinal rules governing ligand specificity. Namely, two mutant splice forms of fibroblast growth factor receptor, FGFR2c and FGFR2b, have acquired the ability to bind to and be activated by atypical FGF ligands. This loss of ligand specificity leads to aberrant signalling and suggests that the severe phenotypes of these disease syndromes result from ectopic ligand-dependent activation of fibroblast growth factor receptor 2.
Genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations result in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors. Such abnormalities are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas and in bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas. Accordingly, FGFR3 inhibitors would be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, bladder and cervical carcinomas. FGFR3 is also over-expressed in bladder cancer, in particular invasive bladder cancer. FGFR3 is frequently activated by mutation in urothelial carcinoma (UC). Increased expression was associated with mutation (85% of mutant tumors showed high-level expression) but also 42% of tumors with no detectable mutation showed over-expression, including many muscle-invasive tumors. FGFR3 is also linked to endometrial and thyroid cancer.
Over expression of FGFR4 has been linked to poor prognosis in both prostate and thyroid carcinomas. In addition a germline polymorphism (Gly388Arg) is associated with increased incidence of lung, breast, colon, liver (HCC) and prostate cancers. In addition, a truncated form of FGFR4 (including the kinase domain) has also been found to be present in 40% of pituitary tumours but not present in normal tissue. FGFR4
overexpression has been observed in liver, colon and lung tumours. FGFR4 has been implicated in colorectal and liver cancer where expression of its ligand FGF19 is frequently elevated. FGFR4 is also linked to astrocytomas, rhabdomyosarcoma. Fibrotic conditions are a major medical problem resulting from abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue. This occurs in many diseases, including liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. The mechanisms of pathological fibrosis are not fully understood but are thought to result from the actions of various cytokines (including tumor necrosis factor (TNF), fibroblast growth factors (FGF's), platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) and transforming growth factor beta. (TGFp) involved in the proliferation of fibroblasts and the deposition of extracellular matrix proteins (including collagen and fibronectin). This results in alteration of tissue structure and function and subsequent pathology.
A number of preclinical studies have demonstrated the up-regulation of fibroblast growth factors in preclinical models of lung fibrosis. TGFpi and PDGF have been reported to be involved in the fibrogenic process and further published work suggests the elevation of FGF's and consequent increase in fibroblast proliferation, may be in response to elevated TGFpi . The potential therapeutic benefit of targeting the fibrotic mechanism in conditions such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) is suggested by the reported clinical effect of the anti-fibrotic agent pirfenidone . Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (also referred to as Cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis) is a progressive condition involving scarring of the lung. Gradually, the air sacs of the lungs become replaced by fibrotic tissue, which becomes thicker, causing an irreversible loss of the tissue's ability to transfer oxygen into the bloodstream. The symptoms of the condition include shortness of breath, chronic dry coughing, fatigue, chest pain and loss of appetite resulting in rapid weight loss. The condition is extremely serious with approximately 50% mortality after 5 years.
As such, the compounds which inhibit FGFR will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis in tumours, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers. In particular tumours with activating mutants of receptor tyrosine kinases or upregulation of receptor tyrosine kinases may be particularly sensitive to the inhibitors. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with RTK inhibitors particularly beneficial.
Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGFR)
Chronic proliferative diseases are often accompanied by profound angiogenesis, which can contribute to or maintain an inflammatory and/or proliferative state, or which leads to tissue destruction through the invasive proliferation of blood vessels. .
Angiogenesis is generally used to describe the development of new or replacement blood vessels, or neovascularisation. It is a necessary and physiological normal process by which vasculature is established in the embryo. Angiogenesis does not occur, in general, in most normal adult tissues, exceptions being sites of ovulation, menses and wound healing. Many diseases, however, are characterized by persistent and unregulated angiogenesis. For instance, in arthritis, new capillary blood vessels invade the joint and destroy cartilage. In diabetes (and in many different eye diseases), new vessels invade the macula or retina or other ocular structures, and may cause blindness. The process of atherosclerosis has been linked to angiogenesis. Tumor growth and metastasis have been found to be angiogenesis-dependent.
The recognition of the involvement of angiogenesis in major diseases has been accompanied by research to identify and develop inhibitors of angiogenesis. These inhibitors are generally classified in response to discrete targets in the angiogenesis cascade, such as activation of endothelial cells by an angiogenic signal; synthesis and release of degradative enzymes; endothelial cell migration; proliferation of endothelial cells; and formation of capillary tubules. Therefore, angiogenesis occurs in many stages and attempts are underway to discover and develop compounds that work to block angiogenesis at these various stages.
There are publications that teach that inhibitors of angiogenesis, working by diverse mechanisms, are beneficial in diseases such as cancer and metastasis, ocular diseases, arthritis and hemangioma.
Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), a polypeptide, is mitogenic for endothelial cells in vitro and stimulates angiogenic responses in vivo. VEGF has also been linked to inappropriate angiogenesis. VEGFR(s) are protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs). PTKs catalyze the phosphorylation of specific tyrosine residues in proteins involved in cell function thus regulating cell growth, survival and differentiation.
Three PTK receptors for VEGF have been identified: VEGFR-1 (Flt-1 ) ; VEGFR-2 (Flk-1 or KDR) and VEGFR-3 (Flt-4). These receptors are involved in angiogenesis and participate in signal transduction. Of particular interest is VEGFR-2, which is a transmembrane receptor PTK expressed primarily in endothelial cells. Activation of VEGFR-2 by VEGF is a critical step in the signal transduction pathway that initiates tumour angiogenesis. VEGF expression may be constitutive to tumour cells and can also be upregulated in response to certain stimuli. One such stimuli is hypoxia, where VEGF expression is upregulated in both tumour and associated host tissues. The VEGF ligand activates VEGFR-2 by binding with its extracellular VEGF binding site. This leads to receptor dimerization of VEGFRs and autophosphorylation of tyrosine residues at the intracellular kinase domain of VEGFR- 2. The kinase domain operates to transfer a phosphate from ATP to the tyrosine residues, thus providing binding sites for signalling proteins downstream of VEGFR-2 leading ultimately to initiation of angiogenesis. Inhibition at the kinase domain binding site of VEGFR-2 would block phosphorylation of tyrosine residues and serve to disrupt initiation of angiogenesis. Angiogenesis is a physiologic process of new blood vessel formation mediated by various cytokines called angiogenic factors. Although its potential pathophysiologic role in solid tumors has been extensively studied for more than 3 decades, enhancement of angiogenesis in chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and other malignant hematological disorders has been recognized more recently. An increased level of angiogenesis has been documented by various experimental methods both in bone marrow and lymph nodes of patients with CLL. Although the role of angiogenesis in the pathophysiology of this disease remains to be fully elucidated, experimental data suggest that several angiogenic factors play a role in the disease progression. Biologic markers of angiogenesis were also shown to be of prognostic relevance in CLL. This indicates that VEGFR inhibitors may also be of benefit for patients with leukemia's such as CLL.
In order for a tumour mass to get beyond a critical size, it must develop an associated vasculature. It has been proposed that targeting a tumor vasculature would limit tumor expansion and could be a useful cancer therapy. Observations of tumor growth have indicated that small tumour masses can persist in a tissue without any tumour-specific vasculature. The growth arrest of nonvascularized tumors has been attributed to the effects of hypoxia at the center of the tumor. More recently, a variety of proangiogenic and antiangiogenic factors have been identified and have led to the concept of the "angiogenic switch," a process in which disruption of the normal ratio of angiogenic stimuli and inhibitors in a tumor mass allows for autonomous vascularization. The angiogenic switch appears to be governed by the same genetic alterations that drive malignant conversion: the activation of oncogenes and the loss of tumour suppressor genes. Several growth factors act as positive regulators of angiogenesis. Foremost among these are vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF), and angiogenin. Proteins such as thrombospondin (Tsp-1 ), angiostatin, and endostatin function as negative regulators of angiogenesis.
Inhibition of VEGFR2 but not VEGFR1 markedly disrupts angiogenic switching, persistent angiogenesis, and initial tumor growth in a mouse model. In late-stage tumors, phenotypic resistance to VEGFR2 blockade emerged, as tumors regrew during treatment after an initial period of growth suppression. This resistance to VEGF blockade involves reactivation of tumour angiogenesis, independent of VEGF and associated with hypoxia-mediated induction of other proangiogenic factors, including members of the FGF family. These other proangiogenic signals are functionally implicated in the revascularization and regrowth of tumours in the evasion phase, as FGF blockade impairs progression in the face of VEGF inhibition.
There is evidence for normalization of glioblastoma blood vessels in patients treated with a pan-VEGF receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor, AZD2171 , in a phase 2 study. MRI determination of vessel normalization in combination with circulating biomarkers provides for an effective means to assess response to antiangiogenic agents.
PDGFR
A malignant tumour is the product of uncontrolled cell proliferation. Cell growth is controlled by a delicate balance between growth-promoting and growth-inhibiting factors. In normal tissue the production and activity of these factors results in
differentiated cells growing in a controlled and regulated manner that maintains the normal integrity and functioning of the organ. The malignant cell has evaded this control; the natural balance is disturbed (via a variety of mechanisms) and unregulated, aberrant cell growth occurs. A growth factor of importance in tumour development is the platelet- derived growth factor (PDGF) that comprises a family of peptide growth factors that signal through cell surface tyrosine kinase receptors (PDGFR) and stimulate various cellular functions including growth, proliferation, and differentiation.
Advantages of a selective inhibitor
Development of FGFR kinase inhibitors with a differentiated selectivity profile provides a new opportunity to use these targeted agents in patient sub-groups whose disease is driven by FGFR deregulation. Compounds that exhibit reduced inhibitory action on additional kinases, particularly VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta, offer the opportunity to have a differentiated side-effect or toxicity profile and as such allow for a more effective treatment of these indications. Inhibitors of VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta are associated with toxicities such as hypertension or oedema respectively. In the case of VEGFR2 inhibitors this hypertensive effect is often dose limiting, may be contraindicated in certain patient populations and requires clinical management.
Biological Activity and Therapeutic Uses
The compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, have fibroblast growth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity and/or vascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and/or platelet derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and which will be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions described herein. In addition the compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, will be useful in preventing or treating diseases or condition mediated by the kinases. References to the preventing or prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition such as cancer include within their scope alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.
As used herein, the term "modulation", as applied to the activity of a kinase, is intended to define a change in the level of biological activity of the protein kinase. Thus, modulation encompasses physiological changes which effect an increase or decrease in the relevant protein kinase activity. In the latter case, the modulation may be described as "inhibition". The modulation may arise directly or indirectly, and may be mediated by any mechanism and at any physiological level, including for example at the level of gene expression (including for example transcription, translation and/or post-translational modification), at the level of expression of genes encoding regulatory elements which act directly or indirectly on the levels of kinase activity. Thus, modulation may imply elevated/suppressed expression or over- or under-expression of a kinase, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and/or increased or decreased expression by a transcriptional effect, as well as hyper- (or hypo-)activity and (de)activation of the protein kinase(s) (including (de)activation) by mutation(s). The terms "modulated", "modulating" and "modulate" are to be interpreted accordingly.
As used herein, the term "mediated", as used e.g. in conjunction with a kinase as described herein (and applied for example to various physiological processes, diseases, states, conditions, therapies, treatments or interventions) is intended to operate limitatively so that the various processes, diseases, states, conditions, treatments and interventions to which the term is applied are those in which the kinase plays a biological role. In cases where the term is applied to a disease, state or condition, the biological role played by a kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the manifestation of the symptoms of the disease, state or condition (or its aetiology or progression). Thus, kinase activity (and in particular aberrant levels of kinase activity, e.g. kinase over-expression) need not necessarily be the proximal cause of the disease, state or condition: rather, it is contemplated that the kinase mediated diseases, states or conditions include those having multifactorial aetiologies and complex progressions in which the kinase in question is only partially involved. In cases where the term is applied to treatment, prophylaxis or intervention, the role played by the kinase may be direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for the operation of the treatment, prophylaxis or outcome of the intervention. Thus, a disease state or condition mediated by a kinase includes the development of resistance to any particular cancer drug or treatment.
Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.
More particularly, the compounds of the formulae (I) and sub-groups thereof are inhibitors of FGFRs. For example, compounds of the invention have activity against FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, and/or FGFR4, and in particular FGFRs selected from
FGFR1 , FGFR2 and FGFR3; or in particular the compounds of formula (I) and subgroups thereof are inhibitors of FGFR4.
Preferred compounds are compounds that inhibit one or more FGFR selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, and FGFR4. Preferred compounds of the invention are those having IC50 values of less than 0.1 μΜ.
Compounds of the invention also have activity against VEGFR.
In addition many of the compounds of the invention exhibit selectivity for the FGFR 1 , 2, and/or 3, and/or 4 compared to VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR and such compounds represent one preferred embodiment of the invention. In particular, the compounds exhibit selectivity over VEGFR2. For example, many compounds of the invention have IC50 values against FGFR1 , 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 that are between a tenth and a hundredth of the IC50 against VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2) and/or PDGFR B. In particular preferred compounds of the invention have at least 10 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. More preferably the compounds of the invention have at least 100 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. This can be determined using the methods described herein.
As a consequence of their activity in modulating or inhibiting FGFR, and/or VEGFR kinases, the compounds will be useful in providing a means of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis of neoplasias, particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipated that the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventing proliferative disorders such as cancers. In addition, the compounds of the invention could be useful in the treatment of diseases in which there is a disorder of proliferation, apoptosis or differentiation.
In particular tumours with activating mutants of VEGFR or upregulation of VEGFR and patients with elevated levels of serum lactate dehydrogenase may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms of the specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial. For example, VEGFR
overexpression in acute leukemia cells where the clonal progenitor may express VEGFR. Also, particular tumours with activating mutants or upregulation or
overexpression of any of the isoforms of FGFR such as FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of the invention and thus patients as discussed herein with such particular tumours may also find treatment with the compounds of the invention particularly beneficial. It may be preferred that the treatment is related to or directed at a mutated form of one of the receptor tyrosine kinases, such as discussed herein. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH.
Examples of cancers which may be treated (or inhibited) include, but are not limited to, a carcinoma, for example a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinoma and colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung (for example adenocarcinoma, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung carcinomas, squamous lung cancer), oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas (e.g. exocrine pancreatic carcinoma), stomach, gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer (e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours), cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin (for example squamous cell carcinoma or dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans); pituitary cancer, a hematopoietic tumour of lymphoid lineage, for example leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, B-cell lymphoma (e.g. diffuse large B-cell lymphoma), T-cell lymphoma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, hairy cell lymphoma, or Burkett's lymphoma; a hematopoietic tumour of myeloid lineage, for example leukemias, acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), myeloproliferative disorder, myeloproliferative syndrome, myelodysplasia syndrome, or promyelocytic leukemia; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; hepatocellular cancer, a tumour of mesenchymal origin (e.g. Ewing's sarcoma), for example fibrosarcoma or rhabdomyosarcoma; a tumour of the central or peripheral nervous system, for example astrocytoma, neuroblastoma, glioma (such as glioblastoma multiforme) or schwannoma; melanoma; seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma; thyroid follicular cancer; or Kaposi's sarcoma. In particular, squamous lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer, gastric cancer, hepatocellular cancer, cervix cancer, multiple myeloma, bladder cancer, endometrial cancer, urothelial cancer, colon cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, pituitary gland cancer. Certain cancers are resistant to treatment with particular drugs. This can be due to the type of the tumour or can arise due to treatment with the compound. In this regard, references to multiple myeloma includes bortezomib sensitive multiple myeloma or refractory multiple myeloma. Similarly, references to chronic myelogenous leukemia includes imitanib sensitive chronic myelogenous leukemia and refractory chronic myelogenous leukemia. Chronic myelogenous leukemia is also known as chronic myeloid leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia or CML. Likewise, acute myelogenous leukemia, is also called acute myelobiastic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocytic leukaemia or AML. The compounds of the invention can also be used in the treatment of hematopoetic diseases of abnormal cell proliferation whether pre-malignant or stable such as myeloproliferative diseases. Myeloproliferative diseases ("MPD"s) are a group of diseases of the bone marrow in which excess cells are produced. They are related to, and may evolve into, myelodysplasia syndrome. Myeloproliferative diseases include polycythemia vera, essential thrombocythemia and primary myelofibrosis. A further haematological disorder is hypereosinophilic syndrome. T-cell lymphoproliferative diseases include those derived from natural Killer cells. In addition the compounds of the invention can be used to gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer e.g. gastrointestinal stromal tumours. Gastrointestinal cancer refers to malignant conditions of the gastrointestinal tract, including the esophagus, stomach, liver, biliary system, pancreas, bowels, and anus. Thus, in the pharmaceutical compositions, uses or methods of this invention for treating a disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth, the disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth in one embodiment is a cancer.
Particular subsets of cancers include multiple myeloma, bladder, cervical, prostate and thyroid carcinomas, lung, breast, and colon cancers.
A further subset of cancers includes multiple myeloma, bladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas. The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of breast cancer in particular Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC).
As the compounds of the invention have FGFR4 activity they will also be useful in the treatment of prostate or pituitary cancers, or they will be useful in the treatment of breast cancer, lung cancer, prostate cancer, liver cancer (HCC) or lung cancer.
In particular the compounds of the invention as FGFR inhibitors, are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, myeloproliferatoive disorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer, gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.
Further subsets of cancer are multiple myeloma, endometrial cancer, bladder cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer and thyroid carcinomas.
In particular the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma (in particular multiple myeloma with t(4;14) translocation or overexpressing FGFR3), prostate cancer (hormone refractory prostrate carcinomas), endometrial cancer (in particular endometrial tumours with activating mutations in FGFR2) and breast cancer (in particular lobular breast cancer).
In particular the compounds are useful in the treatment of lobular carcinomas such as CLC (Classic lobular carcinoma).
As the compounds have activity against FGFR3 they will be useful in the treatment of multiple myeloma and bladder cancer. In particular the compounds are useful for the treatment of t(4;14) translocation positive multiple myeloma.
In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of sarcoma. In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, e.g.
squamous cell carcinoma.
As the compounds have activity against FGFR2 they will be useful in the treatment of endometrial, ovarian, gastric, hepatocellular, uterine, cervix and colorectal cancers. FGFR2 is also overexpressed in epithelial ovarian cancer, therefore the compounds of the invention may be specifically useful in treating ovarian cancer such as epithelial ovarian cancer. In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lung cancer, in particular NSCLC, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer, kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer. In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer such as NSCLC, breast cancer, gastric cancer,and liver cancer (HCC (hepatocellular cancer)).
Compounds of the invention may also be useful in the treatment of tumours pre-treated with VEGFR2 inhibitor or VEGFR2 antibody (e.g. Avastin).
In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2- resistant tumours. VEGFR2 inhibitors and antibodies are used in the treatment of thyroid and renal cell carcinomas, therefore the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of VEGFR2-resistant thyroid and renal cell carcinomas.
The cancers may be cancers which are sensitive to inhibition of any one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2, FGFR3, FGFR4, for example, one or more FGFRs selected from FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3.
Whether or not a particular cancer is one which is sensitive to inhibition of FGFR or VEGFR signalling may be determined by means of a cell growth assay as set out below or by a method as set out in the section headed "Methods of Diagnosis". The compounds of the invention, and in particular those compounds having FGFR, or VEGFR inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of cancers of a type associated with or characterised by the presence of elevated levels of FGFR, or VEGFR, for example the cancers referred to in this context in the introductory section of this application.
The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the adult population. The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatment of the pediatric population. It has been discovered that some FGFR inhibitors can be used in combination with other anticancer agents. For example, it may be beneficial to combine an inhibitor that induces apoptosis with another agent which acts via a different mechanism to regulate cell growth thus treating two of the characteristic features of cancer development.
Examples of such combinations are set out below.
The compounds of the invention may be useful in treating other conditions which result from disorders in proliferation such as type II or non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, autoimmune diseases, head trauma, stroke, epilepsy, neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, motor neurone disease, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration and Pick's disease for example autoimmune diseases and
neurodegenerative diseases.
One sub-group of disease states and conditions that the compounds of the invention may be useful consists of inflammatory diseases, cardiovascular diseases and wound healing.
FGFR, and VEGFR are also known to play a role in apoptosis, angiogenesis, proliferation, differentiation and transcription and therefore the compounds of the invention could also be useful in the treatment of the following diseases other than cancer; chronic inflammatory diseases, for example systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, autoimmune diabetes mellitus, Eczema hypersensitivity reactions, asthma, COPD, rhinitis, and upper respiratory tract disease; cardiovascular diseases for example cardiac hypertrophy, restenosis, atherosclerosis; neurodegenerative disorders, for example Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotropic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atropy and cerebellar degeneration; glomerulonephritis; myelodysplastic syndromes, ischemic injury associated myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia,
atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, haematological diseases, for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia; degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system, for example, osteoporosis and arthritis, aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain. In addition, mutations of FGFR2 are associated with several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development and thus the compounds of invention could be useful in the treatment of abnormalities in human skeletal development, including abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.
The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention of the skeletal diseases. Particular skeletal diseases are achondroplasia or thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).
The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention in
pathologies in which progressive fibrosis is a symptom. Fibrotic conditions in which the compounds of the inventions may be useful in the treatment of include diseases exhibiting abnormal or excessive deposition of fibrous tissue for example in liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. In particular the compounds of the inventions may also be useful in the treatment of lung fibrosis in particular in idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis.
The over-expression and activation of FGFR and VEGFR in tumor- associated vasculature has also suggested a role for compounds of the invention in preventing and disrupting initiation of tumor angiogenesis. In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatment of cancer, metastasis, leukemia's such as CLL, ocular diseases such as age-related macular degeneration in particular wet form of age-related macular degeneration, ischemic proliferative retinopathies such as retinopathy of prematurity (ROP) and diabetic retinopathy, rheumatoid arthritis and hemangioma.
The activity of the compounds of the invention as inhibitors of FGFR1 -4, VEGFR and/or PDGFR A/B can be measured using the assays set forth in the examples below and the level of activity exhibited by a given compound can be defined in terms of the IC50 value. Preferred compounds of the present invention are compounds having an IC50 value of less than 1 Μ, more preferably less than 0.1 μΜ.
The invention provides compounds that have FGFR inhibiting or modulating activity, and which may be useful in preventing or treating disease states or conditions mediated by FGFR kinases.
In one embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in therapy, for use as a medicine. In a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular in the treatment, of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase.
Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful in alleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer. Therefore, in a further embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of FGFR-dependent cancer. In one embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer mediated by FGFR kinases.
Accordingly, the invention provides inter alia:
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition
mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method of inhibiting a FGFR kinase, which method comprises contacting the kinase with a kinase-inhibiting compound of the formula (I) as defined herein. - A method of modulating a cellular process (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase using a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a modulator of a cellular process (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.
- A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis or
treatment of cancer, in particular the treatment of cancer.
- A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a modulator (e.g.
inhibitor) of FGFR.
- The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, the compound having the formula (I) as defined herein.
- The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein.
- The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer.
- The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) the activity of FGFR.
- Use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein in the manufacture of a
medicament for modulating a cellular process (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.
- The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).
- The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a cancer, the cancer being one which is characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4). - The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 kinase.
- The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient who has been diagnosed as forming part of a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 kinase.
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease or condition
characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or reducing the
incidence of) cancer in a patient suffering from or suspected of suffering from cancer; which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to determine whether the patient possesses a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 gene; and (ii) where the patient does possess the said variant, thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR3 kinase inhibiting activity.
- A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or reducing the
incidence of) a disease state or condition characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4); which method comprises (i) subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4) and (ii) where the diagnostic test is indicative of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase, thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR kinase inhibiting activity.
In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a oncology related disease (e.g. cancer). In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a non-oncology related disease (e.g. any disease disclosed herein excluding cancer). In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a condition described herein. In one embodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a skeletal condition described herein. Particular abnormalities in human skeletal development, include abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weiss syndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, Pfeiffer syndrome, achondroplasia and thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoric dysplasia).
Mutated Kinases
Drug resistant kinase mutations can arise in patient populations treated with kinase inhibitors. These occur, in part, in the regions of the protein that bind to or interact with the particular inhibitor used in therapy. Such mutations reduce or increase the capacity of the inhibitor to bind to and inhibit the kinase in question. This can occur at any of the amino acid residues which interact with the inhibitor or are important for supporting the binding of said inhibitor to the target. An inhibitor that binds to a target kinase without requiring the interaction with the mutated amino acid residue will likely be unaffected by the mutation and will remain an effective inhibitor of the enzyme.
A study in gastric cancer patient samples showed the presence of two mutations in FGFR2, Ser167Pro in exon Ilia and a splice site mutation 940-2A-G in exon lllc. These mutations are identical to the germline activating mutations that cause craniosynotosis syndromes and were observed in 13% of primary gastric cancer tissues studied. In addition activating mutations in FGFR3 were observed in 5% of the patient samples tested and overexpression of FGFRs has been correlated with a poor prognosis in this patient group.
In addition there are chromosomal translocations or point mutations that have been observed in FGFR which give rise to gain-of-function, over-expressed, or constitutively active biological states. The compounds of the invention would therefore find particular application in relation to cancers which express a mutated molecular target such as FGFR. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR and FISH. It has been suggested that mutations of a conserved threonine residue at the ATP binding site of FGFR would result in inhibitor resistance. The amino acid valine 561 has been mutated to a methionine in FGFR1 which corresponds to previously reported mutations found in Abl (T315) and EGFR (T766) that have been shown to confer resistance to selective inhibitors. Assay data for FGFR1 V561 M showed that this mutation conferred resistance to a tyrosine kinase inhibitor compared to that of the wild type.
Methods of Diagnosis
Prior to administration of a compound of the formula (I), a patient may be screened to determine whether a disease or condition from which the patient is or may be suffering is one which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR, and/or VEGFR.
For example, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed to determine whether a condition or disease, such as cancer, that the patient is or may be suffering from is one which is characterised by a genetic abnormality or abnormal protein expression which leads to up-regulation of the levels or activity of FGFR, and/or VEGFR or to sensitisation of a pathway to normal FGFR, and/or VEGFR activity, or to upregulation of these growth factor signalling pathways such as growth factor ligand levels or growth factor ligand activity or to upregulation of a biochemical pathway downstream of FGFR, and/or VEGFR activation.
Examples of such abnormalities that result in activation or sensitisation of the FGFR, and/or VEGFR signal include loss of, or inhibition of apoptotic pathways, up-regulation of the receptors or ligands, or presence of mutant variants of the receptors or ligands e.g PTK variants. Tumours with mutants of FGFR1 , FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 or upregulation, in particular over-expression of FGFR1 , or gain-of-function mutants of FGFR2 or FGFR3 may be particularly sensitive to FGFR inhibitors. For example, point mutations engendering gain-of-function in FGFR2 have been identified in a number of conditions. In particular activating mutations in FGFR2 have been identified in 10% of endometrial tumours. In addition, genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such as chromosomal translocations or point mutations resulting in ectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors have been identified and are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas, bladder and cervical carcinomas. A particular mutation T674I of the PDGF receptor has been identified in imatinib-treated patients. In addition, a gene amplification of 8p12-p11 .2 was demonstrated in -50% of lobular breast cancer (CLC) cases and this was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1 , or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway.
Alternatively, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed for loss of a negative regulator or suppressor of FGFR or VEGFR. In the present context, the term "loss" embraces the deletion of a gene encoding the regulator or suppressor, the truncation of the gene (for example by mutation), the truncation of the transcribed product of the gene, or the inactivation of the transcribed product (e.g. by point mutation) or sequestration by another gene product.
The term up-regulation includes elevated expression or over-expression, including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and increased expression by a transcriptional effect, and hyperactivity and activation, including activation by mutations. Thus, the patient may be subjected to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic of up- regulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term diagnosis includes screening. By marker we include genetic markers including, for example, the measurement of DNA
composition to identify mutations of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term marker also includes markers which are characteristic of up regulation of FGFR and/or VEGFR, including enzyme activity, enzyme levels, enzyme state (e.g. phosphorylated or not) and mRNA levels of the aforementioned proteins. The diagnostic tests and screens are typically conducted on a biological sample selected from tumour biopsy samples, blood samples (isolation and enrichment of shed tumour cells), stool biopsies, sputum, chromosome analysis, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, buccal spears, biopsy or urine. Methods of identification and analysis of mutations and up-regulation of proteins are known to a person skilled in the art. Screening methods could include, but are not limited to, standard methods such as reverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) or in-situ hybridization such as fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH).
Identification of an individual carrying a mutation in FGFR, and /or VEGFR may mean that the patient would be particularly suitable for treatment with a FGFR, and /or VEGFR inhibitor. Tumours may preferentially be screened for presence of a FGFR, and /or VEGFR variant prior to treatment. The screening process will typically involve direct sequencing, oligonucleotide microarray analysis, or a mutant specific antibody. In addition, diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RT-PCR and FISH.
In addition, mutant forms of, for example FGFR or VEGFR2, can be identified by direct sequencing of, for example, tumour biopsies using PCR and methods to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbefore described. The skilled artisan will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of the over expression, activation or mutations of the aforementioned proteins could be applicable in the present case. In screening by RT-PCR, the level of mRNA in the tumour is assessed by creating a cDNA copy of the mRNA followed by amplification of the cDNA by PCR. Methods of PCR amplification, the selection of primers, and conditions for amplification, are known to a person skilled in the art. Nucleic acid manipulations and PCR are carried out by standard methods, as described for example in Ausubel, F.M. et a/., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., or Innis, M.A. et a/., eds. (1990) PCR Protocols: a guide to methods and applications, Academic Press, San Diego. Reactions and manipulations involving nucleic acid techniques are also described in Sambrook et a/., (2001 ), 3rd Ed, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. Alternatively a commercially available kit for RT- PCR (for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals) may be used, or methodology as set forth in United States patents 4,666,828; 4,683,202; 4,801 ,531 ; 5,192,659, 5,272,057, 5,882,864, and 6,218,529 and incorporated herein by reference. An example of an in- situ hybridisation technique for assessing mRNA expression would be fluorescence in- situ hybridisation (FISH) (see Angerer (1987) Meth. Enzymol., 152: 649). Generally, in situ hybridization comprises the following major steps: (1 ) fixation of tissue to be analyzed; (2) prehybridization treatment of the sample to increase accessibility of target nucleic acid, and to reduce nonspecific binding; (3) hybridization of the mixture of nucleic acids to the nucleic acid in the biological structure or tissue; (4) post- hybridization washes to remove nucleic acid fragments not bound in the hybridization, and (5) detection of the hybridized nucleic acid fragments. The probes used in such applications are typically labelled, for example, with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters. Preferred probes are sufficiently long, for example, from about 50, 100, or 200 nucleotides to about 1000 or more nucleotides, to enable specific hybridization with the target nucleic acid(s) under stringent conditions. Standard methods for carrying out FISH are described in Ausubel, F.M. et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc and Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization: Technical Overview by John M. S. Bartlett in Molecular Diagnosis of Cancer, Methods and Protocols, 2nd ed.; ISBN: 1-59259-760-2; March 2004, pps. 077-088; Series: Methods in Molecular Medicine.
Methods for gene expression profiling are described by (DePrimo et al. (2003), BMC Cancer, 3:3). Briefly, the protocol is as follows: double-stranded cDNA is synthesized from total RNA Using a (dT)24 oligomer for priming first-strand cDNA synthesis, followed by second strand cDNA synthesis with random hexamer primers. The double-stranded cDNA is used as a template for in vitro transcription of cRNA using biotinylated ribonucleotides. cRNA is chemically fragmented according to protocols described by Affymetrix (Santa Clara, CA, USA), and then hybridized overnight on Human Genome Arrays.
Alternatively, the protein products expressed from the mRNAs may be assayed by immunohistochemistry of tumour samples, solid phase immunoassay with microtitre plates, Western blotting, 2-dimensional SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, ELISA, flow cytometry and other methods known in the art for detection of specific proteins.
Detection methods would include the use of site specific antibodies. The skilled person will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detection of upregulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR, or detection of FGFR, and/or VEGFR variants or mutants could be applicable in the present case. Abnormal levels of proteins such as FGFR or VEGFR can be measured using standard enzyme assays, for example, those assays described herein. Activation or
overexpression could also be detected in a tissue sample, for example, a tumour tissue. By measuring the tyrosine kinase activity with an assay such as that from Chemicon International. The tyrosine kinase of interest would be immunoprecipitated from the sample lysate and its activity measured.
Alternative methods for the measurement of the over expression or activation of FGFR or VEGFR including the isoforms thereof, include the measurement of microvessel density. This can for example be measured using methods described by Orre and Rogers (Int J Cancer (1999), 84(2) 101-8). Assay methods also include the use of markers, for example, in the case of VEGFR these include CD31 , CD34 and CD 05. Therefore all of these techniques could also be used to identify tumours particularly suitable for treatment with the compounds of the invention.
The compounds of the invention are particular useful in treatment of a patient having a mutated FGFR. The G697C mutation in FGFR3 is observed in 62% of oral squamous cell carcmonas and causes constitutive activation of the kinase activity. Activating mutations of FGFR3 have also been identified in bladder carcinoma cases. These mutations were of 6 kinds with varying degrees of prevelence: R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q. In addition, a Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4 has been found to be associated with increased incidence and aggressiveness of prostate, colon, lung, liver (HCC) and breast cancer.
Therefore in a further aspect the invention includes use of a compound according to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease state or condition in a patient who has been screened and has been determined as suffering from, or being at risk of suffering from, a disease or condition which would be susceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR.
Particular mutations a patient is screened for include G697C, R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q mutations in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4. In another aspect the invention includes a compound of the invention for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing a variant of the FGFR gene (for example G697C mutation in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4).
MRI determination of vessel normalization (e.g. using MRI gradient echo, spin echo, and contrast enhancement to measure blood volume, relative vessel size, and vascular permeability) in combination with circulating biomarkers (circulating progenitor cells (CPCs), CECs, SDF1 , and FGF2) may also be used to identify VEGFR2-resistant tumours for treatment with a compound of the invention.
Pharmaceutical Compositions and Combinations
In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the subject compounds may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes.
In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation) comprises at least one active compound of the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients, diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, or other materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionally other therapeutic or prophylactic agents.
To prepare the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention, an effective amount of a compound of the present invention, as the active ingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, which carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. The pharmaceutical compositions can be in any form suitable for oral, parenteral, topical, intranasal, ophthalmic, otic, rectal, intra-vaginal, or transdermal administration. These pharmaceutical compositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably, for administration orally, rectally, percutaneously, or by parenteral injection. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs and solutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of powders, pills, capsules and tablets.
Because of their ease in administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. For parenteral compositions, the carrier will usually comprise sterile water, at least in large part, though other ingredients, to aid solubility for example, may be included. Injectable solutions, for example, may be prepared in which the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucose solution. Injectable suspensions may also be prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed. In the compositions suitable for percutaneous administration, the carrier optionally comprises a penetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable wetting agent, optionally combined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions, which additives do not cause a significant deleterious effect to the skin. Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skin and/or may be helpful for preparing the desired compositions. These compositions may be
administered in various ways, e.g., as a transdermal patch, as a spot-on, as an ointment. It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.
It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient, calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.
The compound of the invention is administered in an amount sufficient to exert its anti- tumour activity.
Those skilled in the art could easily determine the effective amount from the test results presented hereinafter. In general it is contemplated that a therapeutically effective amount would be from 0.005 mg/kg to 100 mg/kg body weight, and in particular from 0.005 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight. It may be appropriate to administer the required dose as single, two, three, four or more sub-doses at appropriate intervals throughout the day. Said sub-doses may be formulated as unit dosage forms, for example, containing 0.5 to 500 mg, in particular 1 mg to 500 mg, more in particular 10 mg to 500 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.
Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical composition will preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99 % by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 70 % by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50 % by weight of the compound of the present invention, and, from 1 to 99.95 % by weight, more preferably from 30 to 99.9 % by weight, even more preferably from 50 to 99.9 % by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of the composition.
As another aspect of the present invention, a combination of a compound of the present invention with another anticancer agent is envisaged, especially for use as a medicine, more specifically for use in the treatment of cancer or related diseases.
For the treatment of the above conditions, the compounds of the invention may be advantageously employed in combination with one or more other medicinal agents, more particularly, with other anti-cancer agents or adjuvants in cancer therapy.
Examples of anti-cancer agents or adjuvants (supporting agents in the therapy) include but are not limited to:
- platinum coordination compounds for example cisplatin optionally combined with amifostine, carboplatin or oxaliplatin; taxane compounds for example paclitaxel, paclitaxel protein bound particles (Abraxane™) or docetaxel;
topoisomerase I inhibitors such as camptothecin compounds for example irinotecan, SN-38, topotecan, topotecan hcl;
topoisomerase II inhibitors such as anti-tumour epipodophyllotoxins or podophyllotoxin derivatives for example etoposide, etoposide phosphate or teniposide;
anti-tumour vinca alkaloids for example vinblastine, vincristine or vinorelbine; anti-tumour nucleoside derivatives for example 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, gemcitabine, gemcitabine hcl, capecitabine, cladribine, fludarabine, nelarabine; alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea for example cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, carmustine, thiotepa, mephalan (melphalan), lomustine, altretamine, busulfan, dacarbazine, estramustine, ifosfamide optionally in combination with mesna, pipobroman, procarbazine, streptozocin, telozolomide, uracil;
anti-tumour anthracycline derivatives for example daunorubicin, doxorubicin optionally in combination with dexrazoxane, doxil, idarubicin, mitoxantrone, epirubicin, epirubicin hcl, valrubicin;
molecules that target the IGF-1 receptor for example picropodophilin;
tetracarcin derivatives for example tetrocarcin A;
glucocorticoiden for example prednisone;
antibodies for example trastuzumab (HER2 antibody), rituximab (CD20 antibody), gemtuzumab, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, cetuximab, pertuzumab, bevacizumab, alemtuzumab, eculizumab, ibritumomab tiuxetan, nofetumomab, panitumumab, tositumomab, CNTO 328;
estrogen receptor antagonists or selective estrogen receptor modulators or inhibitors of estrogen synthesis for example tamoxifen, fulvestrant, toremifene, droloxifene, faslodex, raloxifene or letrozole;
aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane, anastrozole, letrazole, testolactone and vorozole;
differentiating agents such as retinoids, vitamin D or retinoic acid and retinoic acid metabolism blocking agents (RAMBA) for example accutane;
DNA methyl transferase inhibitors for example azacytidine or decitabine;
antifolates for example premetrexed disodium; - antibiotics for example antinomycin D, bleomycin, mitomycin C, dactinomycin, carminomycin, daunomycin, levamisole, plicamycin, mithramycin;
- antimetabolites for example clofarabine, aminopterin, cytosine arabinoside or methotrexate, azacitidine, cytarabine, floxuridine, pentostatin, thioguanine;
- apoptosis inducing agents and antiangiogenic agents such as Bcl-2 inhibitors for example YC 137, BH 312, ABT 737, gossypol, HA 14-1 , TW 37 or decanoic acid;
- tubuline-binding agents for example combrestatin, colchicines or nocodazole;
- kinase inhibitors (e.g. EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor) inhibitors, MTKI (multi target kinase inhibitors), mTOR inhibitors) for example flavoperidol, imatinib mesylate, erlotinib, gefitinib, dasatinib, lapatinib, lapatinib ditosylate, sorafenib, sunitinib, sunitinib maleate, temsirolimus;
- farnesyltransferase inhibitors for example tipifarnib;
- histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors for example sodium butyrate,
suberoylanilide hydroxamide acid (SAHA), depsipeptide (FR 901228), NVP- LAQ824, R306465, JNJ-26481585, trichostatin A, vorinostat;
- Inhibitors of the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway for example PS-341 , MLN .41 or bortezomib;
- Yondelis;
- Telomerase inhibitors for example telomestatin;
- Matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors for example batimastat, marimastat, prinostat or metastat.
Recombinant interleukins for example aldesleukin, denileukin diftitox, interferon alfa 2a, interferon alfa 2b, peginterferon alfa 2b
- MAPK inhibitors
- Retinoids for example alitretinoin, bexarotene, tretinoin
- Arsenic trioxide
- Asparaginase
- Steroids for example dromostanolone propionate, megestrol acetate, nandrolone (decanoate, phenpropionate), dexamethasone
- Gonadotropin releasing hormone agonists or antagonists for example abarelix, goserelin acetate, histrelin acetate, leuprolide acetate
Thalidomide, lenalidomide
Mercaptopurine, mitotane, pamidronate, pegademase, pegaspargase, rasburicase BH3 mimetics for example ABT-737
- MEK inhibitors for example PD98059, AZD6244, CM 040
- colony-stimulating factor analogs for example filgrastim, pegfilgrastim,
sargramostim; erythropoietin or analogues thereof (e.g. darbepoetin alfa);
interleukin 1 1 ; oprelvekin; zoledronate, zoledronic acid; fentanyl;
bisphosphonate; palifermin.
- a steroidal cytochrome P450 17alpha-hydroxylase-17,20-lyase inhibitor (CYP17), e.g. abiraterone, abiraterone acetate. The compounds of the present invention also have therapeutic applications in sensitising tumour cells for radiotherapy and chemotherapy.
Hence the compounds of the present invention can be used as "radiosensitizer" and/or "chemosensitizer" or can be given in combination with another "radiosensitizer" and/or "chemosensitizer".
The term "radiosensitizer", as used herein, is defined as a molecule, preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals in therapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of the cells to ionizing radiation and/or to promote the treatment of diseases which are treatable with ionizing radiation.
The term "chemosensitizer", as used herein, is defined as a molecule, preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals in therapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of cells to chemotherapy and/or promote the treatment of diseases which are treatable with chemotherapeutics.
Several mechanisms for the mode of action of radiosensitizers have been suggested in the literature including: hypoxic cell radiosensitizers ( e.g., 2- nitroimidazole compounds, and benzotriazine dioxide compounds) mimicking oxygen or alternatively behave like bioreductive agents under hypoxia; non-hypoxic cell radiosensitizers (e.g., halogenated pyrimidines) can be analogoues of DNA bases and preferentially incorporate into the DNA of cancer cells and thereby promote the radiation-induced breaking of DNA molecules and/or prevent the normal DNA repair mechanisms; and various other potential mechanisms of action have been hypothesized for radiosensitizers in the treatment of disease.
Many cancer treatment protocols currently employ radiosensitizers in conjunction with radiation of x-rays. Examples of x-ray activated radiosensitizers include, but are not limited to, the following: metronidazole, misonidazole, desmethylmisonidazole, pimonidazole, etanidazole, nimorazole, mitomycin C, RSU 1069, SR 4233, E09, RB 6145, nicotinamide, 5-bromodeoxyuridine (BUdR), 5- iododeoxyuridine (lUdR), bromodeoxycytidine, fluorodeoxyuridine (FudR), hydroxyurea, cisplatin, and
therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.
Photodynamic therapy (PDT) of cancers employs visible light as the radiation activator of the sensitizing agent. Examples of photodynamic radiosensitizers include the following, but are not limited to: hematoporphyrin derivatives, Photofrin, benzoporphyrin derivatives, tin etioporphyrin, pheoborbide-a, bacteriochlorophyll-a, naphthalocyanines, phthalocyanines, zinc phthalocyanine, and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.
Radiosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporation of radiosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells;
chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour with or without additional radiation; or other therapeutically effective compounds for treating cancer or other diseases.
Chemosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds, including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporation of chemosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control the flow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells;
chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour or other therapeutically effective compounds for treating cancer or other disease. Calcium antagonists, for example verapamil, are found useful in combination with antineoplastic agents to establish chemosensitivity in tumor cells resistant to accepted chemotherapeutic agents and to potentiate the efficacy of such compounds in drug-sensitive malignancies.
In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the components of the combinations according to the invention, i.e. the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes. The components may be formulated separately in individual pharmaceutical compositions or in a unitary pharmaceutical composition containing all components.
The present invention therefore also relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising the one or more other medicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention together with a pharmaceutical carrier. The present invention further relates to the use of a combination according to the invention in the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for inhibiting the growth of tumour cells.
The present invention further relates to a product containing as first active ingredient a compound according to the invention and as further active ingredient one or more anticancer agent, as a combined preparation for simultaneous, separate or sequential use in the treatment of patients suffering from cancer.
The one or more other medicinal agents and the compound according to the present invention may be administered simultaneously (e.g. in separate or unitary compositions) or sequentially in either order. In the latter case, the two or more compounds will be administered within a period and in an amount and manner that is sufficient to ensure that an advantageous or synergistic effect is achieved. It will be appreciated that the preferred method and order of administration and the respective dosage amounts and regimes for each component of the combination will depend on the particular other medicinal agent and compound of the present invention being administered, their route of administration, the particular tumour being treated and the particular host being treated. The optimum method and order of administration and the dosage amounts and regime can be readily determined by those skilled in the art using conventional methods and in view of the information set out herein.
The weight ratio of the compound according to the present invention and the one or more other anticancer agent(s) when given as a combination may be determined by the person skilled in the art. Said ratio and the exact dosage and frequency of
administration depends on the particular compound according to the invention and the other anticancer agent(s) used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of the condition being treated, the age, weight, gender, diet, time of administration and general physical condition of the particular patient, the mode of administration as well as other medication the individual may be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art. Furthermore, it is evident that the effective daily amount may be lowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subject and/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing the compounds of the instant invention. A particular weight ratio for the present compound of formula (I) and another anticancer agent may range from 1/10 to 10/1 , more in particular from 1/5 to 5/1 , even more in particular from 1/3 to 3/1.
The platinum coordination compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 500mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 50 to 400 mg/m2, particularly for cisplatin in a dosage of about 75 mg/m2 and for carboplatin in about 300mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The taxane compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 50 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 75 to 250 mg/m2, particularly for paclitaxel in a dosage of about 175 to 250 mg/m2 and for docetaxel in about 75 to 150 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The camptothecin compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 0.1 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 1 to 300 mg/m2, particularly for irinotecan in a dosage of about 100 to 350 mg/m2 and for topotecan in about 1 to 2 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti-tumour podophyllotoxin derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 30 to 300 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 50 to 250mg/m2, particularly for etoposide in a dosage of about 35 to 100 mg/m2 and for teniposide in about 50 to 250 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti-tumour vinca alkaloid is advantageously administered in a dosage of 2 to 30 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, particularly for vinblastine in a dosage of about 3 to 12 mg/m2 , for vincristine in a dosage of about 1 to 2 mg/m2 , and for vinorelbine in dosage of about 10 to 30 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti-tumour nucleoside derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 200 to 2500 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 700 to 1500 mg/m2, particularly for 5-FU in a dosage of 200 to 500mg/m2, for gemcitabine in a dosage of about 800 to 200 mg/m2 and for capecitabine in about 1000 to
2500 mg/m2 per course of treatment. The alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea is advantageously administered in a dosage of 100 to 500 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 120 to 200 mg/m2, particularly for cyclophosphamide in a dosage of about 100 to 500 mg/m2 , for chlorambucil in a dosage of about 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg, for carmustine in a dosage of about 150 to 200 mg/m2 , and for lomustine in a dosage of about 100 to 150 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The anti-tumour anthracycline derivative is advantageously administered in a dosage of 10 to 75 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, for example 15 to
60 mg/m2, particularly for doxorubicin in a dosage of about 40 to 75 mg/m2, for daunorubicin in a dosage of about 25 to 45mg/m2 , and for idarubicin in a dosage of about 10 to 15 mg/m2 per course of treatment.
The antiestrogen agent is advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 100 mg daily depending on the particular agent and the condition being treated. Tamoxifen is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of 5 to 50 mg, preferably 10 to 20 mg twice a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Toremifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60mg once a day, continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect. Anastrozole is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 1 mg once a day. Droloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 20-1 OOmg once a day. Raloxifene is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 60mg once a day. Exemestane is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 25mg once a day. Antibodies are advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, or as known in the art, if different. Trastuzumab is advantageously administered in a dosage of 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m2) of body surface area, particularly 2 to 4mg/m2 per course of treatment.
These dosages may be administered for example once, twice or more per course of treatment, which may be repeated for example every 7, 14, 21 or 28 days.
The compounds of formula (I), the pharmaceutically acceptable addition salts, in particular pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts, and stereoisomeric forms thereof can have valuable diagnostic properties in that they can be used for detecting or identifying the formation of a complex between a labelled compound and other molecules, peptides, proteins, enzymes or receptors.
The detecting or identifying methods can use compounds that are labelled with labelling agents such as radioisotopes, enzymes, fluorescent substances, luminous substances, etc. Examples of the radioisotopes include 125l, 1311, 3H and 14C. Enzymes are usually made detectable by conjugation of an appropriate substrate which, in turn catalyses a detectable reaction. Examples thereof include, for example, beta-galactosidase, beta- glucosidase, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidase and malate dehydrogenase, preferably horseradish peroxidase. The luminous substances include, for example, luminol, luminol derivatives, luciferin, aequorin and luciferase.
Biological samples can be defined as body tissue or body fluids. Examples of body fluids are cerebrospinal fluid, blood, plasma, serum, urine, sputum, saliva and the like. General Synthetic Routes
The following examples illustrate the present invention but are examples only and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims in any way.
Experimental Part
Hereinafter, the term 'r.m.' means reaction mixture(s), 'min' means minute(s), 'h' means hours, 'r.t.' means room temperature, 'aq.' means aqueous, 'ACN' means acetonitrile, 'DCM' means dichloromethane, TBAF' means tetrabutylammonium fluoride, 'K2C03' means potassium carbonate, 'MgS04' means magnesium sulphate, 'Cul' means copper (I) iodide, 'MeOH' means methanol, 'EtOH' means ethanol, 'EtOAc' means ethyl acetate, 'Et3N' means triethylamine, 'Et20' means diethyl ether, 'DIPE' means diisopropyl ether, THF' means tetrahydrofuran, 'NH4CI' means ammonium chloride, 'Pd(PPh3)4' means tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, 'NMP' means 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, 'DIPEA' means A7-ethyl-/V-(1-methylethyl)-2-propylamine, 'DMA' means N,N-dimethylacetamide, 'DMF' means Λ/,/V-dimethylformamide, 'NaH' means sodium hydride, 'Pd2(dba)3' means tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0), 'HOAc' means acetic acid, 'PPh3' means triphenylphosphine, 'ΝΗ4ΟΗ' means ammonium hydroxide, TBDMSCI' means tert- butyldimethylsilyl chloride, 'S-Phos' means dicyclohexyl(2',6'-dimethoxy[1 ,1 '-biphenyl]-2- yl)phosphine, 'Na2S04' means sodium sulfate, 'iPrOH' means 2-propanol, 't-BuOH' means 2-methyl-2-propanol, 'Κ3Ρ04' means potassium phosphate, 'MP' means melting point, 'PdCI2(PPh3)2' means dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, '18-crown-6' means 1 ,4,7,10,13, 16-Hexaoxacyclooctadecane, 'DMSO' means dimethylsulfoxyde, 'Na2C03' means sodium carbonate, 'NaHC03' means sodium bicarbonate, 'Cs2C03' means cesium carbonate, 'DMAP' means 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 'NaOtBu' means sodium tert-butoxide, 'HCI' means hydrochloric acid, TFA' means trifluoroacetic acid, 'H2S04' means sulfuric acid, 'EDCI' means 1-ethyl-3-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide monohydrochloride, 'C02' means carbon dioxyde, 'CO' means carbon monoxide, 'DPPP' means 1 ,3-propanediylbis[diphenylphosphine], 'Pd(OAc)2' means Palladium (II) acetate, 'PdCI2dppf means dichloro [1 ,1 '-bis
(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene] palladium(ll), '(±)-ΒΙΝΑΡ' means Rac- bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 ,1'-binaphthyl, 'SiOH' means bare silica, 'DSC means differential scanning calorimetry.
Celite® is diatomaceous earth.
NaH was used as 60% in mineral oil.
For a number of compounds, melting points were obtained with a Kofler hot bench, consisting of a heated plate with linear temperature gradient, a sliding pointer and a temperature scale in degrees Celsius.
For a number of compounds, melting points (m.p.) were determined with a DSC1 (Mettler-Toledo). Melting points were measured with a temperature gradient of
10 °C/minute. Maximum temperature was 350 °C. Values are peak values.
Some compounds of the present invention were obtained as salt forms or hydrates or contain some amounts of solvent. Hereinafter, these compounds are reported as determined based on elemental analysis.
A. Preparation of the intermediates
Example A1 a) Preparation of intermediate 1
Figure imgf000150_0001
A mixture of 7-Bromo-2(1 H)-quinoxalinone (25 g; 0.1 1 mol), 3,5-dimethoxyaniline (20.42 g; 0.13 mol), sodium tert-butoxide (32 g; 0.333 mol), and (±)-BINAP (6.9 g; 0.01 mol) in ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (400 mL) was degassed with N2 for 10 min. Pd(OAc)2 (2.5 g; 0.01 mol) was added and the mixture was refluxed for 5 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and the solvent was concentrated under vacuum to 150 mL. The residue was poured onto ice water (1.5 L) under stirring and EtOAc was added (100 mL). The suspension was stirred at r.t. overnight and the precipitate was filtered off, washed with water, then ACN and dried, yielding 33 g of intermediate 1.
b-1 ) Preparation of intermediate 2
Figure imgf000150_0002
Intermediate 1 (30 g; 0.1 mol) was added portionwise at r.t. to phosphorus oxychloride (415 mL). Then, the r.m. was heated at 80 °C and stirred at this temperature for 40 min. The mixture was cooled to r.t. and phosphorous oxychloride was removed under vacuum. The residue was carefully poured onto an aq. solution of K2C03. The aq. layer was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40 pm, 450 g; mobile phase, gradient from 100 % DCM to 98 % DCM, 2 % MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated, to give 22.6 g (70 %) of intermediate 2 (m.p.= 137 °C, Kofler). b-2) Intermediate 2 was alternatively also prepared using the following procedure. N-Chlorosuccinimide (1 1.23 g; 84.08 mmol) was added portionwise at r.t. to a suspension of PPh3 (22.05 g, 84.08 mmol) in dioxane (500 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 30 min. Intermediate 1 (5 g; 16.8 mmol) was added and the r.m. was refluxed for 5 h, then cooled to r.t. and basified with Et3N (10 mL) under stirring. The suspension was stirred overnight and the insoluble material was removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue (35 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40 pm, 400 g; mobile phase 100 % DCM). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 2 g (37 %) of intermediate 2. c) Preparation of intermediate 3
Figure imgf000151_0001
The following operating procedure was repeated twice on 5 g of intermediate 2. Then, the r.m. were combined for the work-up and the purification
A mixture of intermediate 2 (5 g; 15.8 mmol), 3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan- 2-yl)-pyridine (3.9 g; 19 mmol), K3P04 (8.4 g; 39.6 mmol) and S-Phos (0.65 g; 1 .6 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (180 mL) and H20 (13 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd2(dba)3 (1.45 g; 1.6 mmol) was added portionwise and the r.m. was heated overnight at 80°C.
The r.m were cooled to r.t.and combined. The resulting mixture was poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed (brine), dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm 450 g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 9.8 g (85%) of intermediate 3.
d) Preparation of intermediate 4
Figure imgf000151_0002
NaH 60% in oil (0.9 g; 22.3 mmol) was added portion wise to intermediate 3 (4 g; 1 1.2 mmol) in DMF (130 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 30 min. Then, 3-bromo-(1 - trimethylsilyl)-1-propyne (4.9 mL; 30.9 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow. The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 1 h, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated and washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45μΓη 450g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.45 g of a crude mixture containing intermediate 4 (used as such in next reaction step).
Example A2
a) Preparation of intermediate 5a
Figure imgf000152_0001
NaH (1 .48 g; 37.1 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 2 (9 g; 28.50 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The r.m. was stirred at 5 °C for 1 h, then, (3-bromopropoxy)(1 ,1 -dimethylethyl)dimethylsilane (8.58 mL; 37.1 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C under N2 flow. The r.m. was stirred for 1 h at 5°C, then allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 4 h. The reaction was poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (17.5 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 20-45 Mm, 1000 g; mobile phase 98 % DCM, 2 %
Cyclohexane). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated, yielding 13.3 g (95 %) of intermediate 5a.
Intermediate 5b
Figure imgf000152_0002
obtained by following an analogous reaction protocol as described for the preparation of intermediate 5a. (2-Bromoethoxy)- tert-butyldimethylsilane was used instead of (3-bromopropoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane as starting material.
b) Preparation of intermediate 6
Figure imgf000153_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5a (1.9 g; 4 mmol), 1 -(triisopropylsilyI)pyrrole-3-boronic acid (1 .4 g; 5.2 mmol), a 2M aq. solution of Na2C03 (8 mL; 16 mmol) in ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (60 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd(PPh3)4 (0.5 g; 0.4 mmol) was added portion wise and the r.m. was heated at 100°C for 12 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45 pm; mobile phase: 65% heptane, 35% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 g (49%) of intermediate 6.
The following intermediates were synthesized according to an analogous reaction
Figure imgf000153_0002
c) Preparation of intermediate 7
Figure imgf000154_0001
Potassium tert-butoxide (0.3 g; 2.5 mmol) and 18-crown-6 (0.06 g; 0.23 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 6 (1 g; 1.9 mmol) in DMSO (20 mL) at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 30 min and iodomethane (0.4 mL, 5.7 mmol) was added. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 1 h, poured onto ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated, yielding 1.9 g of a crude mixture containing intermediate 7 (brown oil).
Example A3
Preparation of intermediate 8
Figure imgf000154_0002
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.22 mL; 2.3 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 4 (0.6 g; 1.4 mmol) and Et3N (0.5 mL; 3.5 mmol) in DCM (12 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 30 min then 1 h at r.t.. The r.m. was poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness to afford 0.78 g (100%) of intermediate 8.
The following intermediates were synthesized according to an analogous reaction protocol: -154-
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0001
Example A4
a) Preparation of intermediate 9
Figure imgf000156_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5b (3.7 g; 7.8 mmol), 1-(Triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3-boronic acid (2.7 g; 10.1 mmol), a 2M aq. solution of Na2C03 (15.5 mL; 31 mmol) in ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (1 10 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd(PPh3)4 (1.45 g; 1.6 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 12 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 20-45 pm; mobile phase: 60% heptane, 40% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.6 g (41 %) of intermediate 9.
b) Preparation of intermediate 10
Figure imgf000157_0001
Potassium tert-butoxide (0.4 g; 3.9 mmol) and 18-crown-6 (0.1g; 0.4 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 9 (1.6 g; 3.1 mmol) in DMSO (30 mL) at r.t. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and iodomethane (0.6 mL; 9.1 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 1 h, poured onto ice and extracted (EtOAc). The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.85 g of a crude mixture containing intermediate 10 (brown oil).
Example A5
Preparation of intermediate 1 1
Figure imgf000157_0002
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.37 mL; 4.7 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 7 (0.95 g; 2.4 mmol) and Et3N (0.8 mL; 5.9 mmol) in DCM (20 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 30 min then, 1 h at r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 g (96%) of intermediate 1 1. Example A6
Preparation of intermediate 12
Figure imgf000158_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5b (1 .5 g; 3.2 mmol), 3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)-pyridine (0.7 g; 3.5 mmol), K3P04 (1.4 g; 6.4 mmol) and S-Phos (0.13 g; 0.32 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (45 mL) and H20 (15 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd2(dba)3 (0.3 g; 0.32 mmol) was added portion wise and the r.m. was heated at 80°C for 4 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 g (quantitative) of intermediate 12 which was used as such in the next reaction step.
The following intermediates were synthesized according to an analogous reaction protocol:
Figure imgf000158_0002
Figure imgf000159_0001
Intermediate 76
Example A7
Preparation of intermediate 13
Figure imgf000159_0002
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.25 mL; 3.2 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 9 (0.65 g; 1.6 mmol), Et3N (0.5 mL; 3.7 mmol) and DMAP (0.02 g, 0.16 mmol) in DCM (15 mL). The r.m. was stirred 1 h at r.t, poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The solid residue was taken up with Et20 and the precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 0.8 g (99%) of intermediate 13. Example A8
Preparation of intermediate 15
Figure imgf000160_0001
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.17 mL; 2.1 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 1 1 (0.43 g; 1 mmol), Et3N (0.34 mL; 2.5 mmol) and DMAP (0.013 g, 0.1 1 mmol) in DCM (10 mL). The r.m. was stirred 1 h at r.t, poured onto ice water and extracted (DCM). The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 0.51 g (100%) of intermediate 15.
Example A9
ediate 16a
Figure imgf000160_0002
4-Chloro-N-methylpyridine-2-carboxamide (1 g; 5.8 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (1.8 g; 7 mmol), potassium acetate (0.9 g; 8.7 mmol) and S-Phos (0.14 g; 0.3 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (16 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd(OAc)2 (0.04 g; 0.2 mmol) was added portion wise and the r.m. was heated at 100°C for 18 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness to afford 1.9 g (99%) of intermediate 16a.
b) Preparation of intermediate 16
Figure imgf000160_0003
A mixture of intermediate 5b (1.5 g; 3.2 mmol), intermediate 16a (1.7 g; 6.4 mmol), K3P04 (1 .4 g; 6.4 mmol) and S-Phos (0.13 g; 0.3 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (45 mL) and H20 (15 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd2(dba)3 (0.3 g; 3.2 mmol) was added portionwise and the r.m. was heated at 80°C for 18 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μΓη 300 g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 0.8 g (44%) of intermediate 16.
Example A10
Preparation of intermediate 17
Figure imgf000161_0001
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.2 mL; 2.6 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 13 (0.6 g; 1.3 mmol), Et3N (0.45 mL; 3.3 mmol) in DCM (30 mL). The r.m. was stirred 1 h at r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness to afford 0.7 g of intermediate 17 which was used without further purification for the next step.
Example A1 1
a) Preparation of intermediate 18
Figure imgf000161_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5b (10 g; 21 mmol), 2-aminopyridine-5-boronic acid pinacol ester (4.6 g; 21 mmol), K3P04 (1 1.2 g; 52.7 mmol) and S-Phos (0.87 g; 2.1 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (250 mL) and H20 (50 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd2(dba)3 (1.9 g; 2.1 mmol) was added portionwise and the r.m. was heated at 80°C for 18 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite® The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm, 1 kg; mobile phase: 0.5%NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 6.8 g (60%) of intermediate 18.
The following intermediates were synthesized according to an analogous reaction protocol:
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000163_0001
b-1 ) Preparation of intermediate 19
Figure imgf000163_0002
Sulfamic acid (0.062 g; 0.64 mmol) then di-tert-butyl-dicarbonate (8.4 g; 38.4 mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 18 (6.8 g; 12.8 mmol) in 2-methyl-propanol (30 mL). The r.m. was stirred 45°C for 16 h. The mixture was poured onto ice water and DCM was added. The mixture was basified with K2C03 10% and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 35-45pm; mobile phase: gradient form 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 6.5 g (80%) of intermediate 19.
b-2) Preparation of intermediate 69
Figure imgf000164_0001
A (1.3 g; 2.32 mmol), di-tert-butyl dicarbonate
(2.5 g; 1 1.61 mmol) and DMAP (28 mg; 0.23 mmol) in DCM (25 mL) was stirred at r.t. for 4 h, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 69 which was used as such for the next reaction step.
Example A12
Preparation of intermediate 20
Figure imgf000164_0002
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.81 mL; 10.4 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 15 (2 g; 3.9 mmol), Et3N (1.6 mL; 1 1.6 mmol) and DMAP (0.047 g, 0.4 mmol) in DCM (80 mL). The r.m. was stirred 1 h at r.t., poured onto ice water and DCM was added. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The solid residue was taken up with DIPE and the precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 2.3 g (100%) of intermediate 20.
Example A13
Preparation of intermediate 14
Figure imgf000165_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5b (1 .5 g; 3.2 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)-pyridine (0.7 g; 3.5 mmol), potassium phosphate (1.4 g; 6.4 mmol) and S-Phos (0.13 g; 0.32 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (45 mL) and H20 (15 ml_) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow for 10 min. Pd2(dba)3 (0.3 g; 0.32 mmol) was added portion wise and the r.m. was heated at 80°C for 4 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 g (quantitative) of intermediate 14 which was used as such in the next reaction step.
Example A14
a) Preparation of intermediate 21
Figure imgf000165_0002
NaH (882 mg; 22.04 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 2 (5.8 g; 8.4 mmol) in DMF (100ml_) under N2 at 5°C. The r.m. was stirred for 20 min and (bromomethyl)cyclopropane (2.2 mL; 22.04 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for another 20 min at 5°C, then at r.t. for 1.5 h. The r.m. was poured into H20 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness, yielding 6.7 g (98 %) of intermediate 21.
Figure imgf000166_0001
prepared according to an analogous reaction protocol. b) Preparation of intermediate 22
Figure imgf000166_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (3 g, 8.1 1 mmol), trimethylsilylacetylene (5.77 mL; 40.55 mmol), Et3N (3.38 mL; 24.33 mmol) and PPh3 polymer bound (54 mg; 0.16 mmol) in DMSO (100 mL) was degassed for 10 min with N2. Cul (15.5 mg; 0.08 mmol) and PdCI2(PPh3)2 (1 14 mg; 0.16 mmol) were added and the r.m. was heated at 65°C for 5 h, cooled to r.t, poured onto iced water and extracted (EtOAc). The organic layer was separated, washed (brine), dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15/40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from DCM 100% MeOH 0% to DCM 99% MeOH 1 °C). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.66 g (76%) of intermediate 22.
c) Preparation of intermediate 23
Figure imgf000166_0003
A mixture of intermediate 22 (2.6 g; 6.02 mmol) and K2C03 (1.25 g; 9.0 mmol) in MeOH (150 mL) was stirred at r.t. for 2 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and poured onto water. The organic layer was decanted, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40pm 50g; mobile phase: gradient from DCM 100% MeOH 0% to DCM 98% MeOH 2%). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.85 g (85%) of intermediate 23. Example A15
Preparation of intermediate 24
Figure imgf000167_0001
In a pressure vessel, liquid NH3 (50 ml_) was added to a solution of intermediate 21 (5 g; 13.5 mmol) in DME (25 ml_). The r.m. was heated for 15 h at 1 10°C (pressure raised 60 bars), cooled to r.t. and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μηη 30g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were concentrated to give 3.15 g (66%) of intermediate 24 (MP: 146°C (DSC)).
Example A16
a Preparation of intermediate 25
Figure imgf000167_0002
PdCI2(PPh3)2 (31 mg; 0.044 mmol) was added to a degassed solution of intermediate 5b (1.09 g; 2.30 mmol) and tributyl-(1 -ethoxyvinyl)tin (0.854 ml_; 2.53 mmol) in DMF (10 ml_). The r.m. was heated at 70°C overnight, cooled to r.t., poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with water, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH 15-40μιη 30g; mobile phase: 85% cyclohexane, 15% EtOAc). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness yielding 600 mg (51 %) of intermediate 25. b Preparation of intermediate 26
Figure imgf000168_0001
A solution of intermediate 25 (600 mg; 1 .18 mmol) in aq. HCI 3M (2 mL) and acetone (10 mL) was stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The r.m. was diluted with Et20 and basified with a 10% solution of K2C03. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular 15-40μιη 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness yielding 410 mg (95%) intermediate 26.
Example A17
a) Preparation of intermediate 27
Figure imgf000168_0002
NaH 60% in oil (337 mg; 8.44 mmol) was added at 0°C to a solution of 4(5)- (hydroxymethyl)-imidazole (853 mg; 8.44 mmol) in 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (10 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0°C and then a solution of intermediate 5b (2 g; 4.22 mmol) in 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (10 mL) was added. The r.m. was heated at 65°C overnight, cooled to r.t., poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed twice with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40μιη 300g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness yielding 925 mg (41 %) of intermediate 27. ) Preparation of intermediate 28
Figure imgf000169_0001
A mixture of intermediate 27 (1 g; 1.87 mmol), 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (0.183 mL; 2.00 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid (314 mg; 1.82 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was stirred at r.t. for 5 h then refluxed overnight. THF (10 mL) was added, and the r.m. was refluxed for 5 h. The mixture was poured onto ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH), The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 160 mg (16%) of intermediate 28.
Example A18
Preparation of intermediate 29
Figure imgf000169_0002
In a pressure vessel, a suspension of intermediate 21 (2.4 g; 6.5 mmol), PPh3 (170 mg; 0.65 mmol) and zinc cyanide (762 mg; 6.5 mmol) in ACN (24 mL) was degassed with N2 for 5 min. Pd(PPh3)4 was added and the mixture was further degassed for 5 min. The r.m. was stirred at 140 °C for 2 h, evaporated to dryness and taken up with a mixture of water/DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried on MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15-40μιη 90g; mobile phase: 80% cyclohexane, 20% EtOAc). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness and the residue was crystallized from Et20. Filtration of the precipitate afforded 1.73 g (74%) of intermediate 29. Example A19
Preparation of intermediate 30
Figure imgf000170_0001
At r.t., ethyl magnesium bromide (3M in Et20) (460 pL; 1.38 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of 4-iodo-1 -trityl-1 H-imidazole (0.5 g; 1.15 mmol) in THF (3 ml_) under a N2 flow. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 30 min. Then, ZnCI (313 mg; 2.29 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at r.t. for 1 h. A solution of intermediate 21 (424 mg; 1.15 mmol) in THF (2 mL) and Pd(PPh3)4 (66 mg; 0.057 mmol) were added and the mixture was refluxed overnight. The r.m. was poured onto water and filtered through a pad of Celite®. The aq. layer was extracted with DCM and the organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μηη; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 2 fractions containing intermediate 30: 128 mg (purity: 83% based on LC/MS) of intermediate 30 and 1 10 mg (purity: 81 % based on LC/MS) of intermediate 30.
Example A20
a) Preparation of intermediate 31
Figure imgf000170_0002
4-chloro-2-Pyridinecarboxylic acid methyl ester (2 g; 1 1.6 mmol) was added at 70°C to a solution of 2-(2-aminoethoxy)-ethanol (1 1 .7 mL; 1 16.5 mmol) in THF (120 mL). The r.m. was refluxed for 2 h, cooled to r.t. and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm 450g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.4 g (84%) of intermediate 31. b) Pre aration of intermediate 32
Figure imgf000171_0001
A mixture of intermediate 31 (2.3 g; 9.4 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (2.86 g; 1 1 .3 mmol), potassium acetate (1.38 g; 14.1 mmol), S-Phos (231 mg; 0.56 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (45 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd(OAc)2 (63 mg; 0.29 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 1 h, cooled to r.t, poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.1 g (66%) of intermediate 32.
c) Preparation of intermediate 33
Figure imgf000171_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5a (968 mg; 1.98 mmol), intermediate 32 (1 g; 2.97 mmol), K3PO4 (842 mg; 3.97 mmol), S-Phos (81.4 mg; 0.198 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (20 mL) and H20 (7 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (182 mg; 0.198 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 18 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over
MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45μηι 450; mobile phase: 96% DCM, 4% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 624 mg (47%) of intermediate 33. d) Preparation of intermediate 34
Figure imgf000172_0001
p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride (317 mg; 1.66 mmol) was added portion wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 33 (550 mg; 0.83 mmol), DMAP (10 mg; 0.08 mmol) and Et3N (266 μΐ_; 1.91 mmol) in DCM (12 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 18 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and water was added. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 400 mg (59%) of intermediate 34.
e) Pre aration of intermediate 35
Figure imgf000172_0002
A solution of TBAF 1 M in THF (637 pL; 0.64 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 34 (400 mg; 0.49 mmol) in THF (6 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 2 h, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH, 5μηη 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH to 92% DCM, 8% MeOH, 0.8% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 18 mg (34%) of intermediate 35, and 50 mg (19%) of compound 43 (which can also be prepared according to the synthesis protocol described in B40). Example A21
a) Preparation of intermediate 36
Figure imgf000173_0001
Magnesium chloride (190 mg; 1.99 mmol) then N-Boc-1 ,4-diaminobutane (1.5 g; 7.97 mmol) were added at r.t. to a solution of 4-chloro-2-pyridinecarboxylic acid methyl ester (883 mg; 3.98 mmol) in THF (7 ml_). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 2 h then 5 ml_ of water were added followed by 2.5 ml_ of HCI 1 N. The r.m. was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40pm, 40g; mobile phase: 0% MeOH, 100% DCM to 2% MeOH, 98% DCM). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 g (76%) of intermediate 36.
b) Preparation of intermediate 37
Figure imgf000173_0002
A mixture of intermediate 36 (1 g; 3.05 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (0.93 g; 3.66 mmol), potassium acetate (449 mg; 4.57 mmol), S-Phos (75 mg; 0.18 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (15 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd(OAc)2 (20.5 mg; 0.09 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 1 h, cooled to r.t. and poured into water. EtOAc was added and the mixture was filtered through of layer of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 37 which was used as such for the next reaction step. c) Preparation of intermediate 38
Figure imgf000174_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5a (1 g; 2.05 mmol), intermediate 37 (1.28 g; 3.05 mmol), potassium phosphate (869 mg; 4.1 mmol), S-Phos (84 mg; 0.20 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (25 mL) and H20 (8 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (187 mg; 0.20 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 4 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40μηι, 40g; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.27 g (83%) of intermediate 38.
d) Preparation of intermediate 39
Figure imgf000174_0002
A solution of TBAF 1 M in THF (443 μΙ_; 0.44 mmol) was added at 0°C under N2flow to a solution of intermediate 78.4 (300 mg; 0.40 mmol) in THF (4 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 2 h, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical silica, 5μηη
150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 251 mg (99%) of intermediate 39. e) Preparation of intermediate 40
Figure imgf000175_0001
Methanesuifonyl chloride (36.8 μΙ_; 0.47 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 39 (250 mg; 0.39 mmol), and Et3N (85.1 μΙ_; 0.59 mmol) in DCM (20 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 2 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and water was added. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04> filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 267 mg (95%) of intermediate 40. f) Preparation of intermediate 41
Figure imgf000175_0002
A mixture of intermediate 40 (100 mg; 1.08 mmol) and glycine tert-butyl ester (96 μΙ_; 0.705 mmol) in DMF (0.7 mL) was heated at 70°C for 4h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., diluted with EtOAc and poured onto water. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: gradient from 0.4% NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 90 mg (86%) of intermediate 41.
Figure imgf000175_0003
was prepared according to an analogous reaction protocol as described for intermediate 41. Example A22
Preparation of intermediate 42
Figure imgf000176_0001
Intermediate 5a (3.75 g; 7.68 mmol), 2-(4-boc-piperazine)pyridine-5-boronic acid pinacol (2.99 g; 7.68 mmol) and potassium phosphate (4.08 g; 19.2 mmol) in a mixture of 1 ,4- dioxane (100 ml_) and water (20 mL) was stirred and degassed at r.t. under a N2 flow (bubbling). After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (705 mg; 0.77 mmol) and S-Phos (315 mg; 0.768 mmol) were added. The r.m. was heated at 80°C for 2 h, cooled down to r.t. and evaporated to dryness. The oil was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2S04, filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: gradient from 60% heptane, 40% EtOAc to 40% heptane, 60% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and concentrated to afford 2.14 g (37%) of intermediate 42.
Example A23
a) Preparation of intermediate 43
Figure imgf000176_0002
Potassium phthalimide (2.64 g; 14.3 mmol) was added portion wise at r.t. to 2,6- bis(bromomethyl)pyridine (3.78 g; 14.3 mmol) in DMF (40 mL). The mixture was stirred at r.t. over the weekend. The mixture was poured onto ice. The obtained precipitate was filtered, dried and purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 35/45pm 80g; mobile phase: DCM 100%). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness to give 2.23 g (47%) of intermediate 43.
b) Preparation of intermediate 44
Figure imgf000177_0001
Sodium hydride 60% in oil (294 mg; 7.35 mmol) was added portionwise at 5°C under N2 to a solution of intermediate 2 (1.93 g; 6.12 mmol) in DMF (20 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 20 min and intermediate 43 (2.23 g; 6.73 mmol) was added dropwise. The r.m. was stirred for 20 min at 5°C then, at r.t. for 3 h. The r.m. was poured onto ice and the aq. layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20 and dried to give 3 g (87%) of intermediate 44.
c) Preparation of intermediate 45
Figure imgf000177_0002
A mixture of intermediate 44 (1 .2 g; 2.12 mmol), 2-aminopyridine-5-boronic acid pinacol ester (0.56 g; 2.54 mmol), S-Phos (87 mg; 0.21 mmol) and potassium phosphate (900 mg; 4.24 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (58 mL) and water (17 mL) was stirred at r.t. under a N2 flow (bubbling). After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 was added portionwise and the mixture was heated at 80°C for 20 h. The r.m. was cooled down to r.t. and poured onto ice water. EtOAc was added and the mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite® which was washed with EtOAc. The organic and aq. layers were separated. Then, the aq. layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were mixed, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.7% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness to give 0.22g (16%) of intermediate 45.
Example A24
a) Preparation of intermediate 46 and intermediate 46a
Figure imgf000178_0001
intermediate 46 intermediate 46a
A mixture of intermediate 21 (3.2 g; 8.65 mmol), Pd(OAc)2 (194 mg; 0.86 mmol), PPh3 (3.4 g; 12.98 mmol), K2C03 (2.39 g; 17.30 mmol) in DMF (32 mL) and EtOH (32 mL) was heated at 90°C overnight under 10 Bars of C02 in a pressure vessel. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water. EtOAc was added and the mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite® which was washed with EtOAc. Then, the filtrate was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μηη 90g; mobile phase: 80% cyclohexane, 20% EtOAc). Two product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness: 500 mg (14%) of intermediate 46; and 340 mg of an intermediate residue which was crystallized from DIPE/pentane, filtered and dried in vacuum yielding 108 mg (3%) of intermediate 46a (MP: 85°C Kofler).
b) Preparation of intermediate 47
Figure imgf000178_0002
Hydrazine monohydrate (381 μΙ_; 12.27 mmol) was added dropwise at r.t. to a suspension of intermediate 46 (500 mg; 1.23 mmol) in EtOH (15 mL). The r.m. was heated at 80°C for 6 h, cooled down to r.t. and evaporated to dryness. The residue was triturated with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuum to give 420 mg (87%) of intermediate 47.
Example A25
Preparation of intermediate 48
Figure imgf000179_0001
A solution of TBAF 1 M in THF (1.7 mL; 1.671 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 5b (720 mg; 1.519 mmol) in THF (14 mL) at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 2 h, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μηι 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 491 mg (90%) of intermediate 48.
Example A26-A
Preparation of intermediate 49
Figure imgf000179_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (2.4 g, 6.49 mmol) and potassium acetate (1.4 g; 14.27 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (50 mL) was degassed for 10 min. Pd(PPh3)4 (0.75 g; 0.65 mmol) was added and the r.m. was heated at 100°C under 10 Bars of C02 for 15 h. The reaction was cooled to r.t., poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The r.m. was decanted and the aq. layer was extracted twice with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The solid residue was taken up with ACN and the precipitate was filtered off, washed with Et20 and dried yielding 1.6 g (65%) of intermediate 49 . The filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40pm 50g; mobile phase: gradient from 0% aq. formic acid, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 0.2% aq. formic acid, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue was taken up with ACN/Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding an additional amount (143 mg; 6%) of intermediate 49 (MP: 196°C (DSC)).
Example A26-B
a) Preparation of intermediate 50
Figure imgf000180_0001
A mixture of [3-[[(4-chloro-2-pyridinyl)carbonyl]amino]propyl]carbamic acid, 1 ,1 - dimethylethyl ester (1.32 g; 4.21 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (1.28 g; 5.05 mmol), potassium acetate (619 mg; 6.31 mmol), S-Phos (104 mg; 0.25 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (20 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd(OAc)2 (28 mg; 0.13 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 1 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured into water. EtOAc was added and the mixture was filtered through of layer of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over gS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 50 which was used as such for the next reaction step.
b) Preparation of intermediate 51
Figure imgf000180_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5a (1 g; 2.05 mmol), intermediate 50 (1.16 g; 2.87 mmol), K3PO4 (869 mg; 4.1 mmol), S-Phos (84 mg; 0.21 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (25 mL) and H20 (8 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (187 mg; 0.21 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 4 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μηη 40g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 .35 g (90%) of intermediate 51.
Example A27
a) Preparation of intermediate 52
Figure imgf000181_0001
Isobutyl chloroformate (2 mL; 15.4 mmol) was added drop wise at 5°C to a solution of intermediate 49 (4.5 g; 1 1.86 mmol) and Et3N (3.3 mL; 23.72 mmol) in THF (40 mL). The r.m. was stirred at this temperature for 1 h, and was then added dropwise to a solution of sodium borohydride (897 mg; 23.721 mmol) in a mixture of THF (40 mL) and water (80 mL) keeping the temperature at 5°C. The r.m. was stirred at this temperature for 1 more h, and was then quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40pm 300g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.5 g (35%) of intermediate 52.
b) Preparation of intermediate 53
Figure imgf000181_0002
Manganese (IV) oxide (1.49 g; 17.1 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 52 (1.25 g; 3.42 mmol) in DCM (50 mL). The r.m. was refluxed for 18 h, then, cooled down to r.t. and the catalyst was removed by filtration. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness yielding 1.2 g (96%) of intermediate 53 which was directly used in the next reaction step without any further purification.
Example A28
Preparation of intermediate 54
Figure imgf000181_0003
NaH 60% in oil (104 mg; 2.6 mmol) was added portion wise at 0°C to compound 36 (650 mg; 1.62 mmol) and (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (621 mg; 2.6 mmol) in THF (5 ml_). The mixture was refluxed overnight in a sealed tube, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated until dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15- 40pm 30g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness to give 570 mg (63%) of intermediate 54.
Example A29
Preparation of intermediate 55
Figure imgf000182_0001
Cul (19 mg; 0.10 mmol) then DIPEA (302 pL; 1.73 mmol) were added at 5°C to a solution of intermediate 23 (362 mg; 1.01 mmol) and ethyl azidoacetate (0.5 ml_; 2.01 mmol) in THF (10 ml_). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 3 h poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 370 mg (75%) of intermediate 55.
Example A30
a) Preparation of intermediate 56
Figure imgf000182_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5a (500 mg; 1.02 mmol), 2-methoxypyrimidine-5-boronic acid (237 mg; 1.54 mmol), K3P04 (435 mg; 2.05 mmol) and S-Phos (84 mg; 0.21 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (12.25 ml_) and H20 (5 ml.) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (94 mg; 0.10 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 90°C for 5 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 420 mg (73%) of intermediate 56.
Intermediate 56 is used in the synthesis of compound 141 .
The following intermediates were synthesized according to an analogous reaction protocol:
Figure imgf000183_0001
b-1 ) Preparation of intermediate 57
Figure imgf000183_0002
Methanesuifonyl chloride (64 μΙ_; 0.83 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 141 (275 mg; 0.61 mmol), and Et3N (132 μΙ_; 0.92 mmol) in DCM (10 ml_). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 2 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and water was added. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 302 mg (93%) of intermediate 57. b-2) Preparation of intermediate 58
Figure imgf000184_0001
NaH 60% in oil (45.7 mg; 1.14 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of
intermediate 57 (300 mg; 0.57 mmol) in DMA (10 mL) at 5°C under N2 flow. The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 15 min, and then tert-butyl N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl) carbamate (227 mg; 1 .14 mmol) was added. The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t., quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 58 which was used as such for the next reaction step.
Example A31
a) Preparation of intermediate 59
Figure imgf000184_0002
Et3N (1.7 mL; 12.3 mmol) followed by ieri-butyldimethylsilylchloride (0.82 g; 5.44 mmol) were added to a solution of 4(5)-(hydroxymethyl)-imidazole (0.5 g; 4.94 mmol) in DMF (7 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 3 h at r.t. and partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: 100% DCM) to afford 920 mg (87%; colourless oil) of intermediate 59.
b) Preparation of intermediate 60
Figure imgf000184_0003
NaH (26 mg; 0.649 mmol) was added at 0°C to intermediate 59 (122 mg; 0.54 mmol) in solution in DMF (2 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min at 0°C then intermediate 21 (200 mg; 0.54 mmol) in solution in DMF (1 mL) was added. The r.m. was heated at 65°C overnight, cooled down to r.t. and partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue (302 mg, orange oil) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10μηη 60g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 2 fractions of respectively 85 mg (29%) and 61 mg (21 %) of intermediate 60.
Intermediate 60 was used for the synthesis of compound 105.
Example A32
Preparation of intermediate 61
Figure imgf000185_0001
4-Piperidinylzinc iodide (610 mg; 1.62 mmol) was added dropwise under N2 flow to a mixture of intermediate 5b (554 mg; 1.16 mmol), PdCI2dppf.DCM complex (28 mg; 0.035 mmol) and Cul (13 mg; 0.069 mmol) in DMA (3 ml_). The mixture was stirred at 1 15°C for 3 h. The r.m. was poured ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.3% NH4OH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness yielding 65mg (9%) of intermediate 61.
Example A33
Figure imgf000185_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5a (500 mg; 1.024 mmol), 2-chloropyridine-4-boronic acid (242 mg; 1.537 mmol), K3P04 (435 mg; 2.05 mmol) and S-Phos (84 mg; 0.21 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (12 ml_) and H20 (5 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (94 mg; 0.10 mmol) was added portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 80°C for 3 h, cooled to r.t, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: 60% heptane, 40% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 325 mg (56%) of intermediate 62 and 207 mg (31 % of intermediate 63.
Intermediate 62 was used for the synthesis of compound 136.
Intermediate 63 was used for the synthesis of compound 133.
Example A34
a) Preparation of intermediate 64
Figure imgf000186_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5b (3 g; 6.33 mmol), palladium(ll) acetate (710 mg; 3.16 mmol), 1 ,3-bis(diphenylphosphino) propane (1.3 g; 3.16 mmol) and potassium acetate (1.2 g; 12.66 mmol) in EtOH (120 mL) was heated under 5 bars of CO in a pressure vessel at 90°C for 18h. The r.m. was filtered over a pad of Celite® and the filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was filtered over a pad of silica gel (Irregular SiOH 60μΜ; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH). The filtrate was evaporated to dryness yi ediate 64.
Figure imgf000186_0002
(intermediate 64b) was prepared according to an analogous protocol, but intermediate 5a was used instead of intermediate 5b.
b) Preparation of intermediate 65
Figure imgf000187_0001
A mixture of intermediate 64 (500 mg; 0.98 mmol) and 1-methyl-1-H-pyrazol-4-ylamine (285 mg; 2.93 mmol) in N,N-diisopropylethylamine (5 mL) was heated at 90°C for 18 h in a sealed tube. The r.m. was poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm, 40g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 65 mg (12%) of intermediate 65.
Intermediate 65 was used for the synthesis of compound 184.
Figure imgf000187_0002
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but 1 -(3-aminopropyl)-piperidine was used instead of 1-methyl-1 -H- pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 177.
Figure imgf000187_0003
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but piperidine was used instead of 1-methyl-1-H-pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 175.
Figure imgf000188_0001
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but morpoline was used instead of 1 -methyl-1 -H-pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 176.
Figure imgf000188_0002
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but 1 -methylpiperazine was used instead of 1 -methyl-1 -H-pyrazol-4- ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 174.
Figure imgf000188_0003
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but 4-(2-aminoethyl)-morpholine was used instead of 1-methyl-1 -H pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 153.
Figure imgf000188_0004
was prepared from intermediate 64 according to an analogous protocol, but 1-(3-aminopropyl)-4-methyl piperazine was used instead of 1 -methyl-1 -H-pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 154.
Figure imgf000189_0001
was prepared from intermediate 64b according to an analogous protocol, but 2-morpholinoethanamine was used instead of 1 -methyl-1 -H- pyrazol-4-ylamine, and no Ν,Ν-diisopropylethylamine was added to the r.m.. Used for the synthesis of compound 152.
Example A35
a) Preparation of intermediate 66
Figure imgf000189_0002
A mixture of intermediate 5b (500 mg; 1 .055 mmol), L-proline methyl ester hydrochloride (349 mg; 2.1 1 mmol) and Et3N (0.44 ml_; 3.16 mmol) in ACN was heated at 90°C for 18 h. The r.m. was poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular 15-40μιη 30g; mobile phase:
gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 125 mg (21 %) of intermediate 66.
Intermediate 66 was used for the synthesis of compound 172 .
Example A36
a) Preparation of intermediate 67
Figure imgf000189_0003
Methyl 4-chloropicolinate (2 g; 1 1.66 mmol) was added portionwise at 70°C to a solution of 5-amino-1-pentanol (6 g; 58.28 mmol) in THF (120 mL). The r.m. was refluxed for 2 hours, cooled to r.t. and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45μηη 450g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2.3 g (81 %) of intermediate 67.
b) Preparation of intermediate 68
Figure imgf000190_0001
A mixture of intermediate 67 (2.3 g; 9.48 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (2.9 g; 1 1.37 mmol), potassium acetate (1.4 g; 14.22 mmol), S-Phos (233 mg; 0.57 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (40 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Palladium(ll) acetate (281 mg; 0.31 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 6 h, cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 68 which was used as it is for the next step.
Example A37
a) Preparation of intermediate 70
Figure imgf000190_0002
Intermediate 70 was prepared according to an analogous reaction protocol as described in Example A3.
b) Preparation of intermediate 71
Figure imgf000190_0003
K2C03 (782 mg; 5.66 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 70 (1.4 g; 1.89 mmol) in MeOH (100 mL). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. overnight, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 50g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.1 1 g (84%) of intermediate 71.
Example A38
a) Preparation of intermediate 72
Figure imgf000191_0001
4-chloro-2-Pyridinecarboxylic acid methyl ester (1.5 g; 8.72 mmol) was added portionwise at 70°C to a solution of 1 ,5-diaminopentane (5 g; 48.93 mmol) in THF (90 mL). The r.m. was refluxed for 5 h, cooled to r.t. and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was taken up with DCM and the organic layer was washed with water several times, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm 450g; mobile phase: 1 % NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 1.55 g (73%) of intermediate 72.
b) Preparation of intermediate 73
Figure imgf000191_0002
di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (1.8 g; 8.34 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 72 (1.55 g; 6.41 mmol), DMAP (78 mg; 0.64 mmol) and Et3N (1.34 mL; 9.62 mmol) in THF (30 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 1 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and water was added. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιη 40g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 2 g (91 %) of intermediate 73. ) Preparation of intermediate 74
Figure imgf000192_0001
A mixture of intermediate 73 (1 .92 g; 5.62 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (1.71 g; 6.74 mmol), potassium acetate (827 mg; 8.42 mmol), S-Phos (138 mg; 0.34 mmol) in 1 ,4- dioxane (40 mL) was degassed with N2. After 10 min, Pd(OAc)2 (38 mg; 0.17 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 1 hour, cooled to r.t, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding intermediate 74 which was used as such for the next reaction step.
Example A39
Preparation of a mixture of intermediates 77 and 78
intermediate 77
Figure imgf000192_0002
and intermediate 78
Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.249 mL; 3.22 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of compound 187 (0.51 g; 1.07 mmol) and triethylamine (0.448 ml; 3.22 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) at -10°C under N2 flow. The reaction mixture was stirred below 0°C for 1 hour then, at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was poured onto ice and DCM was added. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated to dryness (rotovapor bath temperature: 25 to 30°C) to give 0.59 g of a mixture of intermediate 77 and intermediate 78 which was used in the next step without further purification.
B. Preparation of the compounds
Example B1
Preparation of compound 1
Figure imgf000193_0001
K2C03 (0.43 g; 3.1 mmol) was added to intermediate 4 as obtained in Example A1.d (1.45 g; 3.1 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL). The solution was stirred at r.t. for 3 h, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding 1 .1 g (89%) of compound 1.
Example B2
Preparation of compounds 3a, 3 and 4
Figure imgf000193_0002
Compound 4 Compound 3a
Compound 3 (HCI salt)
A solution of TBAF (3.1 mL; 3.14 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of the crude residue (1.9 g) obtained in Example A2.c (containing intermediate 7) in THF (30 mL) at r.t. The r.m. was stirred for 3 h, then water was added and the solvent was evaporated under vacuum. The residue was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιη 300g; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 585 mg (72%) of compound 4 and 55 mg of compound 3a which was converted into its hydrochloride salt in MeOH/Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 49 mg (15%) of compound 3 (.1 .06 HCI) (MP: 180°C DSC).
Example B3
Preparation of compounds 5 and 5a
Figure imgf000194_0001
compound 5a
compound 5 HCI salt
A mixture of intermediate 8 (0.8 g; 1.6 mmol) and 2,2,2-trifluoroethylamine (2.5 mL; 31.2 mmol) in ACN (3 mL) was heated at 90°C in a sealed vessel for 18 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., was poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness, yielding 0.670 g of a brown oil. The brown oil was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oil (compound 5a) (0.3 g; 39%) was converted into its hydrochloride salt (5eq.) in MeOH. Diethyl ether was added and the precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.33 g (38%) of compound 5 (.1.81 HCI; MP: 186°C DSC).
Example B4
Preparation of compounds 6 and 7
Figure imgf000194_0002
Compound 7 Compound 6
A 1 solution of TBAF in THF (4.8 mL; 4.8 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of intermediate 10 as obtained in A4.b (2.85 g; 4.4 mmol) in THF (45 mL) at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred for 18 h, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was basified with 10% aq. K2C03 and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 pm; mobile phase: gradient from 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH).
Two different product fractions were collected and the solvent of each fraction was evaporated, yielding 0.170 g of crude compound 6 as a yellow oil and 0.96 g of compound 7 as a yellow oil (54 %). Crude compound 6 was solubilized in MeOH (1 mL). Then, Et20 was added and the resulting precipitate was filtered, dried to give 0.135 g (7%) of compound 6 (MP: 135°C DSC).
Example B5
Preparation of compounds 8a and 8
Figure imgf000195_0001
A mixture of intermediate 1 1 (0.3 g; 0.62 mmol) and 2-propanamine (2.7 mL; 31.1 mmol) in ACN (3 mL) was heated at 90°C in a sealed vessel for 7 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t, poured onto a mixture of ice water and EtOAc. The layers were separated; the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH, 10pm; mobile phase 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oil (compound 8a; 140 mg; 51 %) was converted into its hydrochloride salt by addition of 5 eq. of HCI in MeOH. Et20 was added. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 160 mg (51 %) of compound 8 (.1.79 HCI) (MP: 200°C Kofler). Example B6
Preparation of compound 9
Figure imgf000196_0001
A 1 M solution of TBAF in THF (4.1 mL,;4.1 mmoi) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 12 (1.6 g; 3.2 mmoi) in THF (30 mL) at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred for 3 h, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was basified with a 10% solution of K2C03 and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45 Mm; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 5% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (0.86 g, 67%) was crystallized from ACN, the precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 0.78 g (61 %) of compound 9 (MP: 151 °C DSC).
Example B7
Preparation of compounds 10a and 10
Figure imgf000196_0002
A mixture of intermediate 13 (0.76 g; 1.6 mmoi) and 2-propanamine (5.4 mL; 63.6 mmoi) was heated at 90°C in a sealed vessel for 3 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto a mixture of ice water and DCM. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15-40 pm; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (compound 10a) (0.5 g; 70%) was dissolved in Et20. The solution was cooled in an ice bath and a solution of HCI 4N in 1 ,4-dioxane was added drop wise. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 0.45 g (52%) of compound 10 (.2.14 HCI .H20) (MP: 174°C Kofler). Example B8
Figure imgf000197_0001
A 1 M solution of TBAF in THF (4.1 mL; 4.1 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 14 (1.6 g; 3.2 mmol) in THF (30 mL) at r.t. The r.m. was stirred for 3 h, poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was basified with K2C03 10% and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue (3 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μηι; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MeOH 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered off and dried to afford 0.7 g (54%) of compound 1 1
Example B9
Preparation of compound 12
Figure imgf000197_0002
A mixture of intermediate 15 (0.51 g; 1 mmol) and 2-propanamine (3.6 mL; 42 mmol) was heated at 90°C in a sealed vessel for 3 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with water, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 5 μιη; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.9% NH4OH, 91 % DCM, 9%MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (0.33 g; 70%) was crystallized from ACN/Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 0.28 g (60%) of compound 12 (MP: 1 18°C DSC). Compound 150
Figure imgf000198_0001
was prepared according to an analogous reaction protocol, starting from intermediate 71.
Example B10
Figure imgf000198_0002
A 1 M solution of TBAF in THF (5.35 mL, 5.35 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 16 (3.07 g, 5.35 mmol) in THF (30 mL) at r.t. The r.m. was stirred for 18 h, poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The mixture was basified with a 10% solution of aq. K2C03 and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with pentane. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 2.61 g (quantitive) of compound 13.
Figure imgf000198_0003
Example B1 1
Preparation of compound 14
Figure imgf000199_0001
A mixture of intermediate 17 (0.7 g; 1.3 mmol) and 2-propanamine (1 1.4 mL; 133.1 mmol) in ACN (5 mL) was heated at 100°C in a sealed vessel for 16 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t, was poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40μιη 300 g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was precipitated from Et20 and a small amount of acetone to give 0.38 g (58 %) of compound 14 (MP: 68°C Kofler).
Figure imgf000199_0002
Analogous preparation of compound 188
starting from a mixture of intermediates 77 and 78
Example B12
Preparation of compound 15
Figure imgf000199_0003
A 1 M solution of TBAF in THF (12.4 mL; 12.4 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of intermediate 19 (6.5 g; 10.3 mmol) in THF (200 mL) at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 2 h, poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The mixture was basified with a 10% solution of K2C03 and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The solid residue was taken up with DIPE and the precipitate was filtered off and dried to give 5 g (93%) of compound 15.
Example B 3
Preparation of compound 16
Figure imgf000200_0001
A mixture of intermediate 20(2.3 g; 3.8 mmol) and 2-propanamine (60 mL; 705 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was heated at 75°C in a sealed vessel for 4 days. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., was poured onto ice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was separated and evaporated till dryness. The residue was taken up with ACN and H20 and the precipitate was filtered off, washed with ACN then diethyl ether and dried yielding 1.6 g (75%) of compound 16.
Example B14
Preparation of compound 18
Figure imgf000200_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (238 mg; 0.64mmol), 2-Methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-boronic acid (161 mg; 0.77 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (74 mg; 0.064 mmol) and a 2M aq. solution of Na2C03 (0.64 mL; 1.28 mmol) in DME (3.5 mL) were heated for 6 h at 100°C. The r.m. was cooled down to r.t., poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were mixed and concentrated to give 300 mg of fraction A (impure).
Fraction A was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 225 mg (84%) of an
intermediate fraction which was crystallized from a mixture of DIPE/Et20. The precipitate was filtered to afford 179 mg (67%) of compound 18 (MP: 132°C DSC).
Example B15
Preparation of compound 19
Figure imgf000201_0001
A mixture of intermediate 48 (400 mg; 1.11 mmol), 4-[5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1 ,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl]morpholine (387 mg; 1.33 mmol), K3P04 (472 mg; 2.22 mmol), S-Phos (91 mg; 0.22 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (13 mL) and H20 (5.4 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (102 mg; 0.1 1 mmol) was added
portionwise. The r.m. was heated at 100°C for 3 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Stability Silica 5μηι 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5%
MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (325 mg; 60%) was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 272 mg (50%) of compound 19 (MP: 193°C (Kofler)).
Example B16
Preparation of compound 20a and compound 20
Figure imgf000201_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (305 mg; 0.82 mmol), 1-methyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl- 1 ,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)indole (254 mg; 0.99 mmol), K3P04 (438 mg; 2.06 mmol), S- Phos (34 mg; 0.082 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (9 mL) and water (3 mL) was stirred at r.t. under N2 flow. After 10 min, Pd2(dba)3 (75.5 mg; 0.082 mmol) was added portionwise The r.m. was heated at 80°C for 4 h, cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water. EtOAc was added and the mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 30g 15-40μηη; mobile phase: gradient from 80% cyclohexane, 20% EtOAc to 50% cyclohexane, 50% EtOAc). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (compound 20a; free base) (176 mg; 46%) was dissolved in MeOH and 0.15 mL of HCI (5 to 6N in isopropanol) was added. The solution was stirred at r.t. for 30 min and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 145 mg (34%) of compound 20 (.1.19 HCI .0.68 H20; MP: 105°C (Kofler)).
Example B17
Preparation of compound 60
Figure imgf000202_0001
A solution of intermediate 21 (900 mg; 2.45 mmol) and 1-Methyl-2-tributylstannanyl-1 H- imidazole (1 g; 2.42 mmol) in DMF (9 mL) was degassed with N2 for 15 mn. Pd(PPh3)4 (0.28 g; 0.24 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 100°C overnight. The r.m. was partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed together and concentrated to give 270 mg (26%; yellow powder) of compound 60 (MP = 178°C (Kofler)).
Example B18
Preparation of compound 61
Figure imgf000202_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (0.3 g, 0.81 mmol), 1-Methyl-1 H-pyrazol-4-amine (94 mg, 0.97 mmol), 9,9-dimethyl-4-,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthene (37 mg, 0.065 mmol) and Cs2C03 (317 mg; 0.97 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (4 mL) was degassed with a stream of N2 for 30min. Pd2(dba)3 (37 mg, 0.041 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 85°C overnight in a sealed tube. The mixture was poured onto water and filtered through a pad of Celite®. The aq. layer was extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Stability Silica 5μιη 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.9% NH4OH, 91 % DCM, 9% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (50 mg, 14%) was crystallized from DIPE/ACN (90/10). The precipitate was filtered, dried under vacuum to give 30 mg (8%) of compound 61 (MP: 160°C (Kofler)).
Example B19
Preparation of compound 21
Figure imgf000203_0001
Ethylmagnesium chloride 2.8 M in THF (0.266 mL; 0.74 mmol) was added drop wise at r.t. under N2 flow to a solution of 5-bromo-1 -methyl-1 H-imidazole (0.1 g; 0.62 mmol) in THF (1.3 mL). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 30 min and ZnCI (0.170 g; 1.24 mmol) was added. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 1 h. Then a solution of intermediate 21 (0.230 g; 0.62 mmol) in THF (1 mL) and Pd(PPh3)4 (36 mg, 0.03 mmol) were added. The mixture was refluxed overnight, cooled to r.t. and partitioned between EtOAc and water. The aq. layer was extracted once with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined, dried, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.6% NH4OH, 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The pure fractions were combined and concentrated to afford an intermediate residue (0.135 g, yellow oil, 52%) which was precipitated with a 1/1/1 mixture of Et20/ACN/pentane to afford 87 mg (33%, yellow solid) of compound 21 (MP: 140X (Kofler)). Example B20
Preparation of compound 22
Figure imgf000204_0001
A mixture of intermediate 21 (300 mg; 0.81 mmol), 5-ethynyl-1-methyl-1 H-imidazole (412 μΐ_; 4.05 mmol), Et3N (338 pL; 2.43 mmol) and PPh3 (4 mg; 0.016 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was degassed for 10 min with N2 in a sealed tube. Cul (1.5 mg; 0.008 mmol) and PdCI2(PPh3)2 (1 1 mg; 0.016 mmol) were added and the mixture was heated at 70°C for 8 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and poured onto ice water. DC was added and the mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite®. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 pm; mobile phase 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from DIPE. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuum yielding 128 mg (38%) of compound 22 (MP: 166°C (Kofler)). Example B21
Preparation of compound 23
Figure imgf000204_0002
A suspension of intermediate 23 (140 mg; 0.39 mmol), PdCI2(PPh3)2 (54.7 mg; 0.078 mmol), Et3N (1 mL; 7.19 mmol) in a mixture of ACN (5 mL) and DMF (2.5 mL) was degassed under N2. 4-iodopyridine (399 mg; 1.95 mmol) and Cul (7.5 mg; 0.04 mmol) were added and the r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 18 h. Water was added and the aq. layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.6% NH4OH, 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 19 mg (1 1 %) of compound 23 (gum below 60 °C Kofler).
Example B22 Preparation of compound 24
Cul (1 1.1 mg; 0.06 mmol) and DIPEA (175 pL; 1 mmol) were added at 5°C to a solution of intermediate 23 (210 mg; 0.58 mmol) and 2-(4-morpholino)-ethylazide (292 μ[_; 1.17 mmol) in THF (6 mL). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 3 h, poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue was crystallized from DIPE/pentane/ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 222 mg (73%) of compound 24 (MP: 128°C (DSC)).
Example B23 Preparation of compound 25
Figure imgf000205_0002
NaH in oil (179 mg; 4.46 mmol) was added portionwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of 2-pyrrolidinone (0.35 mL; 4.46 mmol) in DMF (73 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 1 h. Subsequently, intermediate 17 (800 mg; 1.49 mmol) was added at 5°C. The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 1 h, then overnight at r.t. The r.m. was poured onto ice water and EtOAc was added. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried (MgS04), filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated till dryness to give 800 mg of fraction A (not pure enough). Fraction A was purified by achiral Super critical fluid chromatography (AMINO 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 0.3% isopropylamine, 13% MeOH, 87% C02). The pure fractions were evaporated till dryness. The residue was crystallized from acetone to give after filtration and drying 166 mg (21 %) of compound 25 (MP: 176°C (DSC)).
Example B24
Preparation of compound 26
Figure imgf000206_0001
TFA (919 μΙ_) was added to solution of intermediate 58 (517 mg; 0.82 mmol) in DCM (9 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 18 h, basified with a saturated solution of NaHC03 aq. and extracted with a solution of DCM/MeOH 90/10. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.1 % NH4OH, 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH to 1 % NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (75 mg; 17%) was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 55 mg (13%) of compound 26 (MP: 96°C Kofler).
Example B25 Preparation of compound 27
Figure imgf000206_0002
A mixture of intermediate 49 (250 mg; 0.66 mmol), EDCI (153 mg; 0.99 mmol), HOBT (133 mg; 0.99 mmol), Et3N (138 μΙ_; 0.99 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was stirred at r.t. then, a solution of 1-methyl-1 H-lmidazol-5-amine (320 mg; 3.3 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (10 mL) was added dropwise at r.t.. The r.m. was stirred for 5 h, poured onto ice water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient 100% DC , 0% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 60 mg (20%) of an intermediate fraction which was triturated with a mixture of Et20/ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuum at 60°C to afford 35 mg (1 1 %) of compound 27 (MP: 180°C (Kofler)).
Example B26 Preparation of compound 28
Figure imgf000207_0001
At r.t, EDCI (136 mg; 0.87 mmol) was added portionwise to a solution of intermediate 24 (204 mg; 0.58 mmol), 4-fluorobenzoic acid (122 mg; 0.87 mmol), HOBT (1 18 mg; 0.87 mmol) and Et3N (121 μί.; 0.87 mmol) in DCM (4 mL). The r.m. was stirred 15 h, poured into H20 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιτι 30g; mobile phase: gradient 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 1 16 mg (42%) of an intermediate fraction which was crystallized in DIPE. The precipitate was filtered to afford 104 mg (38%) of compound 28 (MP: 135°C (DSC)).
Example B27
Preparation of compound 29
Figure imgf000207_0002
Methoxylamine .HCI (51.2 mg; 1.09 mmol) was added to a suspension of intermediate 26 (200 mg; 0.54 mmol) and pyridine (88.1 μί,; 1.09 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL). The r.m. was stirred overnight at r.t. The solution was poured into 50 mL of water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular Silica δμητι
150x30.0mm. mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by achiral super critical fluid chromatography (diphenyl 5pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 95% C02, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up by pentane. The precipitate was filtered off and dried. Yield: 62 mg (28%) of compound 29 (MP: 149°C (Kofler)).
Example B28
Preparation of compound 30
Figure imgf000208_0001
A mixture of intermediate 21 (283 mg; 0.76 mmo), 4-methylimidazole (85 mg; 1.03 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (24.5 mg; 0.027 mmol), NaOtBu (169 mg; 1.76 mmol), (±)-BINAP (28.6 mg; 0.046 mmol) in toluene (6 mL) was heated at 90°C for 20 h under N2. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The fractions containing the product were mixed and concentrated to give 104 mg of a fraction A (impure).
Fraction A was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5μιη
150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.6% NH4OH, 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were mixed and concentrated to give 73 mg (23%) of a fraction B (impure). Crystallization of fraction B failed, so this fraction was purified again by achiral super critical fluid chromatography (CYANO 6μηη 150x21.2mm; mobile phase 0.3% isopropylamine, 90% C02, 10%
MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 45 mg (14%) of a fraction C which was crystallized in pentane to give 26 mg (8%) of compound 30 (MP: 1 13°C (Kofler)). Example B29
Pre aration of compound 31 and compound 62
Figure imgf000209_0001
A mixture of intermediate 21 (236 mg; 0.64 mmol), 3-methylpyrazole (62 μΙ_; 0.77 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (20.5 mg; 0.022 mmol), (±)-Binap (23.8 mg; 0.038 mmol) and NaOtBu (141 mg; 1.47 mmol) in toluene (5.8 mL) was heated at 90°C under N2 for 20 h. The r.m. was cooled down to r.t., poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15-40μιτι 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.2% NH4OH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to afford 37 mg of fraction A and 68 mg of fraction B.
Fraction B was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5μιη
150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to afford 14 mg of fraction C and 27 mg of fraction D.
Fractions A and C were gathered to afford a residue (51 mg) which was dissolved in iPrOH. This solution was poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from pentane and the precipitate was filtered and dried to give 31 mg (12%) of compound 31 (MP: 107°C, DSC).
Fraction D was crystallized from pentane to afford after filtration and drying 13 mg (5%) of compound 62 (MP = 139°C, kofler). Example B30 Preparation of compound 32a and compound 32
Figure imgf000210_0001
Compound 32 (HCI salt)
Intermediate 21 (226 mg; 0.61 mmol), 2-methylimidazole (60 mg; 0.73 mmol); Pd2(dba)3 (19.6 mg; 0.021 mmol); (±)-BINAP (22.8 mg; 0.037 mmol) and NaOtBu (135 mg; 1.4 mmol) in toluene (5.8 ml_) were heated at 90°C for 20 h under N2. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto aq. K2C03. The aq. layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH 15-40μηη 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 154 mg of fraction A not pure enough. Fraction A was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15- 40μιη 30g; mobile phase: 60% DCM, 40% EtOAc). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 80 mg (32%) of fraction B (compound 32a; free base) which was dissolved in isopropanol. HCI (5 to 6N in IprOH) was added and the mixture was stirred for 30 min at r.t.. The solvent was evaporated to dryness and the resulting residue was crystallized with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried to give 55 mg (20%) of compound 32 (.0.99 HCI) (MP: 223°C (DSC)).
Example B31
Preparation of compound 33
Figure imgf000210_0002
A solution of intermediate 51 (100 mg; 0.137 mmol) in HCI 3N (1 mL) and MeOH (2 ml_) was heated at 70°C for 2 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., diluted with DCM and basified by a saturated solution of Na2C03 (aq.). The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (43 mg; 61 %) was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered off and dried yielding 27 mg (38%) of compound 33 (MP: 1 10°C (gum, Kofler)).
Example B32
Figure imgf000211_0001
A mixture of intermediate 20 (792 mg; 1.33 mmol) and morpholine (585 μΙ_; 6.65 mmol) in 1 -methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (8 ml.) was heated at 120°C for 1 h. The r.m. was poured onto iced water. The precipitate was filtered, washed several times with water and dissolved in DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.6% NH4OH, 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 205 mg (26%) of compound 34 and 360 mg (45%) of compound 35 which was crystallized from ACN/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 291 mg (36%) of compound 35 (MP: 153X (DSC)).
Example B33
Preparation of compound 36
Figure imgf000211_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (537 mg; 1.45 mmol), 1-(triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3-boronic acid (504 mg; 1.89 mmol) and Na2C03 1 M in water (2.9 ml; 2.9 mmol) in DME (18 ml.) were degassed with N2 for 10 min. Pd(PPh3)4 (198 mg; 0.145 mmol) was added and the r.m. was heated at 100°C for 4 h. The mixture was cooled down to r.t. and TBAF (1 M in THF) (2.9 ml; 2.9 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 1 h and partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was collected, dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 300g; mobile phase: 40% heptane, 60% EtOAc). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 380 mg (65%; orange solid) of compound 36 (MP: gum at 66°C Kofler).
Example B34
Preparation of compound 37
Figure imgf000212_0001
A mixture of intermediate 21 (313.5 mg; 0.85 mmol), 2-(4-methylpiperazin-1 -yl)-pyridin- 4-ylboronic acid (244 mg; 1.1 mmol) and a 2M aq. solution of Na2C03 (0.85 mL; 1.7 mmol) in DME (9 mL) was degassed with N2 for 10 min. Then, Pd(PPh3)4 (98 mg; 0.085 mmol) was added and the r.m. was heated at 135°C for 40 min under microwave irradiation, poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 90% DCM, 10% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were mixed and evaporated to dryness yielding 240 mg (55%) of an intermediate fraction which was crystallized from a DIPE/pentane mixture. The precipitate was filtered to give 135 mg (31 %) of compound 37 (MP: 125°C (DSC)).
Example B35
Preparation of compound 38
Figure imgf000212_0002
p-Toluenesulfonic acid (191 mg; 1.1 1 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 28 (280 mg; 0.55 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) and the r.m. was stirred for 2 h at r.t. The r.m. was poured onto ice, basified with saturated solution of NaHC03 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20 and dried yielding 158 mg (68%) of compound 38 (MP: 215 °C (Kofler)).
Example B36 Preparation of compound 39
Figure imgf000213_0001
At r.t, concentrated HCI (0.6 mL) was added to a solution of intermediate 30 (0.188 g;
0.29 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL). The mixture was then heated at 50°C for 3 h. The r.m. was poured onto water, basified with 10% aq. K2C03 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated until dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 55 mg (46%) of an intermediate fraction which was crystallized from Et20/pentane (90/10). The precipitate was filtered, dried under vacuum to afford 42 mg (35%) of compound 39 (MP: 166°C (DSC)).
Example B37
Preparation of compound 40
Figure imgf000213_0002
Diisobutylaluminum hydride 1 M in hexane (1 .53 mL; 1.53 mmol) was added dropwise at 5°C to a solution of intermediate 55 (250 mg; 0.51 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The r.m. was stirred at this temperature for 30 min, then allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 18 h. The r.m. was cooled again at 5°C and additional diisobutylaluminum hydride 1 M in hexane (1.53 mL; 1.53 mmol) was added to complete the reaction. The r.m. was stirred for 18 more h, quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.9% NH4OH, 91 % DCM, 9% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 61 mg (26%) compound 40 (MP: 177°C (DSC)). Example B38
Preparation of compound 41
Figure imgf000214_0001
A mixture of intermediate 29 (0.5 g; 1 .39 mmol), sodium azide (0.27 g; 4.16 mmol) and ammonium chloride (0.3 g; 5.55 mmol) in DMF (7 ml_) was heated for at 125°C for 90 min. The r.m. was poured onto ice and extracted with EtOAc (by saturating the aq. layer with NaCI). The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20 and dried to give 0.5g (89%) of crude compound 41 (impure).
A part of crude compound 41 (200 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: 1 % NH4OH, 89% DCM, 10% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were evaporated until dryness to give 1 14 mg of a fraction A which is crude compound 41 (not the required purity). This fraction and the mother liquors were mixed together, taken up by EtOAc and acidified with 3N HCI. The organic layer was extracted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was taken up by pentane and dried to give 220 mg of fraction B (still impure compound 41 ).
Fraction B was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 93% DCM, 7% MeOH to 80% DCM, 20% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness to give 180 mg of fraction C which was taken up by EtOAc, acidified with 1 equivalent of 5-6N HCI (in IprOH). The organic layer was washed with water, separated, dried with MgS04, filtered and evaporated until dryness. The resulting residue was taken up by pentane, filtered, washed with Et20 and dried to give 139 mg of compound 41 (MP: 216°C Kofler).
Example B39
Preparation of compound 42
Figure imgf000215_0001
Sodium azide (257.7 mg; 3.96 mmol) was added at 5°C to a solution of formaldehyde (1.98 mL; 26.4 mmol) and HOAc (227 pL; 3.96 mmol) in dioxane ((5ml). The r.m. was stirred for 15 min and and a solution of intermediate 23 (950 mg; 2.64 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) was added. The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 10 min then, sodium L-ascorbate (105 mg; 0.529 mmol) was added followed by a 0.081 M aq. solution of copper sulfate (1 .63 mL; 0.13 mmol). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 3 h. Water was added and the r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 2 h. The precipitate was filtered off, washed successively with water (3 x 50 mL), ACN then Et20 and dried yielding 970 mg (84%) of compound 42.
Example B40
Preparation of compound 43
Figure imgf000215_0002
NaH 60% in oil (31 .4 mg; 0.78 mmol) was added portion wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 35 (184 mg; 0.26 mmol) in DMF (15 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 1 h, poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.2% NH4OH to 91 % DCM, 9% MeOH, 0.9% NH4OH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give 105 mg of an oily residue which was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 89 mg (64%) of compound 43 (MP:190°C DSC).
Example B41 Preparation of compound 44
Figure imgf000216_0001
TFA (0.1 mL) was added at 0°C to a solution of intermediate 41 (53 mg; 0.071 mmol) in DCM (1 mL). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. overnight. TFA (0.1 mL) was added 2 more times to complete the conversion. After 48 h, the r.m. was evaporated to dryness and the residue was purified by reverse phase chromatography (X-Bridge-C18 δμητι
30*150mm; mobile phase: gradient from 80% TFA 10mM in water, 20% ACN to 0% TFA 10 mM in water, 100% ACN). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 30 mg (60%) of compound 44 (.CF3COOH; MP: 64°C (gum, Kofler)).
Example B42
Preparation of compound 46 and compound 47
compound 46 (R or S)
compound 47 (S or R)
Figure imgf000216_0002
NaH 60% in oil (357 mg; 9 mmol) was added portion wise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 3 (1.6 g; 4.7 mmol) in DMF (20 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 1 h, then glycidyl methyl ether (0.6 mL; 6.7 mmol) was added dropwise. The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and heated at 70°C for 4 h. The r.m. was poured onto brine and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, then brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue was purified chromatography over silica gel (irregular SiOH 15-40pm 90g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The residue was purified by achiral supercritical fluid chromatography (2-ethylpyridine 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 85% C02, 15%
MeOH, 0.3% isopropylamine). The resulting residue was purified by chiral supercritical fluid chromatography (CHIRALPAK AD-H 5pm 250x20mm; mobile phase: 55% C02, 45% iPrOH, 0.3% isopropylamine). The pure fractions were collected and the two enantiomers were evaporated to dryness.
The residue containing compound 46 (R or S) was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 343 mg (17%) of compound 46 (MP: 154°C (DSC); [a]D: + 1 15.9° (c: 0.25 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)).
The residue containing compound 47 (S or R) was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 338 mg (17%) of compound 47 (MP: 153°C (DSC); [a]D: - 1 17.6° (c: 0.26 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)).
Example B43
Preparation of compound 48
Figure imgf000217_0001
TFA (1 mL) was added to a solution of intermediate 42 (300 mg; 0.42 mmol) in DCM (20 mL). The resulting solution was stirred for 3 days. The solution was basified with ammonia in MeOH and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed phase chromatography (Hyperprep C18 HS BDS 100A 8mu (Shandon); mobile phase: gradient from 75% water + 0.2% TFA and 25% MeOH + 0.2% TFA to 100% MeOH + 0.2%TFA in 45min). The fractions containing the product were collected and concentrated. The water-layer was again purified by reverse phase chromatography (Hyperprep C18 HS BDS 100A 8mu (Shandon); mobile phase: 20 min 100% water and then a gradient to 100% MeOH in 30 min). The pure fractions were collected and concentrated to afford 0.14 g (66%) of compound 48 (.0.5 CF3COOH).
Example B44
a) Preparation of compound 49 and compound 49a
Compound 49a
Compound 49 (HCI salt) A mixture of intermediate 21 (0.3 g; 0.81 mmol), 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-piperazine (149 μΙ_; 1.22 mmol) and Et3N (169 μΐ; 1.22 mmol) in 1-butanol (5 mL) was heated at 100°C overnight. The mixture was poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was
evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (SiOH 15-40μιτι 30g; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (free base - compound 49a) was dissolved in EtOH and 200 pL of a 5N solution of HCI in iPrOH was added dropwise at 5°C. The hydrochloride salt was filtered, washed with DIPE and dried under vacuum at 60°C to give 127 mg of co H20) (MP: gum at 208°C (Kofler)).
b) Compound 63
Figure imgf000218_0001
was prepared according to an analogous protocol: A mixture of intermediate 21 (300 mg; 0.81 mmol) and morpholine (714 μΙ_; 8.1 1 mmol) in THF (7 mL) was heated at 60°C overnight. The mixture was poured onto water. DCM was added and the organic layer was washed (brine), dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40 Mm; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (150 mg) was crystallized from DIPE/pentane (50/50). The precipitate was filtered, dried under vacuum, yielding 83 mg (24%) of compound 63 (MP: 1 14°C (Kofler)).
c) Compound 64
Figure imgf000218_0002
was prepared according to an analogous protocol: A mixture of intermediate 21 (300 mg; 0.81 1 mmol), 1 - methylpiperazine (135 μΙ_; 1.217 mmol) and Et3N (169 μ!_; 1.22 mmol) in 1-butanol (6 mL) was heated at 100°C overnight. The mixture was poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40pm; mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue (200 mg) was crystallized from DIPE. The precipitate was filtered, dried under vacuum yielding 105 mg (30%) of compound 64 (M °C (Kofler)).
d) Compound 65
Figure imgf000219_0001
was prepared according to an analogous protocol: NaH (44 mg; 1.08 mmol) was added at 0°C to a solution of ethyl 4- methyl-5-imidazoecarboxylate (167 mg; 1.08 mmol) in DMF (2 mL). The r.m. was stirred for 30 min at 0°C and a solution of intermediate 21 (200 mg; 0.54 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added. The r.m. was heated at 65°C overnight and partitioned between water and EtOAc. The organic layer was washed twice with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue (0.48 g, orange oil) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.4% NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated. The resulting residue (0.187 g, yellow oil, 71 %) was precipitated from a 1/1 mixture of Et20/ACN to afford 0.152 g (yellow solid, 58%) of compound 65 (MP: 138°C (kofler)).
Example B45
Preparation of compound 50
Figure imgf000219_0002
A mixture of intermediate 21 (200 mg; 0.54 mmol), 1 ,2,4-triazole (56 mg; 0.81 mmol), 1 ,2,4-triazole sodium derivative (74 mg; 0.81 mmol) and Et3N (1 13 pL; 0.81 mmol) in 1 - butanol (5 mL) was heated at 100°C overnight. The r.m. was poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: gradient from 0% MeOH, 95% DCM, 5% EtOAc to 2% MeOH, 98% DCM, 0% EtOAc). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness to give 79 mg (36%) of compound 50 (MP: 168°C (Kofler)). Example B46
Preparation of compound 51 a and compound 51
Figure imgf000220_0001
A mixture of intermediate 45 (220 mg; 0.35 mmol) and hydrazine monohydrate (77 μΙ_; 2.47 mmol) in EtOH (4 ml.) was refluxed overnight. The r.m. was cooled down to r.t., poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5μηη 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.2% NH4OH, 88% DCM, 12% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were
concentrated and the residue was crystallized from ACN and Et20 to give after drying 84 mg of a fraction A which was not pure enough. This fraction was purified again by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.2% NH4OH, 88% DCM, 2% MeOH). The fractions containing the product were concentrated. The resulting residue was crystallized from ACN and Et20 to give after drying 83 mg of fraction B which again was not pure enough.
This last fraction was purified again by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1 .3% NH4OH, 87% DCM, 13% MeOH). The pure fractions were concentrated to give an intermediate residue (0.05 g compound 51 a, free base) which was dissolved in DCM; HCI 4N in 1 ,4-dioxane was added. The resulting solution was concentrated. The hydrochloride salt was taken up by Et20, filtered and dried to give 20 mg (10%) of compound 51 (.1.84 HCI; MP: 170°C (gum, Kofler)). Example B47
Preparation of compound 53 and compound 54
Figure imgf000221_0001
This reaction was performed on 2g of intermediate 3 but in 2 times respectively on a 1 g scale of intermediate 3. The r.m. were combined for the work-up.
NaH 60% in oil (223 mg; 5.58 mmol) was added portionwise at 5°C under N2 flow to a solution of intermediate 3 (1 g; 2.79 mmol) in DMF (30 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 5°C for 1 h, then 1.2-epoxy-3.3.3-trifluoropropane (0.36 mL) was added drop wise. The r.m. was heated at 70°C for 4 h. The r.m. were combined and the resulting mixture was poured onto water and extracted with EtOAc and filtered through a pad of Celite®. The organic layer was washed twice with water, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm 450g ; mobile phase: 97% DCM, 3% MeOH, 0.5% NH4OH) yielding 1.2 g (46%). The residue was purified by achiral supercritical fluid chromatography (amino 6μιη 150x21.2mm; mobile phase: 85% C02, 15% MeOH) yielding 1.06 g (40%) of residue. This residue was purified by chiral supercritical fluid chromatography
(chiralpak® AD-H 5μηι 250x20mm; mobile phase: 60% C02, 40% MeOH, 0.3% isopropylamine). The pure fractions were collected and the two enantiomers were evaporated to dryness. The residue containg compound 53 was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 473 mg (19%) of compound 53 (R or S; MP: 21 1 °C (DSC); [a]D: + 196.3° (c: 0.27 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)). The residue containing compound 54 was taken up with Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 471 mg (18%) of compound 54 (S or R; MP: 210°C (DSC); [a]D: - 195.8° (c: 0.28 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)). Example B48
Preparation of compound 55
Figure imgf000222_0001
A mixture of intermediate 53 (240 mg; 0.66 mmol), tosylmethyl isocyanide (142 mg; 0.73 mmol) and K2C03 (1 10 mg; 0.79mmol) in MeOH (7 ml_) was refluxed for 3 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10μηη 60g; mobile phase: 0.1 % NH4OH, 99% DCM, 1 % MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 139 mg (52%) of compound 55 (MP: 152°C (DSC)).
Example B49
Preparation of compound 56
H
Figure imgf000222_0002
TBAF (1 M in THF) (1.12 ml_; 1.12 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of intermediate 54 (570 mg; 1.02 mmol) in THF (1 1 ml_) at r.t. The r.m. was stirred for 2 h, poured onto aq. K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica δμητι 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness to give, after crystallization from Et20 and drying, 199 mg (44%) of compound 56 (MP: 143°C (Kofler)). Example B50
Preparation of compound 57
Figure imgf000223_0001
A mixture of intermediate 20 (420 mg; 0.705 mmol), phthalimide (207 mg; 1.41 mmol) and Na2C03 (187 mg; 1.76 mmol) in NMP (3.5 mL) was heated at 130°C for 24 h. The r.m. was cooled down to r.t., poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with DCM. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 240 mg (62%) of compound 57 (MP: 222 °C (Kofler)).
Compound 78
Figure imgf000223_0002
was prepared by using an analogous reaction protocol as described for compound 57 (starting from intermediate 1 1 ).
Example B51
Preparation of compound 85
Figure imgf000223_0003
A mixture of intermediate 47 (300 mg; 0.76 mmol), triethylorthoacetate (2.8 mL; 15.25 mmol) and concentrated H2S04 (20 μΙ_) was heated at 80°C for 5 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t. and the precipitate was filtered. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The resulting mixture was basified with a 10% aq. solution of K2C03. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιτι 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 80 mg (25%) of an intermediate fraction which was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered, dried under vacuum to afford 32 mg (10%) of compound 85 (MP: 134°C (Kofler)).
Example B52
Preparation of compound 80 and compound 81
Figure imgf000224_0001
In a pressure vessel, intermediate 20 (0.8 g; 1.34 mmol), methyl amine 33% weight solution in absolute EtOH (6.7 ml; 13.43 mmol), K2C03 (930 mg; 6.7 mmol) were mixed in ACN (1 1 ml_). The r.m. was heated at 80°C overnight.
The r.m. was partitioned between DCM/MeOH (90/10) and water. The organic layer was separated, dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.5% NH40H) to give 300 mg (42%, yellow solid) of compound 81 (MP: 194°C, Kofler) and 150 mg of fraction A (not pure enough). Fraction A was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10μιτι 60g; mobile phase: 70% DCM, 30% EtOAc). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give 130 mg of a residue which was taken up with Et20. The resulting precipitate was filtered, dried to give 123 mg (16%; yellow solid) of compound 80 (MP: 214°C Kofler).
reparation of compound 84 and intermediate 75
Figure imgf000225_0001
A mixture of intermediate 5b (700 mg; 1.48 mmol), 4-(aminomethyl)piperidine (337 mg; 2.95 mmol) and Cs2C03 (962 mg; 2.95 mmol) in DMF (28 mL) was heated at 100°C for 3 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., poured onto iced water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιη 300g; mobile phase: gradient from 1 % NH4OH, 90% DCM, 10% MeOH to 1.5% NH4OH, 85% DCM, 15% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness to give respectively 365 mg (48%) of intermediate 75 and 200 mg (31 %) of an oily residue which was crystallized from ACN. The precipitate was filtered off and dried, yielding 160 mg (25%) of compound 84 (MP: 159X DSC).
Example B54
Preparation of compound 186
Figure imgf000225_0002
TBAF 1 M in THF (0.1 18 mL; 0.1 18 mmol) was added drop wise to a solution of intermediate 33 (60 mg; 0.091 mmol) in THF (1.325 mL) at room temperature and the reaction mixture was stirred at this temperature for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was quenched with water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness.
The crude residue (77g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Stability Silica 5μιη 150x30. Omm, Mobile phase: Gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.7% NH4OH, 93% DCM, 7% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding 24mg of compound 186 (48%).
C. Conversion reactions
Conversion C1
Preparation of compound 2
Figure imgf000226_0001
A suspension of compound 1 (0.4 g; 1.01 mmol), 2-bromopyrimidine (0.1 g; 0.63 mmol) and Et3N (1.4 ml_; 10.09 mmol) in DMSO (5 mL) was degassed under N2. PdCI2(PPh3)2 (0.089 g; mg; 0.126 mmol) and Cul (0.012 g; 0.063 mmol) were added and the r.m. was stirred for 30 min at 90 °C. Subsequently, the mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The resulting mixture was filtered through a pad of celite®
(diatomaceous earth), and was then washed with brine and water (twice). The organic layer was dried (MgS04), filtered and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (380 mg) was purified by silica gel chromatography on (Spherical Silica 5 μΜ, 150 x 30.0 mm; mobile phase gradient from 0 % NH4OH, 100 % DCM, 0 % MeOH to 0.7 % NH4OH, 93 % DCM, 7 % MeOH). The desired fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.138 g) was crystallized from Et20 to yield 0.109 g (36%) of compound 2 (MP: 184°C (DSC)). Conversion C2
Preparation of compound 17
Figure imgf000227_0001
A mixture of compound 16 (1.6 g; 2.9 mmol) in HCI 3N (15 mL) and MeOH (30 mL) was refluxed for 5 h. The r.m. was cooled to 0°C, neutralized with a saturated solution of NaHC03. The aq. layer was extracted 3x with DCM. The combined organic layer were dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 20-45pm 450 g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness and the residue (1.08g) was crystallized from ACN/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 0.88 g (67%) of compound 17 (MP: 144°C (DSC)).
Conversion C3
Preparation of compound 66
Figure imgf000227_0002
Compound 128 (0.08 g; 0.15 mmol) was treated with a pre-cooled solution of TFA (1 ml) in DCM (3 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min at r.t. Subsequently, the mixture was diluted with DCM, cooled in an ice-bath and quenched with 10% aq. K2C03. The reaction mixture was stirred for 15 minutes. The organic layer was decanted, dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated to dryness. Yield: 0.07 g of compound 66.
Alternatively, compound 66 may be prepared by analogy to the protocol described in Example B31.
Conversion C4
Preparation of compound 67a and compound 67
Figure imgf000228_0001
TFA (2 mL) was added to a pre-cooled (5°C) solution of compound 147 (149 mg; 0.26 mmol) in DCM (3 mL). The r.m. was allowed to warm to r.t. and stirred for 18 h. The r.m. was diluted with DCM and basified with a 10% solution of K2C03 aq.. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5μιη 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 2% NH4OH, 80% DCM, 20% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (compound 67a as free base; 80 mg; 65%) was dissolved in EtOH. The solution was cooled in an ice bath and an excess of HCI 4N in 1 ,4-dioxane was added followed by DIPE. The hydrochloride salt was filtered, washed with DiPE and dried at 50°C under vacuum overnight yielding 76 mg (49%) of compound 67 (.3.1 HCI .0.78 H20; MP:
193°C (gum, Kofler)).
Conversion C5
Preparation of compound 58a and compound 58
CI salt)
Figure imgf000228_0002
A solution of HCI 4M in 1 ,4-dioxane (0.6 mL; 2.4 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 100 (233 mg; 0.48 mmol) in 1 ,4-dioxane (8.5 mL) at r.t. The r.m. was stirred for 15 h, poured onto H20, basified with K2C03 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιτι 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM 0% MeOH 0% NH4OH to 95% DCM 5% MeOH 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to afford 250 mg of a fraction A not pure enough. Fraction A was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH 15-40μιη 30g; mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM, 0% MeOH, 0% NH4OH to 95% DCM, 5% MeOH, 0.1 % NH4OH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to afford 199 mg of a fraction B (compound 58a; free base) which was dissolved in iPrOH and HCI (6N to 8N in iPrOH) was added. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and evaporated to dryness. The resulting salt was crystallized from Et20, filtered and dried to give 1 13 mg (50%) of compound 58 (.1.25 HCI .0.36 iPrOH; MP : degradation at 99X (Kofler)).
Conversion C6
a) Preparation of compound 59
Figure imgf000229_0001
A mixture of compound 157 (770 mg; 1.23 mmol), in HCI 12N (2 mL) and MeOH (25 mL) was refluxed for 5 h. The r.m. was cooled in an ice bath and basified with a 10% solution of K2C03 aq. The aq. layer was extracted 3 times with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH to 1.4% NH4OH, 86% DCM, 14% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (318 mg; 53%) was crystallized from ACN/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered off and dried yielding 284 mg (47%) of compound 59 (MP: 1 1 1 °C (Kofler)).
b) Preparation of compound 68
Figure imgf000229_0002
Acetyl chloride (35.6 pL; 0.50 mmol) was added dropwise at r.t. to a mixture of compound 59 (231 mg; 0.47 mmol), DMAP (1 1 mg; 0.0951 mmol) and Et3N (99 pL; 0.714 mmol) in DCM (8 mL). The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 1 h, poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Stability Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 88% DCM, 12% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The oily residue (150mg; 60%) was crystallized from ACN/DIPE. The precipitate was filtered off and dried yielding 130 mg (52%) of compound 68 (MP: 167°C (DSC)).
Conversion C7
a) Preparation of compound 69
Figure imgf000230_0001
A mixture of compound 42 (965 mg; 2.23 mmol) in NaOH 3M (4 mL) and THF (3 mL) was stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The r.m. was poured onto a 10% aq. NH4CI and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken up with ACN. The precipitate was filtered, washed with ACN, then Et20 and dried yielding 780 mg (87%) compound 69 (MP: 172°C DSC). b Preparation of compound 70, compound 71 and compound 72
Figure imgf000230_0002
A mixture of compound 69 (675 mg; 1.67 mmol), iodomethane (1 15 pL; 1.84 mmol) and K2C03 (464 mg; 1.84 mmol in ACN (20 mL) was heated at 85°C for 2 h. The r.m. was cooled to r.t., diluted with DCM and poured onto water. The organic layer was decanted, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel on (Spherical Silica δμητι 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0% NH4OH, 100% DCM, 0% MeOH to 0.3% NH4OH, 97% DCM, 3% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness yielding fractions A, B, C:
285 mg (40%, oily residue) of fraction A which was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 175 mg (25%) of compound 70 (MP: 129°C, DSC).
140 mg (20%, oily residue) of fraction B which was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 1 15 mg (16%) of compound 71 (MP: 140°C, DSC).
60 mg of an impure fraction C. This residue was purified by achiral Super critical fluid chromatography (2-ethylpyridine 6pm 150x21.2mm; mobile phase 0.3% isopropylamine, 88% C02, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 32 mg (4.5%) of compound 72 (MP:
169°C, DSC).
Conversion C8
Preparation of compound 73
Figure imgf000231_0001
Potassium ieri-butoxide (71 mg; 0.63 mmol) and 18-crown-6 (15 mg; 0.6 mmol) were added at r.t. to a mixture of compound 36 (200 mg; 0.5 mmol) in a mixture of cyclohexane (3.6 mL) and DMSO (1.8 mL). lodomethane (91 pL; 1.47 mmol) was added dropwise and the r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 1 h. The mixture was poured onto ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated until dryness. The residue (200 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and evaporated until dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20 and dried to give 133 mg (65%) of compound 73 (MP: 1 10°C (Kofler)).
Conversion C9
Preparation of compound 74
Figure imgf000232_0001
Compound 1 10 (188 mg; 0.43 mmol) was diluted in 1 ,4-dioxane (7.5 mL) and water (1.7 mL). Then, TFA (0.1 mL) was added and the mixture was refluxed for 2 h. The r.m. was poured onto ice-saturated aq. NaHC03. The aq. layer was extracted twice with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue (orange oil, 210 mg) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase: gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 1.4% NH4OH, 86% DCM, 14% MeOH). The pure fractions were mixed and concentrated to give an intermediate residue (1 18 mg, orange oil) which was taken up with ACN.
Filtration and drying of the precipitate gave 89 mg (45%; yellow solid) of compound 74 (MP: 210°C (Kofler)).
Conversion C10
Preparation of compound 75
Figure imgf000232_0002
NaH 60% in oil (1 14 mg; 2.84 mmol) was added at 0°C under N2 flow to a solution of compound 53 (267 mg; 0.57 mmol) in THF (8 mL). The r.m. was stirred at 0°C for 1 h, then acetyl chloride (0.4 mL; 5.68 mmol) was added. The r.m. was heated at 50°C overnight. The solution was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 283 mg (97%) of compound 75 (R or S; MP: 180°C DSC; [a]D: + 79.4° (c: 0.33 w/v%, DMF, 20°C).
Conversion C1
Preparation of compound 76a and compound 76 compound 76a
compound 76 (HCI salt)
Figure imgf000233_0001
NaH 60% in oil (32 mg; 0.806 mmol) was added at OX under N2 flow to a solution of compound 46 (90 mg; 0.202 mmol) in THF (4 ml_). The r.m. was stirred at 0°C for 30 min and acetic anhydride (76μΙ_; 0.81 mmol) was added. The r.m. was refluxed for 4 h. Then acetyl chloride (72 μΙ_; 1 mmol) was added. The r.m. was stirred at r.t. for 2 days. The solution was poured into water and EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical silica 5μιη 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 71 % heptane, 28% EtOAc, 1 % MeOH to 0% heptane, 80% EtOAc, 20% MeOH).
The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (compound 76a; free base) (63 mg; 64%) was dissolved in Et20 and the solution was cooled at 0°C. A solution of HCI in 1 ,4-dioxane (2eq, 4M) was added dropwise and the r.m. was stirred at 0°C overnight. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 45 mg (39%) of compound 76 (.1.44 HCI .0.8 H20 .0.24 C4H802) (MP: 80°C gum Kofler) ([a]D: + 44.2° (c: 0.19 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)).
Conversion C12
Preparation of compound 77
Figure imgf000233_0002
A solution of K2C03 (148 mg; 1.07 mmol) in water (0.56 ml.) was added to a solution of compound 167 (270 mg; 0.53 mmol) in MeOH (2.1 ml_). The r.m. was stirred for 3 h at r.t., poured onto water and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated till dryness. The residue was purified by
chromatography over silica gel (Stability Silica 5pm 150x30.0mm; mobile phase:
gradient from 0.2% NH4OH, 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 0.8% NH4OH, 92% DCM, 8% MeOH). The pure fractions were evaporated till dryness. The residue (compound 77a; free base) (150 mg; 61 %) was dissolved in DCM and a solution of HCI 5-6N in isopropanol was added. The resulting hydrochloride salt was crystallized from Et20, filtered and dried yielding 126 mg (42%) of compound 77 (.2.06 HCI .0.3 H20 .0.24 C3H80; MP: 150°C gum, Kofler).
Conversion C13
Preparation of compound 79
Figure imgf000234_0001
Hydrazine monohydrate (640 μΙ_; 10.49 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 78 (800 mg; 1.5 mmol) in EtOH (40 mL). The mixture was heated to reflux overnight, cooled to r.t, poured into H20 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: 0.4% NH4OH, 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The pure fractions were collected and evaporated to dryness. The residue (285 mg; 47%) was crystallized from ACN/Et20. The precipitate was filtered and dried yielding 210 mg (35%) of compound 79 (MP: 106°C DSC).
Conversion C14
Preparation of compound 82 and compound 83
Figure imgf000234_0002
NaH (24 mg; 0.6 mmol) was added portionwise at 0°C to compound 41 (220 mg; 0.54 mmol) and iodometane (37 μΙ_; 0.6 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The mixture was refluxed overnight in a sealed tube, poured into ice and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered and evaporated until dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Spherical SiOH 10pm 60g; mobile phase: 98% DCM, 2% EtOAc). The pure fractions were evaporated until dryness to give 163 mg (72%) of compound 82 (MP: 143°C, Kofler) and 36 mg (16%) of compound 83 (MP: 168°C, Kofler).
Conversion C15
Figure imgf000235_0001
Preparation of compound 189 . 1.75 HC1
HCI 4N in dioxane (0.484 mL; 1 .94 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 188 (200 mg; 0.387 mmol) in dioxane (6.86 ml) and water (1 mL) at room temperature. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 100°C then, at room temperature for 24 h. The mixture was poured into ice, basified with solid K2C03 and extracted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered off and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.34 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-40pm 30g; mobile phase: 0.5% NH4OH, 95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The product fractions were mixed and the solvent was evaporated to give: 0.165 g of an intermediate fraction. 4N HCI in dioxane was added to this fraction and the hydrochloride salt was crystallized from acetone and Et20, then filtered and dried to afford 0.151 g of compound 189 (74%). MP: 145°C (gum, kofler).
The following compounds were prepared according to reaction protocols of one of the above Examples using alternative starting materials as appropriate.
In the table CoX (or BX) indicates that the preparation of this compound is described in Conversion X (or Method BX) or that this compound is prepared according to
Conversion X (or Method BX).
As understood by a person skilled in the art, compounds synthesised using the protocols as indicated may exist as a solvate e.g. hydrate, and/or contain residual solvent or minor impurities. Compounds isolated as a salt form, may be integer stoichiometric i.e. mono- or di-salts, or of intermediate stoichiometry.
Table A1
Figure imgf000236_0001
O
Co.85;B51
Figure imgf000237_0001
Figure imgf000238_0001
Figure imgf000239_0001
Figure imgf000240_0001
Co. 105; B49 -240-
Figure imgf000241_0001
Figure imgf000242_0001
Figure imgf000243_0001
Figure imgf000244_0001
Figure imgf000245_0001
Figure imgf000246_0001
-246-
Figure imgf000247_0001
Figure imgf000248_0001
Figure imgf000249_0001
as a free base and as HCl salt
Co. 170 (. 2.94 HCl . 0.64 H20 . 0.4 C6Hi4Q) and Co. 170a; free baseB7
Figure imgf000250_0001
Figure imgf000251_0001
Figure imgf000252_0001
Figure imgf000253_0001
Figure imgf000254_0001
as a
HC1 salt
Co. 189; .1.75 HC1; C15
Analytical Part LC/GC/NMR
General procedure A
The LC measurement was performed using a UPLC (Ultra Performance Liquid
Chromatography) Acquity (Waters) system comprising a binary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 40°C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 130 °C on the Quattro (triple quadrupole mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx data system. Method 1
In addition to general procedure A: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 pm, 2.1 x 100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.35 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95 % 7 mM ammonium acetate / 5 % acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100 % acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 90 % A and 10 % B (hold for 0.5 minutes) to 8 % A and 92 % B in 3.5 minutes, hold for 2 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.5 min, hold for 1.5 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μΙ was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.
Method 2
In addition to general procedure A: Reversed phase UPLC was carried out on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18 column (1.7 pm, 2.1 x 100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 95 % 7 mM ammonium acetate / 5 % acetonitrile; mobile phase B: 100 % acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 84.2 % A and 15.8 % B (hold for
0.49 minutes) to 10.5 % A and 89.5 % B in 2.18 minutes, hold for 1.94 min and back to the initial conditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μΙ was used. Cone voltage was 20V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.
General procedure B
The LC measurement was performed using an Acquity UPLC (Waters) system comprising a binary pump, a sample organizer, a column heater (set at 55 °C), a diode- array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below. Flow from the column was split to a MS spectrometer. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.18 seconds using a dwell time of 0.02 seconds. The capillary needle voltage was 3.5 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 140 °C. Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass
MassLynx-Openlynx data system.
Method 3
In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase UPLC (Ultra Performance Liquid Chromatography) was carried out on a bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid (BEH) C18 column (1 .7 μιη, 2.1 x 50 mm; Waters Acquity) with a flow rate of 0.8 ml/min. Two mobile phases (25 mM ammonium acetate in H20/acetonitrile 95/5; mobile phase B: acetonitriie) were used to run a gradient condition from 95 % A and 5 % B to 5 % A and 95 % B in 1.3 minutes and hold for 0.3 minutes. An injection volume of 0.5 μΙ was used. Cone voltage was 30 V for positive ionization mode and 30 V for negative ionization mode.
General procedure C
The HPLC measurement was performed using an Alliance HT 2795 (Waters) system comprising a quaternary pump with degasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at a temperature of 30°C. Flow from the column was split to a MS spectrometer. The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source. The capillary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature was maintained at 100 °C on the LCT (Time of Flight Zspray mass spectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Data acquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx- Openlynx data system. Method 4
In addition to the general procedure C: Reversed phase HPLC was carried out on a Supelco Ascentis Express C18 column (2.7 μηι, 3.0 x 50 mm) with a flow rate of 0.7 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: 100 % 7 mM ammonium acetate; mobile phase B: 100 % acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 80 % A and 20 % B (hold for 0.5 minute) to 5% A and 95 % B in 2.5 minutes, hold for 4.5 minutes and back to the initial conditions in 1.5 minutes and hold for 1 min. An injection volume of 5 Dl was used. Cone voltage was 20 V for positive and negative ionization mode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.4 seconds using an interscan delay of 0.3 seconds.
DSC:
The melting points (MP) were taken with a kofler hot bar. For a number of compounds, melting points (m.p.) were determined with a DSC1 Star6 System (Mettler-Toledo). Melting points were measured with a temperature gradient of 10 °C/minute. Maximum temperature was 350 °C. Values are peak values."
OR:
Optical Rotation was measured with a polarimeter 341 Perkin Elmer.
The polarized light was passed through a sample with a path length of 1 decimeter and a sample concentration of 0.250 to 0.500 gram per 100 milliliters,
[a] d T : (red rotation x 100) / (1.000 dm x concentration).
d is sodium D line (589 nanometer).
T is the temperature (°C)
Table A2 ; physic-chemical data
Comp. Melting Point (°C) (Kofler(K) HPLC MS LC/GC/MS
No. or DSC) Rt M+ (H+) method
(min)
63 1 14 K 4.35 421 1
20 105 K 4.89 465 1
64 92 K 4.15 434 1
86 181 DSC 4.57 451 1
22 166 K 4.15 440 1
87 144 K 4.83 456 1
88 234 DSC 4.33 452 1 Comp. Melting Point (°C) ( ofler( ) HPLC MS LC/GC/MS
No. or DSC) Rt M+ (H+) method
(min)
37 125 DSC 4.48 51 1 1
89 105 DSC 4.38 413 1
90 162 DSC 4.6 498 1
58 134 K 4.16 418 1
91 1 16 K 4.82 443 1
39 166 DSC 3.6 402 1
92 155 K 4.8 497 1
93 176 K 4.18 419 1
94 185 DSC 4.0 428 1
28 135 DSC 4.5 473 1
18 132 DSC 4.4 416 1
95 160 DSC 4.8 402 1
96 112 K 3.94 492 1
49 Gum at 208 K 3.8 464 1
97 148 DSC 4.8 419 1
98 213 DSC 4.3 434 1
99 155 K 4.72 477 1
32a 223 DSC 4.1 416 1
32 223 DSC 4.13 416 1
101 140 K 4.59 487 1
102 260 K 3.97 435 1
103 141 DSC 4.8 415 1
58 Degradation at 99 K 4.03 402 1
31 107 DSC 4.91 416 1
62 139 K 4.82 416 1
61 160 K 3.91 431 1
30 113 K 4.26 416 1
50 168 4.32 403 1
69 173 DSC 3.85 403 1
55 152 DSC 4.2 403 1
36 Gum at 66 K 4.14 401 1
73 1 10 K 4.4e 415 1
Int. 55 Gum at 98 K 4.23 489 1
40 178 DSC 3.71 447 1
70 129 DSC 4.45 417 1
71 141 DSC 4.02 417 1
72 169 DSC 4.19 417 1
24 128 DSC 4.01 516 1
60 175 DSC 4.23 416 1
56 143 K 3.96 445 1
82 143 K 4.21 418 1
83 168 K 4.32 417 1 Comp. Melting Point (°C) ( ofler(K) HPLC MS LC/GC/MS
No. or DSC) Rt M+ (H+) method
(min)
41 216 K 2.94 404 1
23 60 K 4.55 437 1
21 136 DSC 4.08 416 1
65 125 DSC 4.35 488 1
104 141 DSC 4.51 417 1
105 154 K 3.71 432 1
106 160 DSC 3.07 418 1
17 144 DSC 2.9 459 1
14 68 K 3.15 501 1
81 182 K 3.72 531 1
80 214 K 4.22 575 1
25 176 DSC 3.41 527 1
109 172 DSC 3.38 543 1
1 10 169 K 3.44 430 1
111 195 DSC 3.77 433 1
1 12 150 DSC 0.91 417
74 210 K 2.83 448 1
113 98 K 3.99 540 1
114 127 K 3.57 4745 1
115 166 DSC 1.05 431 3
116 188 K 1.02 446 3
1 17 nd nd nd nd nd
51 170 K 2.91 494 1
1 19 84 DSC 4.98 412 1
120 124 DSC 3.69 402
121 149 DSC 3.73 442 1
122 Gum at 67 K 4.06 555 1
48 184 K 0.8 501
11 158 K 3.21 403 1
9 151 DSC 3.2 403 1
123 103 K 2.72 503 1
12 118 DSC 2.99 444 1
124 - 1.02 502
10 174 K 2.99 444 1
33 110 K 2.82 517 1
125 143 K 4.41 546 1
126 130 DSC 2.85 531 1
127 - - 5.02 627 1
6 135 DSC 4 419 1
3 145 K 4.15 433 1
128 213 K 4.09 532 1
66 137 K 3.12 432 1 Comp. Melting Point (°C) (Kofler(K) HPLC MS LC/GC/MS
No. or DSC) Rt M+ (H+) method
(min)
8 200 K 3.24 446 1
5 186 DSC 4.19 500 1
129 165 K 4.02 527 1
79 106 DSC 2.92 404 1
44 Gum at 64 K 2.36 588 1
130 161 DSC 2.95 545 1
131 155 K 3.38 558.6 1
43 190 DSC 3.15 530 1
132 Gum at 50 K 2.39 588 1
133 172 K 4.12 528 1
134 158 K 3.36 432 1
135 179 DSC 3.45 529 1
136 175 K 3.88 451 1
137 172 K 3.76 573 1
138 - 2.86 531 1
139 - 3.22 532 1
141 182 K 3.41 448 1
142 155 K 3.71 435 1
143 Gum at 84 K 2.83 473 1
144 128 K 4.42 516 1
145 130 K 4.58 532 1
26 96 K 4.15 529 1
146 188 K 2.54 544 1
84 159 DSC 2.61 438 1
148 87 K 3.42 598 1
149 115 K 3.64 435 1
150 95 K 3.94 627 1
151 133 DSC 3.51 446 1
67 193 K 2.39 479 1
38 215 K 2.76 422 1
156 80 K 3.43 586
158 138 K 3.72 577 1
159 176 K 2.48 550 1
160 149 K 2.74 523 1
161 185 K 2.35 479 1
59 11 1 K 2.66 486 1
19 193 K 2.81 488 2
163 160 K 2.61 501 2
35 153 DSC 2.74 600 2
165 171 DSC 2.27 487 2
166 194 K 2.9 486 2
167 56 K 2.41 505 2
Figure imgf000261_0001
OR :
Compound 109: [a]d: - 30.0° (c: 0.28 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)
Compound 52: [a]d - 41.6° (c: 0.20 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 76: [a]d + 44.21 ° (c: 0.19 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 75: [a]d + 79.4° (c: 0.33 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 46: [a]d: + 1 15.9° (c: 0.25 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 47: [a]d - 1 17.6° (c: 0.26 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 53: [a]d: + 196.2° (c: 0.27 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) Compound 54: [a]d - 195.8° (c: 0.28 w/v%, DMF, 20°C) - Compound 45: [a]d: - 79.5° (c: 0.44 w/v%, DMF, 20°C)
The below NMR experiments were carried out using a Bruker Avance 500 and a Bruker Avance DRX 400 spectrometers at ambient temperature, using internal deuterium lock and equipped with reverse triple-resonance(1H, 13C,15N TXI) probe head for the 500MHz and with reverse double-resonance (1H, 13C, SEI) probe head for the 400MHz.
Chemical shifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm).
Compound 8
1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.08 (m, 3 H), 7.95 (br. s., 1 H), 7.84 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.40 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.34 (br. s., 1 H), 6.95 (m, 2 H), 6.54 (s, 2 H), 6.48 (s, 1 H), 4.20 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2 H), 3.76 (s, 6 H), 3.73 (s, 3 H), 3.31 - 3.40 (m, 1 H), 3.16 (m, 2 H), 1 .25 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 6 H) Compound 10
H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.57 (s, 1 H), 9.41 (s, 1 H), 9.05 (br.s, 2 H), 8.98 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1 H), 8.90 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.88 - 7.97 (m, 2 H), 7.48 (dd, J = 9.5, 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.42 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.56 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 2 H), 6.50 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.23 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2 H), 3.77 (s, 6 H), 3.36 (spt, J = 6.6 Hz 1 H), 3.17 (m, 2 H), 1.25 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 6 H)
Compound 2
1H NMR (DMSO-d6 ,500MHz): δ (ppm) 9.46 (s, 1 H), 9.38 (s, 1 H), 8.71 - 8.77 (m, 3H), 8.64 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.95 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.60 (dd, J=7.9, 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.54 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.43 - 7.48 (m, 2H), 6.55 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 2H), 6.48 (s, 1 H), 5.03 (s, 2H), 3.76 (s, 6H).
Compound 17
1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.12 (s, 1 H), 8.86 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 8.26 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.77 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.27 (dd, J = 9.1 , 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.20 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.58 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 6.52 (s, 2 H), 6.46 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 2 H), 6.40 (s, 1 H), 3.88 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 3.74 (s, 6 H), 2.79 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.70 (spt, J = 6.6 Hz, 1 H), 1.71 (br. s., 1 H), 0.95 (d, J = 6.6 Hz, 6 H) Compound 14 1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.36 (s, 1 H), 8.90 (qt, J = 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 8.84 (s, 1 H), 8.82 (d, J =3.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.43 (d, J = 3.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.88 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.40 (dd, J = 9.1 , 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.36 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.51 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 2 H), 6.45 (s, 1 H), 3.87 - 3.96 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2 H), 3.75 (s, 6 H), 2.87 (d, J = 4.7 Hz, 3 H), 2.81 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2 H), 2.71 (spt, J = 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 1.78 (br. s., 1 H), 0.96 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 6 H)
Compound 12
1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.31 (s, 1 H), 8.78 (d, J = 5.7 Hz, 2 H), 8.23 (d, J = 5.7 Hz, 2 H), 7.88 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.41 (dd, J = 9.1 , 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.29 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.51 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 2 H), 6.44 (s, 1 H), 3.91 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 3.75 (s, 6 H), 2.81 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.70 (spt, J = 6.0 Hz, 1 H), 1.75 (br. s., 1 H), 0.95 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 6 H)
Compound 5
1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.04 (br. s., 1 H), 7.93 (br. s., 1 H), 7.80 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.33 (br. s., 1 H), 7.25 (dd, J = 9.5, 2.2 Hz, 2 H), 6.94 (m, 3 H), 6.42 - 6.49 (m, 3 H), 4.1 1 (m, 2 H), 3.93 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 3.75 (s, 6 H), 3.72 (s, 3 H) 3.14 - 3.21 (m, 2 H), 2.06 - 2.15 (m, 2 H) Compound 9
1H NMR (500MHz ,DMSO-d6) δ (ppm) 9.43 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1 H), 9.29 (s, 1 H), 8.72 (d, J = 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 8.62 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.86 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.60 (dd, J = 7.9, 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.41 (dd, J = 9.5, 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.34 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.50 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 2 H), 6.42 (s, 1 H), 4.95 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 1 H), 3.95 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2 H), 3.74 (s, 6 H), 3.68 (q, J = 5.7 Hz, 2 H)
Pharmacological part
Biological assays A
FGFR1 (enzymatic assay)
In a final reaction volume of 30 μΙ_, FGFR1 (h) (25 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3V04, 0,01 % Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μΜ ATP in the presence of compound (1 % DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value.
FGFR2 (enzymatic assay)
In a final reaction volume of 30 μΙ_, FGFR2 (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3V04> 0,01 % Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 0.4 μΜ ATP in the presence of compound (1 % DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31 .25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value.
FGFR3 (enzymatic assay)
In a final reaction volume of 30 μΙ_, FGFR3 (h) (40 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3V04, 0,01 % Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 25 μΜ ATP in the presence of compound (1 % DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. FGFR4 (enzymatic assay)
In a final reaction volume of 30 μΙ_, FGFR4 (h) (60 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3V04, 0,01 % Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μΜ ATP in the presence of compound (1 % DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P- Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value.
KDR (VEGFR2) (enzymatic assay)
In a final reaction volume of 30 μΙ_, KDR (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubated with 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0,1 mM Na3V04, 0,01 % Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 3 μΜ ATP in the presence of compound (1 % DMSO final). After incubation for 120 minutes at room temperature the reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P- Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nM SA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at room temperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer (TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measured afterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative Fluorescence Units). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. Ba/F3-FGFR1 (minus IL3 or plus IL3) (cellular proliferation assay)
In a 384 well plate
In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR1-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
In a 96 well plate ln a 96 well plate, 180 pi cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 Mg/ml Gentamycin) containing 10000 cells per well of Ba/F3- FGFR1-transfected cells were pipette and 20 μΙ of compound dilution in DMSO was added. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 40 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
Ba/F3-FGFR3 (minus IL3 or plus IL3) (cellular proliferation assay)
In a 384 well plate
In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR3-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 0 ng/ml murine IL3.
In a 96 well plate
In a 96 well plate, 180 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 10000 cells per well of Ba/F3- FGFR3-transfected cells were pipette and 20 pi of compound dilution in DMSO was added. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 40 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader. ln this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
Ba/F3-KDR (minus IL3 or plus IL3) (cellular proliferation assay)
In a 384 well plate
In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-KDR-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
In a 96 well plate
In a 96 well plate, 180 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 10000 cells per well of Ba/F3- KDR-transfected cells were pipette and 20 μΙ of compound dilution in DMSO was added. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 40 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
Ba/F3-Flt3 (minus IL3 or plus IL3) (cellular proliferation assay)
In a 384 well plate ln a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-Flt3-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
In a 96 well plate
In a 96 well plate, 180 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 10000 cells per well of Ba/F3- Flt3-transfected cells were pipette and 20 μΙ of compound dilution in DMSO was added. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 40 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K4Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.
In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value. As a counterscreen the same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murine IL3.
Ba/F3-FGFR4 (cellular proliferation assay)
In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayed before adding 50 μΙ cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10 % FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 pg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cells per well of Ba/F3-FGFR4-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubator at 37°C and 5 % C02. After 24 hours, 10 μΙ of Alamar Blue solution (0.5 mM K3Fe(CN)6, 0.5 mM K Fe(CN)6, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37°C and 5% C02 before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader. ln this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compound concentrations (range 10 μΜ to 0.1 nM) was determined and used to calculate an IC50 (M) and plC50 (-loglC50) value.
Data for the compounds of the invention in the above assays are provided in Table A3.
Table A3 (If data were generated multiple times for a compound or different batches were tested, average values are reported)
Figure imgf000270_0001
Figure imgf000271_0001
Figure imgf000272_0001
Figure imgf000273_0001
Figure imgf000274_0001
Figure imgf000275_0001
Figure imgf000276_0001
Figure imgf000277_0001
Figure imgf000278_0001
Figure imgf000279_0001
Figure imgf000280_0001
Biological Assays B
FGFR3, VEGFR2 and PDGFR in vitro Kinase Inhibitory Activity Assays Enzymes (from Upstate), prepared at 2x final concentration, were incubated with test compounds, biotinylated Flt3 substrate (biotin-VASSDNEYFYVDF) (Cell Signalling Technology Inc.) and ATP in the appropriate assay buffer (Table 1 ). The reaction was allowed to proceed for 3 hours (FGFR3), 1 hour (VEGFR2, PDGFR-beta) at room temperature on a plate shaker at 700 rpm before being stopped with 35 mM EDTA, pH 8 (FGFR3, VEGFR2) or 55 mM EDTA, pH 8 (PDGFR-beta). 5x detection mix (50mM
HEPES pH 7.5, 0.1 % BSA, 1 1.34 nM Eu-anti-pY (PY20) (PerkinElmer) 74 nM SA-XL665 (Cisbio) for FGFR3, 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 0.1 % BSA, 1 1 .34 nM Eu-anti-pY (PY20), 187.5 nM SA-XL665 for VEGFR2 and 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 0.1 % BSA, 1 1.34 nM Eu-anti-pY (PT66) (PerkinElmer), 375 nM SA-XL665 (Cisbio) for PDGFR-beta) was then added to each well and the plate sealed and incubated at room temperature for one hour on a plate shaker at 700 rpm. The plate was then read on a Packard Fusion plate reader or a BMG Pherastar both in TRF mode.
Table 1 : Final assay conditions for FGFR3, VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta assays
Figure imgf000281_0001
Kinase Assay buffers were:
A: 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0.01 % TritonX-100
B: 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCI2, 1 mM DTT, 0.01 % TritonX-100, 0.1 mM
Sodium orthovanadate
C: 20 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 10 mM MnCI2, 0.01 % Triton X-100, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Sodium orthovanadate
FGFR3 and VEGFR2 Data for the compounds of the invention in the above assays are provided in Table A3. Ba/F3-TEL-FGFR3 & Ba/F3 (WT) cell proliferation assays
Stably transfected Ba/F3-TEL-FGFR3 cells were plated out into black 96-well tissue culture plates with clear bottoms in RPMI medium containing 10% FBS and 0.25 mg/ml G418 at a density of 5 x 103 cells/well (200 μΙ per well). The parental wild-type Ba/F3 cells (DSMZ no.: ACC 300) were plated out into black 96-well tissue culture plates with clear bottoms in RPMI medium containing 10% FBS and 2 ng/ml mouse IL-3 (R&D Sysems) at a density of 2.5 x 103 cells/well (200 μΙ per well). Plates were placed in an incubator overnight before adding the compounds the following day. Dilutions of compounds were made in DMSO starting at 10 mM and were diluted into the wells to give a final DMSO concentration of 0.1 % in assay. Compounds were left on the cells for 72 hours before the plates were removed from the incubator and 20 μΙ of Alamar Blue™ (Biosource) was added to each well. Plates were placed in the incubator for 4-6 hours before reading plates at 535 nm (excitation) / 590 nm (emission) on a Fusion plate reader (Packard). Where inhibition is high an IC50 can be determined.

Claims

1 . A compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000283_0001
including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof, wherein
W is -N(R3)- or -C(R3aR3 )-; each R2 is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C1-4alkyi, C2-4alkenyl, C2-4alkynyl, C1-4alkoxy, hydroxyd^alkyl, hydroxyCi.4alkoxy, haloC^alkyl, halod.
4alkoxy, hydroxyhaloCi_4alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkoxy, Ci.4alkoxyCi-4alkyl, haloCi- 4alkoxyCi-4alkyl, C^alkoxyC-^alkyl wherein each Ci_4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, hydroxyhaloC^alkoxyC^alkyl, R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R13, C1_4alkoxy substituted with R13, C^alkoxy substituted with -C(=0)-R13, -C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with - NR7R8, C1-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR7R8, C^alkox substituted with -NR7R8, d. 4alkoxy substituted with -C(=0)-NR7R8, -NR7R8 and -C(=0)-NR7R8; or when two R2 groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form a radical of formula:
Figure imgf000283_0002
-X-CH=CH-; or
-X-CH=N-; wherein R17 represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and X represents O or S;
Y represents -CR18=N-OR19 or -E-D;
E represents a bond, -(CR R )„-, C2-4alkenediyl optionally substituted with R , C2- 4alkynediyl optionally substituted with R22, -CO-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-, -NR22- (CR22R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-NR22-, -0-(CR22R23)s-, -(CR2 R23)s-0-, -S(0)m-(CR22R23)s-,
(CR^R^)s-S(0)m-, -(CR^R^)s-CO-NR^-(CR^R'3)s- or -(CR^R'3)s-NR^-CO
(CR22R23)s-; D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyciic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyciic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1 , 2 or 3) R1 groups;
provided that when Y represents -E-D, and E represents a bond, then D does not
Figure imgf000284_0001
represent R wherein R1 represents hydrogen, C^alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, hydroxyCi_6alkyl, haloC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhalod ealkyl, cyanoC^alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C^alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, d-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-d- 6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d- 6alkyl, Ci.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2- NR14R15, d-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-d-6aikyl, d-6alkyl substituted with -NH- S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, d.6alkyl substituted with R6, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R6, hydroxyd_6alkyl substituted with R6, d.6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d-ealkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d- 6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2; and each R1a is independently selected from hydrogen, C1-4alkyl, hydroxyd-4alkyl, C -4alkyl substituted with amino or mono- or di(d- 4alkyl)amino or -NH(C3.8cycloalkyl), cyanod-4alkyl, d-4alkoxyd.4alkyl, and C1-4alkyl substituted with one or more fluoro atoms;
R1 represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, C1-6alkyl, d_6alkoxy, _c(=0)-0- Ci.6alkyl, C2- 4alkenyl, hydroxyd.6alkyl, haloC -6alkyl, hydroxyhaloCi.6alkyl, cyanoCi_4alkyl, ealkoxyC^ealkyl wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, -NR4R5, d_6alkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- CLealkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5, -C(=0)-NR R5, -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl-NR4R5, d_6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR4R5, -S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000284_0002
d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, Ci.6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12- S(=0)2-NR14R15, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with - C(=0)-R6, hydroxyC1-6alkyl substituted with R6, Chalky! substituted with -Si(CH3)3, d- 6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d_6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OC1.6alkyl)2; R3a represents -NR10R11, hydroxyl, d ^alkoxy, hydroxyCi_6alkoxy, C1-6alkoxy substituted with -NR10R11, C-|.6aIkyl, C2-6alkenyl, C2.6alkynyl, haloC1-6alkyl optionally substituted with
Figure imgf000285_0001
hydroxyC2.6alkenyl, hydroxyC2-6alkynyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, cyanod-6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1-6alkyl-0-C(=0)-, C1-6alkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC .6alkyl-C(=0)-, d ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1- 6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl substituted with d- 6alkoxy, C2-6alkynyl substituted with d-6alkoxy, C -6alkyl substituted with R9and optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d.6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d- 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, C2-6aIkenyl substituted with R9, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, C -6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2.6alkenyl substituted with - NR10R11, C2.6alkynyl substituted with -NR10R11, d-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and - NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, -d.6alkyl- C(R12)=N-0-R12, Ci.salkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with - O-C(=O)-NR10R11, -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-d- 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d ealkyl substituted with - NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13, C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d.6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2;
R3b represents hydrogen or hydroxyl; provided that if R3a represents -NR10R11, then R3b represents hydrogen; or
R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0, to form =NR10, to form cyclopropyl together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, to form =CH-C0-4alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000285_0002
R3°, or to form ring A is a monocyclic 5 to 7 membered saturated heterocycle containing one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heteroatom not being positioned in alpha position of the double bond, wherein ring A is optionally being substituted with cyano, C1_4a[kyl, hydroxyCi.4alkyl, H2N-Ci-4alkyl, (d-4alkyl)NH-d-4alkyl, (d-4alkyl)2N-d-4alkyl, halod-4alkyl)NH-d-4alkyl, d-4alkoxyd-4alkyl, -C(=0)-NH2, - C(=0)-NH(C1.4alkyl), -C(=0)-N(C1-4alkyl)2;
R3c represents hydrogen, hydroxyl, Ci_6alkoxy, R9, -NR10R11, cyano, -C(=0)-C1_6alkyl or -CH(OH)- C^alkyl;
R3 represents hydroxyl, C -6alkoxy, hydroxyCi.6alkoxy, C1-6alkoxy substituted with - NR10R11, C1-6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl, haloC^alkyl optionally substituted with -O-
Figure imgf000286_0001
hydroxyd ealkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1_6alkyl, hydroxyC2.6alkenyl, hydroxyC2-6alkynyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, cyanod-6alkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, d ealkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000286_0002
d ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-0-C1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with C1.6alkoxyC1.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-, d-ealkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000286_0003
d-ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1.
6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyi wherein each Ci_6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, C2-6alkenyl substituted with d- 6alkoxy, C2-6alkynyl substituted with Ci_6alkoxy, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9 and optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, d- 6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, d^alkenyl substituted with R9, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9, d-ealkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C2-6alkenyl substituted with - NR10R11, C2.6alkynyl substituted with -NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with hydroxyl and - NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, -d-ealkyl- C(R12)=N-0-R12, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d-ealkyl substituted with - O-C(=O)-NR10R11, -S(=0)2-d_6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR14R15, d-eaikyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-C1. 6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with - NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13, C1-6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(OH)2 or d_6alkyl substituted with -P(=0)(Od.6alkyl)2;
R4 and R5 each independently represent hydrogen, d_6alkyl, d_6alkyl substituted with - NR14R15, hydroxyd-6alkyl, halod-6alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^ealkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, - S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, -C(=0)-0- d-ealkyl, -C(=0)-R13, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000287_0001
C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod- 6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH- S(=0)2-NR14R15, R13 or C1-6alkyl substituted with R13;
R6 represents C3_8cycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S; said C3.
scycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1 , 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from cyano, C1-6alkyl, cyanoC1-6alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyd-6alkyl, halogen, haloC^alkyl, hydroxyhaloC^alkyl, C1-6alkoxy, d- 6alkoxyd_6alkyl, d.6alkyl-0-C(=0)-, -NR 4R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR 4R15, d.6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, -S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod. 6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-d.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-halod.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-NR 4R15, d-ealkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-halod- 6alkyl or d-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-NR14R15;
R7 and R8 each independently represent hydrogen, C1-6alkyl, hydroxyC -6alkyl, halod- 6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl or d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl;
R9 represents C3_8cycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said C3.8cycloalkyl, C3.8cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently being substituted with 1 , 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selected from =0, d.4alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyd_4alkyl, cyano, cyanoC1-4alkyl, d-4alkyl-0-C(=0)-, d-4alkyl substituted with d.4alkyl-0-C(=0)-, d.4alkyl-C(=0)-, d- 4alkoxyd- alkyl wherein each C1-4alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, halod-4alkyl, hydroxyhalod-4alkyl, -NR1 R15, -C(=0)-NR14R15, d-4alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, d-4alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, d.4alkoxy, -S(=0)2-d.4alkyl, -S(=0)2-halod.4alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-4alkyl substituted with - S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.4alkyl, C1-4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-haloC1_4alkyl, C1-4alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-NR1 R15, R13, - C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with R13, phenyl optionally substituted with R16, phenylC1-6alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionally substituted with R16, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R16;
or when two of the substituents of R9 are attached to the same atom, they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S;
R10 and R11 each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, Ci.6alkyl, cyanoC^alkyl, d.6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-NR14R15, halod- 6alkyl, hydroxyd^alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, C^alkoxy, d-6alkoxyd-6a' yl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, R6, d- 6alkyl substituted with R6, -C(=0)-R6, -C(=0)-d-6alkyl, -C(=0)-hydroxyC1.6alkyl, -C(=0)- haloC1.6alkyl,-C(=0)-hydroxyhaloC1.6alkyl, Ci-6alkyl substituted with -Si(CH3)3, -S(=0)2- C1-6alkyl, -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, -S(=0)2-NR14R15, Chalky! substituted with -S(=0)2-d- 6alkyl, d-6alkyl substituted with -S(=0)2-haloC1.6alkyl, d-ealkyl substituted with -S(=0)2- NR1 R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH-S(=0)2-C1.6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NH- S(=0)2-haloC _6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, or d_6alkyl substituted with - NH-S(=0)2-NR14R15;
R12 represents hydrogen or d_4alkyl optionally substituted with C1-4alkoxy; R13 represents C3.8cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said C3.8cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionally substituted with 1 , 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C1-6alkyl, haloCi_6alkyl, =0, cyano, - C(=0)-d_6alkyl, d-6alkoxy, or -NR 4R15;
R 4 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen, or haloC1-4alkyl, or d_4alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected from hydroxyl, d-4alkoxy, amino or mono-or di(C1-4alkyl)amino; R16 represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C -4alkyi, C1-4alkoxy, -NR14R15 or - C(=0)NR14R15;
R18 represents hydrogen, C -6 alkyl, C3.8 cycloalkyl, Ci.4alkyl substituted with C3-8 cycloalkyl;
R19 represents hydrogen; C1-6 alkyl; C3.8 cycloalkyl; C -6alkyl substituted with -O-R20; - (CH2)r-CN; -(CH2)r-CONR20R21; -(CH2)r1-NR20R21; -(CH2)r1-NR 0COR21 ; -(CH2)r1-NR20- (CH2)s-S02-R21; -(CH2)r1-NH-SO2-NR20R21 ; -(CH2)n-NR20CO2R21 ; -(CH2)r-SO2NR20R21; phenyl optionally substituted with 1 , 2 , 3, 4 or 5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C1-4alkyl, C1-4alkyloxy, cyano or amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heterocycle being optionally substituted with 1 , 2 , 3 or 4 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C -4alkyi, C^alkyloxy, cyano or amino; wherein said C1-6 alkyl and C3-8 cycloalkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or more R20 groups
R20 and R21 independently represent hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl, hydroxyd-ealkyl, -(CH2)n-0-C1- 6alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R20 and R21 can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6- membered ring which optionally contains a further heteroatom selected from O, S or N;
R22 and R23 independently represent hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl, or hydroxyC1-6alkyl; m independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2;
n independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
s independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
r independently represent an integer equal to 1 , 2, 3, or 4;
r1 independently represent an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4;
provided that when R3a and R3b are taken together to form =0, n=0, Y represents -E-D, and E represents a bond, then D does not represent unsubstituted phenyl; a /V-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Y represents -CR18=N-OR19.
3. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Y is
4. A compound according to claim 3 wherein E represents a bond, C2-4alkenediyl, -CO- (CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-, -NR22-(CR22R23)S-. -(CR22R23)S-NR22-, -(CR22R 3)s-CO- NR22-(CR22R23)s- or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s-.
5. A compound according to claim 4 wherein E represents a bond.
6. A compound according to claim 4 wherein E represents C2-4alkenediyl, -CO- (CR2 R23)s-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-, -NR 2-(CR22R23)S-, -(CR22R23)S-NR22-, -(CR22R23)s-CO- NR22-(CR 2R23)S- or -(CR22R23)s-NR22-CO-(CR22R23)s-.
7. A compound according to claim 6 wherein D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl.
8. a compound according to any one of the preceding claims wherein D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6- tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted.
9. A compound according to any one of the preceding claims wherein W is -N(R3)-.
10. A compound according to any one of claims 1 to 8 wherein W is -C(R3aR3b)-.
1 1. A compound according to any one of the preceding claims wherein R2 is
independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, d.4alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, C^alkoxy, hydroxyC-|.4alkyl, hydroxyCi_4alkoxy, haloC- alkoxy,
Figure imgf000290_0001
R13, Ci.4alkoxy substituted with R13, -C(=0)-R13, C1-4alkyl substituted with NR7R8, C1-4alkoxy substituted with NR7R8, -NR7R8 or -C(=0)-NR7R8.
12. A compound according to claim 1 1 wherein R2 represents Ci.4alkyloxy.
13. A compound according to any one of the preceding claims wherein R3 represents d- 6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, haloC^alkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with -
Figure imgf000291_0001
d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C1-6alkyl substituted with R9, C1-6alkyl substituted with - NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with one or two halogens and -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with
Figure imgf000291_0002
d-ealkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl, Chalky! substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-C1-6alkyl, C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR12-S(=0)2-NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R9, -C1-6alkyl-C(R12)=N-0-R12, C1-6alkyl substituted with -C(=O)-NR10R11, d-6alkyl substituted with -C(=0)-R9, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9, hydroxyC1-6alkoxy, C^alkenyl, C2-6alkynyl or R 3.
14. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R3 represents C2.6alkynyl, halod-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-C1-6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl optionally substituted with
Figure imgf000291_0003
hydroxyhalod-6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C1-6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-C1- 6alkyl, Ci_6alkyl substituted with R9, C2.6alkynyl substituted with R9,C1-6alkyl substituted with -NR10R11, C1-6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11.
15. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Y represents -CR18=N-OR19 or -E-D; R18 and R19 represent d-ealkyl; E represents a bond, C2.4alkenediyl, -CO-(CR22R 3)s-, -NR22- (CR 2R23)s-, -(CR 2R23)S-NR22-, -(CR22R23)s-CO-NR22-(CR2 R23)s- or -(CR22R23)S-NR22- CO-(CR22R23)s-; D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1 ,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1 ,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl, said rings being optionally substituted with halo, cyano, C1-6alkyl, Ci-6alkoxy, -C(=0)-0-C -6alkyl, hydroxyC1-6alkyl, - NR4R5, d-ealkyl substituted with -0-C(=0)- C1-6alkyl, d_6alkyl substituted with -NR4R5,- C(=0)-NR4R5, -C(=0)-C1-6alkyl-NR4R5, R6, C1-6alkyl substituted with R6; W is -N(R3)-; R2 represents d_4alkoxy; n is equal to 2; R3 represents d-6alkynyl, halod-6alkyl optionally substituted with -0-C(=0)-d_6alkyl, hydroxyd-6alkyl optionally substituted with -O- C(=0)-C1.6alkyl, hydroxyhalod.6alkyl, d-6alkoxyd-6alkyl wherein each C -6alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with -0-C(=0)-d_6alkyl, d- 6alkyl substituted with R9, C2-6alkynyl substituted with R9,d.6alkyl substituted with - NR10R11, Ci.6alkyl substituted with -O-C(=O)-NR10R11; R9 represents C3-6cycloalkyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, an optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic or saturated heterocycle, an optionally substituted bicyclic heterocycle; R10 and R11 represents hydrogen, Ci-6alkyl, haloC1-6alkyl, hydroxyC^alkyl, C -6alkyl substituted with -NR14R15, C1-6alkyl substituted with carboxyl; R6 represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturated or aromatic heterocyclyl which is optionally substituted; R14 and R15 each independently represent hydrogen or C1-4alkyl; R22 and R23 each independently represent hydrogen.
16. A compound according to any one of claims 1 to 15 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
17. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I) as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16.
18. A compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for use in therapy.
19. A compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase.
20. A compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for use in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
21. A compound as claimed in claim 20 for use in the treatment of cancer wherein the cancer is selected from prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer such as NSCLC, breast cancer, gastric cancer.and liver cancer.
22. Use of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase.
23. Use of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer.
24. Use of a compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16 for the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition as described herein.
25. A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the formula (I) as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 16.
PCT/GB2012/052673 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases WO2013061081A1 (en)

Priority Applications (16)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020147010838A KR102086871B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
CN201280065562.3A CN104024233B (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer Benzopyrazines Via The Inhibition Of Fgfr Kinases
SI201231698T SI2776408T1 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
IN986MUN2014 IN2014MN00986A (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26
DK12794746T DK2776408T3 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 ANTICANCER BENZOPYRAZINES WITH INHIBITION OF FGFR KINASES
BR112014010183A BR112014010183B8 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 COMPOUND, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, PRODUCT, AND, USE OF A COMPOUND
ES12794746T ES2765031T3 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anti-cancer benzopyrazines through inhibition of fgfr kinases
JP2014537731A JP6054406B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anti-cancer benzopyrazine via FGFR kinase inhibition
US14/354,636 US9303029B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
MX2014004861A MX356205B (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases.
RU2014121389A RU2639863C2 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anti-cancer benzopyrazines acting through fgfr-kinases inhibition
CA2853401A CA2853401C (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
EP12794746.3A EP2776408B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
AU2012328171A AU2012328171B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of FGFR kinases
US15/014,156 US10052320B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-02-03 Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
HRP20192102TT HRP20192102T1 (en) 2011-10-28 2019-11-22 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161552873P 2011-10-28 2011-10-28
GB1118654.1 2011-10-28
GBGB1118654.1A GB201118654D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-10-28 New compounds
US61/552,873 2011-10-28

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/354,636 A-371-Of-International US9303029B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US15/014,156 Continuation US10052320B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-02-03 Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013061081A1 true WO2013061081A1 (en) 2013-05-02

Family

ID=45373582

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2012/052673 WO2013061081A1 (en) 2011-10-28 2012-10-26 Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases

Country Status (18)

Country Link
US (2) US9303029B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2776408B1 (en)
JP (1) JP6054406B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102086871B1 (en)
CN (1) CN104024233B (en)
AU (1) AU2012328171B2 (en)
BR (1) BR112014010183B8 (en)
CA (1) CA2853401C (en)
DK (1) DK2776408T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2765031T3 (en)
GB (1) GB201118654D0 (en)
HR (1) HRP20192102T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE048704T2 (en)
IN (1) IN2014MN00986A (en)
MX (1) MX356205B (en)
RU (1) RU2639863C2 (en)
SI (1) SI2776408T1 (en)
WO (1) WO2013061081A1 (en)

Cited By (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8895601B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2014-11-25 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
US8933099B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2015-01-13 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Monocyclic pyridine derivative
WO2015144803A1 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinoxaline derivatives useful as fgfr kinase modulators
US9290478B2 (en) 2010-11-29 2016-03-22 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9303030B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2016-04-05 Astex Therapeutics Limited Compounds
US9303029B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-05 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9309242B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9309241B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Naphthyridine derivative compounds
US9439896B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-09-13 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinolines as FGFR kinase modulators
US9447098B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2016-09-20 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pteridines as FGFR inhibitors
US9493426B2 (en) 2013-04-26 2016-11-15 Astex Therapeutics Limited Quinazolinone derivatives useful as FGFR kinase modulators
WO2017050864A1 (en) 2015-09-23 2017-03-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv New compounds
WO2017157885A1 (en) 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Bayer Cropscience Aktiengesellschaft N-(cyanobenzyl)-6-(cyclopropyl-carbonylamino)-4-(phenyl)-pyridine-2-carboxamide derivatives and related compounds as pesticides and plant protection agents
EP3284739A1 (en) 2017-07-19 2018-02-21 Bayer CropScience Aktiengesellschaft Substituted (het) aryl compounds as pesticides
US9951047B2 (en) 2014-08-18 2018-04-24 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Salt of monocyclic pyridine derivative and crystal thereof
US10085982B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-10-02 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combinations
US10478494B2 (en) 2015-04-03 2019-11-19 Astex Therapeutics Ltd FGFR/PD-1 combination therapy for the treatment of cancer
WO2020131674A1 (en) * 2018-12-19 2020-06-25 Array Biopharma Inc. 7-((3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)amino)quinoxaline derivatives as fgfr inhibitors for treating cancer
US10736900B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2020-08-11 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combinations of an FGFR inhibitor and an IGF1R inhibitor
US10898482B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2021-01-26 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions comprising N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-N'-1 methylethyl)-N-[3-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)quinoxalin-6-yl]ethane-1,2-diamine
JP2021523875A (en) * 2018-02-08 2021-09-09 ▲ザン▼州片仔▲ファン▼薬業股▲フン▼有限公司Ｚｈａｎｇｚｈｏｕ Ｐｉｅｎ Ｔｚｅ Ｈｕａｎｇ Ｐｈａｒｍａｃｅｕｔｉｃａｌ Ｃｏ．， Ｌｔｄ． Pyrazine-2 (1H) -one compound as an FGFR inhibitor
US11219619B2 (en) 2018-03-28 2022-01-11 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Therapeutic agent for hepatocellular carcinoma
EP4011866A4 (en) * 2019-08-08 2022-08-24 Zhangzhou Pien Tze Huang Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd A crystalline form and b crystalline form of pyrazine-2(1h)-ketone compound and preparation method thereof
US11542247B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2023-01-03 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Bi-heteroaryl substitute 1,4-benzodiazepines and uses thereof for the treatment of cancer

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2946538A1 (en) 2014-04-04 2015-10-08 Del Mar Pharmaceuticals Use of dianhydrogalactitol and analogs or derivatives thereof to treat non-small-cell carcinoma of the lung and ovarian cancer
CN104370825B (en) * 2014-09-29 2017-04-19 人福医药集团股份公司 Substituted heterocyclic compound as kinase inhibitor and its preparation method and use
JP7206188B2 (en) * 2016-10-10 2023-01-17 ディベロップメント センター フォー バイオテクノロジー Quinoxaline compounds as type III receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitors
CN110981819B (en) * 2019-12-24 2022-07-01 广西师范大学 Quinoxaline signal channel inhibitor and preparation method and application thereof
WO2023220141A1 (en) * 2022-05-10 2023-11-16 H. Lee Moffitt Cancer Center And Research Institute, Inc. Inhibitors of glutathione s-transferase zeta 1 (gstz1) and methods of use

Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4666828A (en) 1984-08-15 1987-05-19 The General Hospital Corporation Test for Huntington's disease
US4683202A (en) 1985-03-28 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying nucleic acid sequences
US4801531A (en) 1985-04-17 1989-01-31 Biotechnology Research Partners, Ltd. Apo AI/CIII genomic polymorphisms predictive of atherosclerosis
US5192659A (en) 1989-08-25 1993-03-09 Genetype Ag Intron sequence analysis method for detection of adjacent and remote locus alleles as haplotypes
US5272057A (en) 1988-10-14 1993-12-21 Georgetown University Method of detecting a predisposition to cancer by the use of restriction fragment length polymorphism of the gene for human poly (ADP-ribose) polymerase
US5882864A (en) 1995-07-31 1999-03-16 Urocor Inc. Biomarkers and targets for diagnosis, prognosis and management of prostate disease
WO2000042026A1 (en) 1999-01-15 2000-07-20 Novo Nordisk A/S Non-peptide glp-1 agonists
US6218529B1 (en) 1995-07-31 2001-04-17 Urocor, Inc. Biomarkers and targets for diagnosis, prognosis and management of prostate, breast and bladder cancer
WO2001068047A2 (en) 2000-03-17 2001-09-20 Merck Patent Gmbh Preparation containing quinoxaline derivatives
WO2004030635A2 (en) 2002-10-03 2004-04-15 Targegen, Inc. Vasculostatic agents and methods of use thereof
WO2004098494A2 (en) 2003-04-30 2004-11-18 Cytokinetics, Inc. Compounds, compositions, and methods
WO2005007099A2 (en) 2003-07-10 2005-01-27 Imclone Systems Incorporated Pkb inhibitors as anti-tumor agents
WO2005009437A1 (en) * 2003-07-21 2005-02-03 Bethesda Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Design and synthesis of optimized ligands for ppar
WO2006092430A1 (en) 2005-03-03 2006-09-08 Universität des Saarlandes Selective inhibitors of human corticosteroid synthases
WO2007003419A1 (en) 2005-07-04 2007-01-11 Karo Bio Ab Heterocyclic compounds as agonists for the thyroid receptor
WO2008003702A2 (en) 2006-07-03 2008-01-10 Vereniging Voor Christelijk Hoger Onderwijs, Wetenschappelijk Onderzoek En Patientenzorg Fused bicyclic compounds interacting with the histamine h4 receptor
WO2008138878A2 (en) * 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Æterna Zentaris Gmbh Novel pyridopyrazine derivatives, process of manufacturing and uses thereof
WO2008141065A1 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Quinoxaline derivatives as p13 kinase inhibitors
WO2009141386A1 (en) 2008-05-23 2009-11-26 Novartis Ag Derivatives of quinolines and quinoxalines as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
WO2011028947A2 (en) 2009-09-03 2011-03-10 Bioenergenix Heterocyclic compounds for the inhibition of pask
WO2011026579A1 (en) 2009-09-04 2011-03-10 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted aminoquinoxalines as tyrosine threonine kinase inhibitors
WO2011135376A1 (en) 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 Astex Therapeutics Limited Pyrazolyl quinazoline kinase inhibitors

Family Cites Families (96)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2940972A (en) 1957-06-27 1960-06-14 Thomae Gmbh Dr K Tri-and tetra-substituted pteridine derivatives
GB9125001D0 (en) 1991-11-25 1992-01-22 Ici Plc Heterocyclic compounds
US5843941A (en) 1993-05-14 1998-12-01 Genentech, Inc. Ras farnesyl transferase inhibitors
US5700823A (en) 1994-01-07 1997-12-23 Sugen, Inc. Treatment of platelet derived growth factor related disorders such as cancers
US6331555B1 (en) 1995-06-01 2001-12-18 University Of California Treatment of platelet derived growth factor related disorders such as cancers
TW472045B (en) 1996-09-25 2002-01-11 Astra Ab Protein kinase C inhibitor compounds, method for their preparation, pharmaceutical composition thereof and intermediate used for their preparation
CZ298521B6 (en) 1997-05-28 2007-10-24 Aventis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Quinoline and quinoxaline derivative, pharmaceutical composition in which the derivative is comprised and use thereof
UA71555C2 (en) 1997-10-06 2004-12-15 Zentaris Gmbh Methods for modulating function of serine/threonine protein kinases by 5-azaquinoline derivatives
MXPA02001108A (en) 1999-09-15 2002-08-20 Warner Lambert Co Pteridinones as kinase inhibitors.
WO2002076985A1 (en) 2001-03-23 2002-10-03 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of hyperproliferative diseases
US7569592B2 (en) 2001-12-18 2009-08-04 Merck & Co., Inc. Heteroaryl substituted pyrazole modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptor-5
RU2323215C2 (en) 2001-12-24 2008-04-27 Астразенека Аб Substituted derivatives of quinazoline as aurorakinase inhibitors
JP2003213463A (en) 2002-01-17 2003-07-30 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Metal anticorrosive and cleaning solution
CA2480800C (en) 2002-04-08 2008-09-23 Mark T. Bilodeau Inhibitors of akt activity
US7265378B2 (en) 2002-07-10 2007-09-04 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Electronic devices made with electron transport and/or anti-quenching layers
US7825132B2 (en) 2002-08-23 2010-11-02 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Inhibition of FGFR3 and treatment of multiple myeloma
AR043059A1 (en) * 2002-11-12 2005-07-13 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corp DERIVATIVES OF INDOLIL PIRAZINONA USEFUL FOR THE TREATMENT OF HYPER-PROLIFERATIVE DISORDERS
US7098332B2 (en) 2002-12-20 2006-08-29 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. 5,8-Dihydro-6H-pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7-ones
EP1590341B1 (en) 2003-01-17 2009-06-17 Warner-Lambert Company LLC 2-aminopyridine substituted heterocycles as inhibitors of cellular proliferation
CN102584813B (en) 2003-05-14 2016-07-06 Ngc药物公司 Compound and the purposes in regulating amyloid beta thereof
PT1636228E (en) 2003-05-23 2009-02-02 Aeterna Zentaris Gmbh Novel pyridopyrazines and use thereof as kinase modulators
DE10323345A1 (en) 2003-05-23 2004-12-16 Zentaris Gmbh New pyridopyrazines and their use as kinase inhibitors
AU2004261667A1 (en) 2003-08-01 2005-02-10 Genelabs Technologies, Inc. Bicyclic imidazol derivatives against Flaviviridae
DE602004008312T2 (en) 2003-10-17 2008-04-17 4 Aza Ip Nv Heterocyclic-substituted pteridine derivatives and their use in therapy
KR101167573B1 (en) 2003-11-07 2012-07-30 노바티스 백신즈 앤드 다이아그노스틱스 인코포레이티드 Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of quinolinone compounds having improved pharmaceutical properties
CA2546300C (en) 2003-11-20 2012-10-02 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. 6-alkenyl and 6-phenylalkyl substituted 2-quinolinones and 2-quinoxalinones as poly(adp-ribose) polymerase inhibitors
MXPA06005735A (en) 2003-11-24 2006-08-17 Hoffmann La Roche Pyrazolyl and imidazolyl pyrimidines.
EP2228369A1 (en) 2003-12-23 2010-09-15 Astex Therapeutics Ltd. Pyrazole derivatives as protein kinase modulators
US7098222B2 (en) 2004-05-12 2006-08-29 Abbott Laboratories Bicyclic-substituted amines having cyclic-substituted monocyclic substituents
US7205316B2 (en) 2004-05-12 2007-04-17 Abbott Laboratories Tri- and bi-cyclic heteroaryl histamine-3 receptor ligands
BRPI0514691A (en) 2004-08-31 2008-06-17 Astrazeneca Ab compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, process for preparing it, pharmaceutical composition, and use of a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
MX2007004276A (en) 2004-10-14 2007-05-16 Hoffmann La Roche 1,5-naphthyridine azolidinones having cdk1 antiproliferative activity.
AU2005293384A1 (en) * 2004-10-15 2006-04-20 Astrazeneca Ab Quinoxalines as B Raf inhibitors
ES2425567T3 (en) 2004-12-24 2013-10-16 Spinifex Pharmaceuticals Pty Ltd Method of treatment or prophylaxis
WO2006084338A1 (en) 2005-02-14 2006-08-17 Bionomics Limited Novel tubulin polymerisation inhibitors
US20090156617A1 (en) 2005-05-12 2009-06-18 Northrup Alan B Tyrosine kinase inhibitors
MX2007014258A (en) 2005-05-18 2008-01-22 Wyeth Corp 4, 6-diamino-[1,7] naphthyridine-3-carbonitrile inhibitors of tpl2 kinase and methods of making and using the same.
ZA200801822B (en) 2005-08-26 2009-09-30 Serono Lab Pyrazine derivatives and use as p13k inhibitors
EP1790342A1 (en) 2005-11-11 2007-05-30 Zentaris GmbH Pyridopyrazine derivatives and their use as signal transduction modulators
KR101400905B1 (en) 2005-11-11 2014-05-29 아에테르나 젠타리스 게엠베하 Novel pyridopyrazines and their use as modulators of kinases
US8217042B2 (en) 2005-11-11 2012-07-10 Zentaris Gmbh Pyridopyrazines and their use as modulators of kinases
BRPI0620292B1 (en) 2005-12-21 2021-08-24 Janssen Pharmaceutica N. V. TRIAZOLOPYRIDAZINE COMPOUNDS AS KINASE MODULATORS, COMPOSITION, USE, COMBINATION AND PREPARATION PROCESS OF SUCH COMPOUND
CA2651072A1 (en) 2006-05-01 2007-11-08 Pfizer Products Inc. Substituted 2-amino-fused heterocyclic compounds
GB0609621D0 (en) 2006-05-16 2006-06-21 Astrazeneca Ab Novel co-crystal
ATE549338T1 (en) 2006-05-24 2012-03-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Int SUBSTITUTED PTERIDINES SUBSTITUTED WITH A FOUR-MEMBER HETEROCYCLE
JP2008127446A (en) 2006-11-20 2008-06-05 Canon Inc 1,5-naphthyridine compound and organic light emitting device
NZ578329A (en) 2006-12-13 2012-05-25 Schering Corp Igf1r inhibitors for treating cancer
US7872018B2 (en) 2006-12-21 2011-01-18 Plexxikon, Inc. Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
EP2114941B1 (en) 2006-12-22 2015-03-25 Astex Therapeutics Limited Bicyclic heterocyclic compounds as fgfr inhibitors
WO2008079988A2 (en) 2006-12-22 2008-07-03 Novartis Ag Quinazolines for pdk1 inhibition
KR20080062876A (en) 2006-12-29 2008-07-03 주식회사 대웅제약 Novel antifungal triazole derivatives
JP2010529031A (en) 2007-05-29 2010-08-26 グラクソスミスクライン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Naphthyridine derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
AR066879A1 (en) 2007-06-08 2009-09-16 Novartis Ag DERIVATIVES OF QUINOXALINE AS INHIBITORS OF THE TYPOSINE CINASA ACTIVITY OF THE JANUS CINASES
PL2172450T3 (en) 2007-06-20 2014-03-31 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corp Novel malonic acid sulfonamide derivative and pharmaceutical use thereof
US8629144B2 (en) 2007-06-21 2014-01-14 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Polymorphic and hydrate forms, salts and process for preparing 6-{difluoro[6-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-b]pyridazin-3-yl]methyl}quinoline
JP2010535804A (en) 2007-08-09 2010-11-25 グラクソスミスクライン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Quinoxaline derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
WO2009019518A1 (en) 2007-08-09 2009-02-12 Astrazeneca Ab Pyrimidine compounds having a fgfr inhibitory effect
US20090054304A1 (en) 2007-08-23 2009-02-26 Kalypsys, Inc. Heterocyclic modulators of tgr5 for treatment of disease
MY152948A (en) 2007-11-16 2014-12-15 Incyte Corp 4-pyrazolyl-n-arylpyrimidin-2-amines and 4-pyrazolyl-n-heteroarylpyrimidin-2-amines as janus kinase inhibitors
MX2010012064A (en) 2008-05-05 2010-12-06 Schering Corp Sequential administration of chemotherapeutic agents for treatment of cancer.
JP2012509342A (en) 2008-11-20 2012-04-19 オーエスアイ・フアーマスーテイカルズ・インコーポレーテツド Substituted pyrrolo [2,3-B] -pyridine and -pyrazine
AU2010206161B2 (en) 2009-01-21 2014-08-07 Basilea Pharmaceutica Ag Novel bicyclic antibiotics
WO2010088177A1 (en) 2009-02-02 2010-08-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Inhibitors of akt activity
TW201041888A (en) 2009-05-06 2010-12-01 Plexxikon Inc Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
RU2567752C2 (en) 2009-06-12 2015-11-10 Абивакс Compounds suitable for cancer treatment
US20110123545A1 (en) 2009-11-24 2011-05-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Combination of vegfr2 and igf1r inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
EP2332939A1 (en) 2009-11-26 2011-06-15 Æterna Zentaris GmbH Novel Naphthyridine derivatives and the use thereof as kinase inhibitors
CA2829790C (en) 2010-03-30 2018-06-05 Verseon Corporation Multisubstituted aromatic compounds as inhibitors of thrombin
US8513421B2 (en) 2010-05-19 2013-08-20 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted hydroxamic acids and uses thereof
WO2011149937A1 (en) 2010-05-24 2011-12-01 Intellikine, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
GB201020179D0 (en) 2010-11-29 2011-01-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
CN102532141A (en) 2010-12-08 2012-07-04 中国科学院上海药物研究所 (1,2,4)-triazolo-(4,3-b) (1,2,4)-triazine compounds, as well as preparation method and use thereof
KR101928116B1 (en) 2011-01-31 2018-12-11 노파르티스 아게 Novel heterocyclic derivatives
US9295673B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2016-03-29 Intellikine Llc Combination of mTOR inhibitors and P13-kinase inhibitors, and uses thereof
WO2012118492A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-09-07 Array Biopharma Inc. Heterocyclic sulfonamides as raf inhibitors
WO2013032951A1 (en) 2011-08-26 2013-03-07 Neupharma, Inc. Certain chemical entities, compositions, and methods
WO2013040515A1 (en) * 2011-09-14 2013-03-21 Neupharma, Inc. Certain chemical entities, compositions, and methods
US9249110B2 (en) 2011-09-21 2016-02-02 Neupharma, Inc. Substituted quinoxalines as B-raf kinase inhibitors
WO2013052699A2 (en) 2011-10-04 2013-04-11 Gilead Calistoga Llc Novel quinoxaline inhibitors of pi3k
CA2853256C (en) 2011-10-28 2019-05-14 Novartis Ag Novel purine derivatives and their use in the treatment of disease
GB201118675D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-12-14 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
GB201118654D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-12-07 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
JO3210B1 (en) 2011-10-28 2018-03-08 Merck Sharp & Dohme Fused bicyclic oxazolidinone cetp inhibitor
GB201118652D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-12-07 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
GB201118656D0 (en) 2011-10-28 2011-12-07 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
ES2702305T3 (en) 2012-03-08 2019-02-28 Astellas Pharma Inc New fusion product of FGFR3
GB201209613D0 (en) 2012-05-30 2012-07-11 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
GB201209609D0 (en) 2012-05-30 2012-07-11 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
US20150203589A1 (en) 2012-07-24 2015-07-23 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Fusion proteins and methods thereof
GB201307577D0 (en) 2013-04-26 2013-06-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd New compounds
US9221804B2 (en) 2013-10-15 2015-12-29 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Secondary alcohol quinolinyl modulators of RORγt
RU2715893C2 (en) 2014-03-26 2020-03-04 Астекс Терапьютикс Лтд Combination of inhibitor fgfr and inhibitor igf1r
JO3512B1 (en) 2014-03-26 2020-07-05 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinoxaline derivatives useful as fgfr kinase modulators
PL3122358T3 (en) 2014-03-26 2021-06-14 Astex Therapeutics Ltd. Combinations of fgfr- and cmet-inhibitors for the treatment of cancer
JOP20200201A1 (en) 2015-02-10 2017-06-16 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions comprising n-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-n'-(1-methylethyl)-n-[3-(1-methyl-1h-pyrazol-4-yl)quinoxalin-6-yl]ethane-1,2-diamine
US10478494B2 (en) 2015-04-03 2019-11-19 Astex Therapeutics Ltd FGFR/PD-1 combination therapy for the treatment of cancer

Patent Citations (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4666828A (en) 1984-08-15 1987-05-19 The General Hospital Corporation Test for Huntington's disease
US4683202A (en) 1985-03-28 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying nucleic acid sequences
US4683202B1 (en) 1985-03-28 1990-11-27 Cetus Corp
US4801531A (en) 1985-04-17 1989-01-31 Biotechnology Research Partners, Ltd. Apo AI/CIII genomic polymorphisms predictive of atherosclerosis
US5272057A (en) 1988-10-14 1993-12-21 Georgetown University Method of detecting a predisposition to cancer by the use of restriction fragment length polymorphism of the gene for human poly (ADP-ribose) polymerase
US5192659A (en) 1989-08-25 1993-03-09 Genetype Ag Intron sequence analysis method for detection of adjacent and remote locus alleles as haplotypes
US5882864A (en) 1995-07-31 1999-03-16 Urocor Inc. Biomarkers and targets for diagnosis, prognosis and management of prostate disease
US6218529B1 (en) 1995-07-31 2001-04-17 Urocor, Inc. Biomarkers and targets for diagnosis, prognosis and management of prostate, breast and bladder cancer
WO2000042026A1 (en) 1999-01-15 2000-07-20 Novo Nordisk A/S Non-peptide glp-1 agonists
WO2001068047A2 (en) 2000-03-17 2001-09-20 Merck Patent Gmbh Preparation containing quinoxaline derivatives
WO2004030635A2 (en) 2002-10-03 2004-04-15 Targegen, Inc. Vasculostatic agents and methods of use thereof
WO2004098494A2 (en) 2003-04-30 2004-11-18 Cytokinetics, Inc. Compounds, compositions, and methods
WO2005007099A2 (en) 2003-07-10 2005-01-27 Imclone Systems Incorporated Pkb inhibitors as anti-tumor agents
WO2005009437A1 (en) * 2003-07-21 2005-02-03 Bethesda Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Design and synthesis of optimized ligands for ppar
WO2006092430A1 (en) 2005-03-03 2006-09-08 Universität des Saarlandes Selective inhibitors of human corticosteroid synthases
WO2007003419A1 (en) 2005-07-04 2007-01-11 Karo Bio Ab Heterocyclic compounds as agonists for the thyroid receptor
WO2008003702A2 (en) 2006-07-03 2008-01-10 Vereniging Voor Christelijk Hoger Onderwijs, Wetenschappelijk Onderzoek En Patientenzorg Fused bicyclic compounds interacting with the histamine h4 receptor
WO2008138878A2 (en) * 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Æterna Zentaris Gmbh Novel pyridopyrazine derivatives, process of manufacturing and uses thereof
WO2008141065A1 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Quinoxaline derivatives as p13 kinase inhibitors
WO2009141386A1 (en) 2008-05-23 2009-11-26 Novartis Ag Derivatives of quinolines and quinoxalines as protein tyrosine kinase inhibitors
WO2011028947A2 (en) 2009-09-03 2011-03-10 Bioenergenix Heterocyclic compounds for the inhibition of pask
WO2011026579A1 (en) 2009-09-04 2011-03-10 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted aminoquinoxalines as tyrosine threonine kinase inhibitors
WO2011135376A1 (en) 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 Astex Therapeutics Limited Pyrazolyl quinazoline kinase inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Current Protocols in Molecular Biology", 2004, JOHN WILEY & SONS INC
"Current Protocols in Molecular Biology", 2004, JOHN WILEY & SONS INC.
"PCR Protocols: a guide to methods and applications", 1990, ACADEMIC PRESS
"Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use", 2002, pages: 388
ANGERER, METH. ENZYMOL., vol. 152, 1987, pages 649
BERGE ET AL.: "Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts", J. PHARM. SCI., vol. 66, 1977, pages 1 - 19
CAHN; INGOLD; PRELOG, ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED. ENGL., vol. 5, 1966, pages 385 - 415
CAHN; INGOLD; PRELOG: "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 1992, JOHN WILEY & SONS, pages: 109 - 114
DEPRIMO ET AL., BMC CANCER, vol. 3, 2003, pages 3
JERRY MARCH: "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 1992, WILEY INTERSCIENCE, pages: 131 - 133
JERRY MARCH: "Advanced Organic Chemistry", WILEY INTERSCIENCE
JOHN M. S. BARTLETT: "Molecular Diagnosis of Cancer, Methods and Protocols", March 2004, article "Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization: Technical Overview", pages: 077 - 088
L. W. DEADY, SYN. COMM., vol. 7, 1977, pages 509 - 514
ORRE; ROGERS, INT J CANCER, vol. 84, no. 2, 1999, pages 101 - 8
SAMBROOK ET AL.: "Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual", 2001, COLD SPRING HARBOR LABORATORY PRESS
YAN ET AL: "An efficient synthesis of quinoxaline derivatives from 4-chloro-4-deoxy-alpha-d-galactose and their cytotoxic activities", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, PERGAMON, ELSEVIER SCIENCE, GB, vol. 17, no. 3, 19 January 2007 (2007-01-19), pages 609 - 612, XP005835902, ISSN: 0960-894X, DOI: 10.1016/J.BMCL.2006.11.007 *

Cited By (46)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9464071B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2016-10-11 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
US10519137B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2019-12-31 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
US9850228B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2017-12-26 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
US8895601B2 (en) 2010-04-30 2014-11-25 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pyrazolyl quinoxaline kinase inhibitors
US9856236B2 (en) 2010-11-29 2018-01-02 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9290478B2 (en) 2010-11-29 2016-03-22 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9303029B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-05 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US10052320B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2018-08-21 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted quinoxalines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9439896B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-09-13 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinolines as FGFR kinase modulators
US10045982B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2018-08-14 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US9309242B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Substituted pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazines as FGFR kinase inhibitors
US10039759B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2018-08-07 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinolines as FGFR kinase modulators
US9527844B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-12-27 Astex Therapeutics Limited Naphthyridine derivative compounds
US9309241B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2016-04-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Naphthyridine derivative compounds
US9757364B2 (en) 2011-10-28 2017-09-12 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Naphthyridine derivative compounds
US9737544B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2017-08-22 Astex Therapeutics Limited Compounds
US10272087B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2019-04-30 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pteridines as FGFR inhibitors
US9303030B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2016-04-05 Astex Therapeutics Limited Compounds
US9447098B2 (en) 2012-05-30 2016-09-20 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pteridines as FGFR inhibitors
US8933099B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2015-01-13 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Monocyclic pyridine derivative
US9493426B2 (en) 2013-04-26 2016-11-15 Astex Therapeutics Limited Quinazolinone derivatives useful as FGFR kinase modulators
WO2015144803A1 (en) 2014-03-26 2015-10-01 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinoxaline derivatives useful as fgfr kinase modulators
US9902714B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-02-27 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinoxaline derivatives useful as FGFR kinase modulators
US11918576B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2024-03-05 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combination of an FGFR inhibitor and a CMET inhibitor
US10085982B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2018-10-02 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combinations
US10736900B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2020-08-11 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combinations of an FGFR inhibitor and an IGF1R inhibitor
US10421747B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2019-09-24 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Quinoxaline derivatives useful as FGFR kinase modulators
US10716787B2 (en) 2014-03-26 2020-07-21 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Combinations
US9951047B2 (en) 2014-08-18 2018-04-24 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Salt of monocyclic pyridine derivative and crystal thereof
US10898482B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2021-01-26 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions comprising N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-N'-1 methylethyl)-N-[3-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)quinoxalin-6-yl]ethane-1,2-diamine
US11684620B2 (en) 2015-02-10 2023-06-27 Astex Therapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions comprising N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-N′-(1-methylethyl)-N-[3-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)quinoxalin-6-yl]ethane-1,2-diamine
US10478494B2 (en) 2015-04-03 2019-11-19 Astex Therapeutics Ltd FGFR/PD-1 combination therapy for the treatment of cancer
US11542247B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2023-01-03 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Bi-heteroaryl substitute 1,4-benzodiazepines and uses thereof for the treatment of cancer
WO2017050864A1 (en) 2015-09-23 2017-03-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv New compounds
US11155555B2 (en) 2015-09-23 2021-10-26 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Compounds
WO2017157885A1 (en) 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Bayer Cropscience Aktiengesellschaft N-(cyanobenzyl)-6-(cyclopropyl-carbonylamino)-4-(phenyl)-pyridine-2-carboxamide derivatives and related compounds as pesticides and plant protection agents
EP3284739A1 (en) 2017-07-19 2018-02-21 Bayer CropScience Aktiengesellschaft Substituted (het) aryl compounds as pesticides
JP2021523875A (en) * 2018-02-08 2021-09-09 ▲ザン▼州片仔▲ファン▼薬業股▲フン▼有限公司Ｚｈａｎｇｚｈｏｕ Ｐｉｅｎ Ｔｚｅ Ｈｕａｎｇ Ｐｈａｒｍａｃｅｕｔｉｃａｌ Ｃｏ．， Ｌｔｄ． Pyrazine-2 (1H) -one compound as an FGFR inhibitor
US11286248B2 (en) 2018-02-08 2022-03-29 Zhangzhou Pien Tze Huang Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Pyrazine-2(1H)-ketone compound acting as FGFR inhibitor
JP7168149B2 (en) 2018-02-08 2022-11-09 ▲ザン▼州片仔▲ファン▼薬業股▲フン▼有限公司 Pyrazin-2(1H)-one compounds as FGFR inhibitors
EP3750880A4 (en) * 2018-02-08 2021-10-27 Zhangzhou Pien Tze Huang Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd Pyrazine-2(1h)-ketone compound acting as fgfr inhibitor
US11219619B2 (en) 2018-03-28 2022-01-11 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Therapeutic agent for hepatocellular carcinoma
US20220041579A1 (en) * 2018-12-19 2022-02-10 Array Biopharma Inc. Substituted quinoxaline compounds as inhibitors of fgfr tyrosine kinases
WO2020131674A1 (en) * 2018-12-19 2020-06-25 Array Biopharma Inc. 7-((3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)amino)quinoxaline derivatives as fgfr inhibitors for treating cancer
EP4011866A4 (en) * 2019-08-08 2022-08-24 Zhangzhou Pien Tze Huang Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd A crystalline form and b crystalline form of pyrazine-2(1h)-ketone compound and preparation method thereof
US11603366B2 (en) 2019-08-08 2023-03-14 Zhangzhou Pien Tze Huang Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Crystalline form and B crystalline form of pyrazine-2(1H)-ketone compound and preparation method thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104024233B (en) 2017-05-24
CN104024233A (en) 2014-09-03
GB201118654D0 (en) 2011-12-07
DK2776408T3 (en) 2019-12-02
KR20140084063A (en) 2014-07-04
CA2853401A1 (en) 2013-05-02
JP6054406B2 (en) 2016-12-27
RU2014121389A (en) 2015-12-10
RU2639863C2 (en) 2017-12-25
MX356205B (en) 2018-05-18
KR102086871B1 (en) 2020-03-09
CA2853401C (en) 2022-02-15
EP2776408B1 (en) 2019-11-06
IN2014MN00986A (en) 2015-04-24
US10052320B2 (en) 2018-08-21
HUE048704T2 (en) 2020-08-28
AU2012328171A1 (en) 2014-03-27
US20150031669A1 (en) 2015-01-29
HRP20192102T1 (en) 2020-02-21
JP2014534212A (en) 2014-12-18
EP2776408A1 (en) 2014-09-17
ES2765031T3 (en) 2020-06-05
US20160220564A1 (en) 2016-08-04
MX2014004861A (en) 2014-08-21
US9303029B2 (en) 2016-04-05
BR112014010183B1 (en) 2022-03-29
BR112014010183B8 (en) 2022-09-13
SI2776408T1 (en) 2020-02-28
AU2012328171B2 (en) 2017-08-17
BR112014010183A2 (en) 2017-05-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2012328171B2 (en) Anticancer benzopyrazines via the inhibition of FGFR kinases
EP2855480B1 (en) Pteridines as fgfr inhibitors
US9737544B2 (en) Compounds
EP2989092B1 (en) Quinazolinone derivatives useful as fgfr kinase modulators
EP2776435B1 (en) Anticancer pyridopyrazines via the inhibition of fgfr kinases
AU2012328167B9 (en) New compounds
AU2012328164B2 (en) Quinolines as FGFR kinase modulators
WO2012073017A1 (en) Substituted benzopyrazin derivatives as fgfr kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer diseases

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12794746

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2012328171

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20121026

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2014/004861

Country of ref document: MX

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20147010838

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2853401

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014537731

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 14354636

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2014121389

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2012794746

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112014010183

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112014010183

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20140428